Canon imagePROGRAF iPF8300S User Manual Download Page 958 | Manualshive

Page: 958 / 1172

background image

First Level

Second

Level

Third Level

Fourth Lev-

el

Fifth Level

Sixth Level

Seventh Level

Printer Info

Head Info

Printhead
R

s/n:

Days elapsed:

Count [Mdot]:

System Info

Error Log

Other Counter

*1: Available after you have used

Auto(Advanced)

in

Head Posi. Adj.

once.

*2: Available if

Adj. Priority

is

Automatic

or

Print Quality

.

*3: Available if

Adj. Priority

is

Automatic

or

Print Length

.

*4: Not displayed if

IPv4 Mode

is

Manual

.

*5: Not displayed if

NetWare

is

Off

.

*6: Not displayed if

Auto Detect

is

On

.

*7: Follows the setting in

Date Format

.

*8: Viewing and configuration is possible for administrators, and only viewing for other users.
*9: Viewing and configuration is possible for administrators only.
*10: Not displayed if

IPv6 Support

is

Off

.

*11: Default setting for the time to enter the power save mode/Sleep mode is recommended.
*12: Displayed only when the Media Take-up Unit is attached.
*13: : Available if: (a)

Use Take-up Reel

is

Enable

, (b) roll paper is loaded, and (c) you have not executed

Auto

Feed

for the loaded roll.

*14: Available when

Use Take-up Reel

is

Enable

.

Menu Settings

Menu items are as follows.
For instructions on selecting menu items,

see "

Menu Operations

."

→P.925

For details on menu levels and values,

see "

Menu Structure

."

→P.928

Paper Menu

Setting Item

Description, Instructions

Load Paper

Select either sheets or rolls and load the paper.

Eject Paper

Choose this item before removing loaded paper.

Chg. Paper Type

(

*1

→P.940

)

Change the type of paper loaded.

(See "

Changing the Type

of Paper

.")

→P.791

Chg. Paper Size

Change the size of paper loaded.

(See "

Specifying the Paper

Length

.")

→P.793

(See "

Paper Sizes

.")

→P.775

ManageRemainRoll

Choose

On

to print a barcode at the end of a roll before you

remove it. The printed barcode can be used in managing the
amount of roll paper left. Choose

Off

if you prefer not to

print the barcode.

(See "

Keeping Track of the Amount of Roll Paper Left

.")

→P.799

Control Panel

>

Printer Menu

>

Menu Settings

iPF8300S

9

938

«
...
956
957
958
959
960
...
»

Summary of Contents for imagePROGRAF iPF8300S

Page 1: ...c OS X Software 486 4 Print Job Operations 719 5 Handling Paper 773 6 Adjustments for Better Print Quality 847 7 Printer Parts 895 8 Control Panel 913 9 Network Setting 958 10 Maintenance and Consumables 995 11 Troubleshooting 1054 12 Error Message 1092 13 Specifications 1122 14 Appendix 1128 15 ver1 00 2011 02 14 ENG ...

Page 2: ...erted from the HTML format instruction manual included on the User Manuals CD ROM supplied with the printer Thus there are descriptions that are applied only in HTML format and functions video display function etc that cannot be used We appreciate your understanding ...

Page 3: ...d Images Mac OS X 25 Printing from Photoshop 29 Printing Adobe RGB Images Windows 30 Printing Adobe RGB Images Mac OS X 34 Printing Office Documents 38 Printing Office Documents Windows 38 Printing Office Documents Mac OS X 40 Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals 44 Printing CAD Drawings 47 Printing Line Drawings and Text 47 Printing Line Drawings and Text Windows 47 Printing Line Drawings and ...

Page 4: ...ing banners or at other non standard sizes 122 Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners Large Format Printing 122 Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners Large Format Printing Windows 123 Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners Large Format Printing Mac OS X 128 Printing on Non Standard Paper Sizes 131 Printing on Non Standard Paper Sizes Windows 132 Printing on Non Standard Paper Sizes Mac OS X 13...

Page 5: ...6 Cutting Roll Paper After Printing Mac OS X 198 Windows Software 201 Printer Driver 202 Printer Driver Settings 202 Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver 204 Confirming Print Settings 207 Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing 208 Using Favorites 209 Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications 211 Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu 213 ...

Page 6: ...oving an Object 280 Rotating an Object 281 Laying out Objects Automatically 282 Aligning Objects 282 Changing the Object Overlapping Order 284 Pasting a Copied or Cut Object 286 Folded Duplex Window 287 Finished Size Settings Dialog Box 288 Binding Settings Dialog Box 289 Prints using Folded Duplex 290 Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy 292 The Features of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy 292 Op...

Page 7: ...ng Adobe CMM 349 Perform Black Point Compensation 351 Perform Printing Press Simulation Print 352 Enlarge Reduce and Print 353 Enlarge Reduce and Print Matching Output Media Size 353 Enlarge Reduce and Print Matching Width of Roll Paper 355 Specify Scaling Enlarge Reduce and Print 356 Print with No Borders 357 Customize Media Settings 358 Utilize Print History 359 Confirm Print History Details 359...

Page 8: ...ing the Unit Cost for Items Other Than Ink and Paper 437 Configuring Units and Display Settings in Accounting Manager 438 Automatically Acquiring Print Job Logs at Regular Intervals 439 Canceling Regular Print Job Log Acquisition 439 Switching Between Displaying Jobs on Printer and Regularly Acquired Jobs 439 Exporting Print Job Data as a CSV File 440 Showing Job Properties 440 Showing Saving and ...

Page 9: ...g Box 499 Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box 500 View settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application 503 Matching pane 503 Ambient Light Adjust dialog box 506 Light Source Check Tool 508 Color Settings Pane Color 509 Object Adjustment dialog box Color 510 Color Settings Pane Monochrome 511 Object Adjustment dialog box Monochrome 512 Gray Adjustment Pane 513 Page Setup Pane 514 Utility Pane 516 A...

Page 10: ...g Box 574 Laying out a Multiple File Document on One Page 575 Laying out a Document Created with Multiple Application Programs on One Page 575 Selecting an Object 576 Changing the Object Size 576 Moving an Object 577 Rotating an Object 578 Laying out Objects Automatically 579 Aligning Objects 579 Changing the Object Overlapping Order 581 Pasting a Copied or Cut Object 583 Color imageRUNNER Enlarge...

Page 11: ...h Roll Paper Preview 641 Print with a Desired Picture Quality 641 Adjust the Colors and Print 642 Adjust the Colors while Checking the Preview for Color 643 Adjust the Colors while Checking the Preview for Monochrome 644 Adjust the Colors by Color Matching 648 Print High Quality Adobe RGB16bit Images 649 Prints monochrome photographs with high quality 651 Using Adobe CMM 651 Perform Black Point Co...

Page 12: ...713 Export Custom Media Information 713 Import Custom Media Information 715 Warnings 717 Print Job Operations 719 Basic Print Job Operations 720 Using the Printer Hard Disk 720 Saving Print Jobs on the Printer Hard Disk 722 Managing the Job Queue Deleting or Preempting Other Jobs 725 Managing Pending Jobs Printing or Deleting Jobs on Hold 728 Printing Saved Jobs 730 Deleting Saved Jobs 737 Moving ...

Page 13: ...Enabling Roll Take Up 832 Disabling Roll Take Up 833 Loading the Rewind Spool on the Media Take up Unit 834 Removing Printed Documents from the Media Take up Unit Optional 842 Adjustments for Better Print Quality 847 Adjustment for high precision printing 848 Enhancing Printing Quality 848 Adjusting the Printhead 850 Adjusting the Printhead 850 Automatic Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors H...

Page 14: ...900 Ink Tank Cover Inside 901 Stand 903 Media Take up Unit Optional 904 Hard Disk 906 Printer Hard Disk Operations 906 Checking the Free Hard Disk Space 907 Erasing Data on the Printer s Hard Disk 909 Optional accessories 911 Roll Holder Set 911 Media Take up Unit 911 Control Panel 913 Operations and Display Screen 914 Control Panel 914 Control Panel Display 916 How to View Instructions With Navig...

Page 15: ...iguring the Destination for AppleTalk Networks 988 Configuring the Printer s AppleTalk Network Settings 989 Other Settings 991 Specifying Printer Related Information 991 Configuring the Communication Mode Manually 992 Email Notification When Printing is Finished or Errors Occur 993 Initializing the Network Settings 993 Maintenance and Consumables 995 Ink Tanks 996 Ink Tanks 996 Replacing Ink Tanks...

Page 16: ...creen 1070 The printer ejects blank unprinted paper 1070 Problems with the printing quality 1071 Printing is faint 1071 Paper rubs against the printhead 1072 The edges of the paper are dirty 1073 The surface of the paper is dirty 1074 The back side of the paper is dirty 1074 Immediately after borderless printing the trailing edge margin is soiled during regular printing 1074 Printed colors are ina...

Page 17: ...t be used as size is not supported 1100 Roll printing is selected 1101 Roll printing is selected but sheets are loaded 1101 The roll is empty 1101 No sheets 1102 Sheet printing is selected 1102 Regular printing is selected but a roll is loaded 1102 Paper loaded askew 1103 Cannot feed paper 1103 Cannot cut this paper 1104 End of paper feed 1104 Rel lever is in wrong position 1104 Rewinding error 11...

Page 18: ...e 1115 No maintenance cartridge 1115 Wrong maintenance cartridge 1115 Maint cart The level is low 1115 No Maintenance Cartridge capacity 1115 Maintenance cartridge full 1115 Maintenance cartridge problem 1116 Messages regarding the hard disk 1117 Hard disk error 1117 File read error 1117 The mail box is full 1117 Mail box full Now printing without saving data 1117 Mail box nearly full 1118 Maximum...

Page 19: ...How to use this manual 1129 About This User Manual 1129 Searching Topics 1130 HTML Version of the Manual for Printing 1132 Disposal of the product 1139 WEEE Directive 1140 ...

Page 20: ......

Page 21: ...Basic Printing Workflow Printing procedure 2 Canceling print jobs 14 Pausing Printing 19 Basic Printing Workflow iPF8300S 1 1 ...

Page 22: ...sily print vertical or horizontal banners from familiar applications such as Microsoft Office applications See Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners Large Format Printing P 122 Borderless printing Print without a margin border around posters or photos See Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size P 107 See Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width P 114 See Borderless...

Page 23: ...ee Layout function Print multiple documents from multiple applications such as word processing programs spreadsheet programs and so on next to each other See Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other P 139 Turning the Printer On and Off Turning the printer on 1 Press the Power button to turn on the printer The printer will now start up After the Display Screen shows the Canon logo Starting up...

Page 24: ...loaded Load paper See Loading and Printing on Rolls P 5 See Loading and Printing on Sheets P 9 Important Starting the printer when it is connected via the USB cable to a Macintosh computer that is off may cause the computer to start up at the same time To prevent this disconnect the USB cable before starting the printer Connecting the printer to the computer via a USB hub may solve this issue Turn...

Page 25: ... when printing long documents such as banners spread a clean cloth or paper on the floor Use the Output Stacker to prevent long printed documents from being soiled by the floor after they are printed See Using the Output Stacker P 823 Note For details on supported sizes and types of rolls see Paper Sizes or the Paper Reference Guide See Paper Sizes P 775 See Types of Paper P 774 To wait until the ...

Page 26: ...rinter on See Turning the Printer On and Off P 3 2 Load the roll on the Roll Holder See Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls P 782 Basic Printing Workflow Printing procedure Loading and Printing on Rolls iPF8300S 1 6 ...

Page 27: ...3 Load the roll in the printer See Loading Rolls in the Printer P 786 Basic Printing Workflow Printing procedure iPF8300S Loading and Printing on Rolls 1 7 ...

Page 28: ...etting the Blue Switch on the Platen P 1078 4 Select the type of paper See Changing the Type of Paper P 791 Note If no barcode has been printed on the roll and you have set ManageRemainRoll to On specify the roll length after the type of paper See Specifying the Paper Length P 793 Basic Printing Workflow Printing procedure Loading and Printing on Rolls iPF8300S 1 8 ...

Page 29: ...iver Mac OS X P 489 6 Send the print job Printing in Windows P 11 Printing from Mac OS X P 12 The printer now starts printing the print job Loading and Printing on Sheets These are the basic steps for loading sheets and then printing Follow the steps below to load and print on sheets Basic Printing Workflow Printing procedure iPF8300S Loading and Printing on Sheets 1 9 ...

Page 30: ...nting methods available for sheet printing see Printing Options Using Rolls and Sheets P 2 1 Turn the printer on See Turning the Printer On and Off P 3 2 Complete settings in the printer driver for the type of paper and other details Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver Windows P 204 Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver Mac OS X P 489 Basic Printing Workflow Printing procedure Loading and Prin...

Page 31: ...3 Start printing Printing in Windows Print from the application menu Important We recommend exiting unnecessary applications before printing Running several applications while printing may interrupt the transfer of print data and affect printing quality Basic Printing Workflow Printing procedure iPF8300S Printing in Windows 1 11 ...

Page 32: ...rderless printing and so on are displayed in the printer driver dialog box There are two ways to access the printer driver dialog box as follows From the application See Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications Windows P 211 From the operating system menu See Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu Windows P 213 Printing from Mac OS X Print from the ...

Page 33: ...ox includes basic printing options and enables you to choose the printer specify the range of pages number of copies and so on 2 Select the printer in the Printer list 3 Click Print to start printing As shown in the following illustration you can switch to other panes in this dialog box to complete settings for vari ous methods of printing including enlarged and reduced printing borderless printin...

Page 34: ...t jobs press the Stop button on the Control Panel When you press the Stop button during printing printer operation varies depending on the current status If you press the Stop button before printing starts Pressing the Stop button before printing starts will display a confirmation message To cancel the print job select Yes Basic Printing Workflow Canceling print jobs Canceling Print Jobs from the ...

Page 35: ... are currently being printed 1 Click the printer icon in the taskbar to display the printer window Note You can also display this window by double clicking the printer icon in the Printers and Faxes or Printers folder accessible through the Windows start menu 2 Right click the job to cancel and select Cancel 3 If the job to cancel is not shown in the printer window that is if the print data has al...

Page 36: ...are shown in the printer window while they are being sent from the computer After transmission jobs are not displayed even during printing Print jobs are displayed in the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor window from the moment the printer starts re ceiving the print data until the moment printing is finished They are not displayed before print data is sent to the printer even if the computer has started ...

Page 37: ...o jobs in the printer window that can be canceled that is if the print data has already been sent to the printer click Utility to display imagePROGRAF Printmonitor Basic Printing Workflow Canceling print jobs iPF8300S Canceling Print Jobs from Mac OS X 1 17 ...

Page 38: ...o the printer is canceled 5 Exit imagePROGRAF Printmonitor In the printer window click Resume Printer Important Always follow these steps if you cancel print jobs from imagePROGRAF Printmonitor If you do not restart job processing the next job cannot be printed Basic Printing Workflow Canceling print jobs Canceling Print Jobs from Mac OS X iPF8300S 1 18 ...

Page 39: ...ng cases the status is cleared even if you do not set Pause Print to Off and printing from the job queue resumes When paper is advanced When you execute Chg Paper Type in the Paper Menu 1 During printing on the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel press or to select the Job tab Note If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed press the Menu button 2 Press the OK button The Job Menu is displa...

Page 40: ...es 55 Printing enlargements or reductions 73 Printing at full size 93 Borderless Printing 107 Printing banners or at other non standard sizes 122 Tiling and multiple pages per sheet 139 Centering originals 160 Conserving roll paper 172 Checking Images Before Printing 184 Other useful settings 186 Enhanced Printing Options iPF8300S 2 20 ...

Page 41: ...ts may not be suitable If the paper type is not listed for selection If the type of paper loaded cannot be selected try specifying glossy paper or proofing paper as a special paper Special 1 to Special 5 in this order BK Black Ink is used as the black ink Try specifying other types of paper as Special 6 to Special 10 MBK Matte Black Ink is used as the black ink Note that higher numbers in this set...

Page 42: ... driver you can easily configure the printing of illustrations and photos Print Target Description Photo Color Print photographic images from digital cameras with an op timal setting Photo Monochrome Print monochrome photos with an optimal setting Poster An optimal setting for posters Print in vivid colors with impact and high saturation Faithful Color Reproduc tion Print with minimum color differ...

Page 43: ...rating system Printing Photos and Images Windows P 23 Printing Photos and Images Mac OS X P 25 Printing Photos and Images Windows This topic describes how to print photos based on the following example Document Photo image from a digital camera Page size 10 12 inches 254 0 304 8 mm Paper Roll Paper type Glossy Photo Paper HG 170 Roll paper width 10 inches 254 0 mm 1 Choose Print in the application...

Page 44: ...d related software as well as on the Control Panel is updated when you install the Media Configuration Tool from the User Software CD ROM or if you change paper information by using the Media Configuration Tool For details see Media Configura tion Tool P 448 5 After confirming that DEasy Settings is selected click Photo Color in the EPrint Target list Note You can check the settings values selecte...

Page 45: ...printing conditions see Printer Driver Settings Windows P 202 11 Confirm the print settings and print as desired Note For instructions on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Windows P 207 Printing Photos and Images Mac OS X This topic describes how to print photos based on the following example Document Photo image from a digital camera Page size 10 12 inches 254 0 304 8 mm Pap...

Page 46: ... configured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu 2 Select the printer in the APrinter list 3 In the FPaper Size list click the size of the original In this case click 10 x12 4 If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box click FOK to close the dialog box and then select Print from the application software ...

Page 47: ... ROM or if you change paper information by using the Media Configuration Tool For details see Media Con figuration Tool P 677 7 After confirming that DEasy Settings is selected click Photo Color in the EPrint Target list Note For information on settings optimized for printing photos and images see Printing Photos and Im ages P 22 You can check the settings values selected in the EPrint Target list...

Page 48: ... displayed in the BRoll Width list in this case 10 in 254 0mm Note If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in BRoll Width click LPrinter Informa tion on the Main pane to update the printer information Enhanced Printing Options Printing Photos and Office Documents Printing Photos and Images Mac OS X iPF8300S 2 28 ...

Page 49: ...t you can load in Photoshop and customize for your printing needs By using the plug in you can print while preserving the 16 bit RGB data from Photoshop without losing the exceptional color gradations of original image Some of the settings and cus tomizations available in the plug in are as follows Automatic detection of the color space sRGB or Adobe RGB for automatic selection of the optimal prof...

Page 50: ...ndows This topic describes how to print Adobe RGB images based on the following example Document Adobe RGB image created in Photoshop Page Size 10 12 inches 254 0 304 8 mm Paper Roll Paper type Glossy Photo Paper HG 170 Roll Paper Width 10 inches 254 0 mm Important In Photoshop select no color matching In the printer driver settings select Driver Matching Mode and choose Adobe RGB in Color Space 1...

Page 51: ...type of paper that is loaded In this case click Glossy Photo Paper HG 170 9 Click DAdvanced Settings to switch the print mode 10 Click Image in the EPrint Priority list Enhanced Printing Options Printing Photos and Office Documents iPF8300S Printing Adobe RGB Images Windows 2 31 ...

Page 52: ...d in the FPrint Quality list vary depending on the paper type 12 Click Color in the GColor Mode list 13 Click HColor Settings to display the Color Settings dialog box Enhanced Printing Options Printing Photos and Office Documents Printing Adobe RGB Images Windows iPF8300S 2 32 ...

Page 53: ... sheet 15 In AMatching Mode click Driver Matching Mode 16 In CColor Space click Adobe RGB 17 Click OK to close the Color Settings dialog box Enhanced Printing Options Printing Photos and Office Documents iPF8300S Printing Adobe RGB Images Windows 2 33 ...

Page 54: ...nd then click OK 22 Confirm the print settings and print as desired Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Windows P 207 Printing Adobe RGB Images Mac OS X This topic describes how to print Adobe RGB images based on the following example Document Adobe RGB image created in Photoshop Page size 10 12 inches 254 0 304 8 mm Paper Roll Paper type Glossy Photo Paper HG ...

Page 55: ...ting Adobe RGB images refer to the Photoshop documentation 2 Choose Print with Preview from the Photoshop menu to display the Print dialog box 3 Make sure the setting mode is Color Management 4 In the Color Handling list click Printer Manages Colors 5 Click Print 6 Access the Main pane 7 In the AMedia Type list select the type of paper that is loaded In this case click Glossy Photo Paper HG 170 En...

Page 56: ...ding on the type of paper 11 Click Color in the HColor Mode list 12 Click ISet to display the Color Settings dialog box 13 Click Matching to display the Matching pane 14 In Matching Mode click Driver Matching Mode 15 In Color Space click Adobe RGB 16 Click OK to close the Color Settings dialog box Enhanced Printing Options Printing Photos and Office Documents Printing Adobe RGB Images Mac OS X iPF...

Page 57: ...m Note If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in BRoll Width click LPrinter Informa tion on the Main pane to update the printer information 20 Make sure CPage Size in the Page Setup pane matches the size of the original as specified in Photoshop in this case 10 x12 Enhanced Printing Options Printing Photos and Office Documents iPF8300S Printing Adobe RGB Images Mac OS X 2 37 ...

Page 58: ...rity to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing P 64 For instructions on printing office documents refer to the following topics as appropriate for your computer and operating system Printing Office Documents Windows P 38 Printing Office Documents Mac OS X P 40 Printing Office Documents Windows This topic describes how to print office documents based on the following example Document O...

Page 59: ...k Plain Paper 5 After confirming that DEasy Settings is selected click Office Document in the EPrint Target list Note You can check the settings values selected in the EPrint Target list by clicking GView Settings Enhanced Printing Options Printing Photos and Office Documents iPF8300S Printing Office Documents Windows 2 39 ...

Page 60: ...rm the print settings and print as desired Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Windows P 207 Printing Office Documents Mac OS X This topic describes how to print office documents based on the following example Document Office document created using word processing or spreadsheet programs Page size A4 210 0 297 0 mm 8 3 11 7 in Paper Sheets Paper type Plain Pape...

Page 61: ... the upper part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu 2 Select the printer in the APrinter list 3 In the FPaper Size list click the size of the original In this case click ISO A4 for Paper Tray Large Mar gins 4 If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box click FOK to close the dialog box and then select Print from the appli...

Page 62: ...g that DEasy Settings is selected click Office Document in the EPrint Target list Note You can check the settings values selected in the EPrint Target list by clicking GView set 8 Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list Enhanced Printing Options Printing Photos and Office Documents Printing Office Documents Mac OS X iPF8300S 2 42 ...

Page 63: ...aper Tray Large Margins 12 Specify additional printing conditions For details on available printing conditions see Printer Driver Settings Mac OS X P 487 13 Confirm the print settings and then click MPrint to start printing Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Mac OS X P 492 Enhanced Printing Options Printing Photos and Office Documents iPF8300S Printing Office ...

Page 64: ...PosterArtist to compose originals from multiple applications creating a poster layout for printing 1 Choose Print in the application menu 2 Select the printer in the dialog box and then open the printer driver dialog box See Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications Windows P 211 3 Make sure the Main sheet is displayed Enhanced Printing Options Printing Photos and Office Documents ...

Page 65: ... in the APage Layout list 7 When you attempt to print PosterArtist starts up and the PageCapture window is displayed At this point the docu ment will not be printed yet 8 Choose the page to load in PosterArtist Enhanced Printing Options Printing Photos and Office Documents iPF8300S Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals 2 45 ...

Page 66: ...peat steps 1 8 to arrange originals from multiple applications on the same page Note For details on how to edit and sort images refer to the PosterArtist Manual 10 Print from the PosterArtist menu Enhanced Printing Options Printing Photos and Office Documents Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals iPF8300S 2 46 ...

Page 67: ...t target by clicking View Settings You can also fine tune these values as needed Advanced Settings For details on Advanced Settings refer to Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing P 64 For instructions on printing line drawings and text refer to the following topics as appropriate for your computer and oper ating system Printing Line Drawings and Text Windows P 47 P...

Page 68: ...Type list select the type of paper that is loaded In this case click Plain Paper 5 After confirming that DEasy Settings is selected click CAD Color Line Drawing or CAD Monochrome Line Drawing in the EPrint Target list Note You can check the settings values selected in the EPrint Target list by clicking GView Settings Enhanced Printing Options Printing CAD Drawings Printing Line Drawings and Text W...

Page 69: ... Confirm the print settings and print as desired Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Windows P 207 You can conserve roll paper by configuring settings suitable for the document For details on how to conserve paper and print refer to Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Origi nals 90 Degrees Windows P 172 Printing Line Drawings and Text Mac OS X This topic describe...

Page 70: ...t displayed the settings are configured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu 2 Select the printer in the APrinter list 3 In the FPaper Size list click the size of the original In this case click ISO A3 4 If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box click FOK to close the dialog box and then select Print fr...

Page 71: ...ng that DEasy Settings is selected click CAD Color Line Drawing in the EPrint Target list Note You can check the settings values selected in the EPrint Target list by clicking GView set 8 Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list Enhanced Printing Options Printing CAD Drawings iPF8300S Printing Line Drawings and Text Mac OS X 2 51 ...

Page 72: ... is displayed in the BRoll Width list in this case ISO A2 A3 420 0mm Note If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in BRoll Width click LPrinter Informa tion on the Main pane to update the printer information Enhanced Printing Options Printing CAD Drawings Printing Line Drawings and Text Mac OS X iPF8300S 2 52 ...

Page 73: ...ization Module for AutoCAD is software for printing optimally from AutoCAD with the printer driver By optimally controlling the processing resolution of raster data and the memory to be used in image processing of Auto CAD printing superior in reliability and productivity is realized If you install Printer Driver Optimization Module for AutoCAD on a computer on which supported AutoCAD is installed...

Page 74: ...e for AutoCAD If Printer Driver Optimization Module for AutoCAD is not installed install it by the following method 1 Insert User Software CD ROM in the CD ROM drive and start the installer 2 In the Setup Menu window click Install Individual Software 3 Click Install of Printer Driver Optimization Module for AutoCAD 4 Follow the instructions on the screen Enhanced Printing Options Printing CAD Draw...

Page 75: ...e photos Monochrome Print in grayscale You can adjust the color balance No color correction 1 Prints without performing color matching in the printer driver You can adjust the color balance 1 If No color correction is selected the Matching sheet Matching pane is not displayed Color Adjustment You can adjust colors separately for images graphics and text documents Adjustment Item Description Cyan F...

Page 76: ...atching by the printer driver using the ICM function of printer driver Select this if you want to print by only specifying the matching method Available when using Windows Host ICM Mode Enables color matching by the host computer using the ICM function of Windows Select this if you want to print from an application that supports the ICM function ColorSync Enables color matching by using the ColorS...

Page 77: ...to is selected in Color Mode Gray Adjustment Items Description Color Balance Adjust the gray tone to suit the images of monochrome photos Choose cool black tinged with blue pure black neutral warm black tinged with red and so on Select the color tone in the color region or from the list Brightness Adjust the brightness of printed images while keeping the darkest and lightest por tions intact Contr...

Page 78: ... Choose Print in the application menu 2 Select the printer in the dialog box and then display the printer driver dialog box See Accessing the Printer Driv er Dialog Box from Applications Windows P 211 3 Make sure the Main sheet is displayed 4 In the AMedia Type list select the type of paper that is loaded Enhanced Printing Options Adjusting Images Fine Tuning Colors of Photos and Images Windows iP...

Page 79: ... switch the print mode 6 Click Color in the GColor Mode list 7 Click HColor Settings to display the Color Settings dialog box Enhanced Printing Options Adjusting Images iPF8300S Fine Tuning Colors of Photos and Images Windows 2 59 ...

Page 80: ...rkest and lightest por tions intact IContrast Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other For soft gradation decrease the contrast For hard gradation increase the contrast JSaturation Adjust the level of color saturation in a range from subdued to vivid Note Click Object Adjustment to open the Object Adjustment dialog box which allows you to select the color adj...

Page 81: ...are you are using If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu the settings are configured by opening the Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup If it is not displayed the settings are configured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu 2 Select the printer in the APrinter list 3 Choose the original size in the FPaper Size...

Page 82: ...pe list select the type of paper that is loaded 7 Click DAdvanced Settings to switch the print mode 8 Click Color in the HColor Mode list Enhanced Printing Options Adjusting Images Fine Tuning Colors of Photos and Images Mac OS X iPF8300S 2 62 ...

Page 83: ...he list HBrightness Adjust the brightness of printed images while keeping the darkest and lightest por tions intact IContrast Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other For soft gradation decrease the contrast For hard gradation increase the contrast JSaturation Adjust the level of color saturation in a range from subdued to vivid Note Click Object Adjustment t...

Page 84: ... printing results that appear just as expected for your original you can specify which graphic elements and colors to prioritize for printing Note Easy Settings are also available providing convenient presets To use the presets simply choose the printing application For details on Easy Settings refer to the following topics Printing Photos and Images P 22 Printing Line Drawings and Text P 47 Print...

Page 85: ...tant Printing takes longer and consumes more ink than in Standard or Fast modes but this mode offers exceptional printing quality Image Line Drawing Text Proof Standard Choose this setting to print at standard resolu tion when quality and speed are both impor tant Printing takes less time than in High mode Image Line Drawing Text Office Document Proof Fast Choose this setting to print faster Print...

Page 86: ...ed Enhancing printing quality Setting Item Description Highest quality This prints at the highest resolution Printing takes longer and consumes more ink than in other modes but this mode offers superior printing quality Thicken Fine Lines Prints making fine lines appear thicker Unidirectional Printing Prints by suppressing color variations and misaligned ruled lines However this takes more time th...

Page 87: ...Print in the application menu 2 Select the printer in the dialog box and then display the printer driver dialog box Refer to Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications Windows P 211 3 Make sure the Main sheet is displayed 4 In the AMedia Type list select the type of paper that is loaded Enhanced Printing Options Adjusting Images iPF8300S Choosing the Document Type and Printing Condi...

Page 88: ...Quality list vary depending on the type of paper 8 Click Monochrome in the GColor Mode list 9 To adjust the brightness and contrast click HColor Settings Note For instructions on adjusting brightness and contrast see Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver P 55 Enhanced Printing Options Adjusting Images Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions Windows iPF8300S 2 68 ...

Page 89: ...ze LPaper Source and so on 12 Confirm the print settings and print as desired Note For details on how to check the printing settings refer to Confirming Print Settings Windows P 207 Enhanced Printing Options Adjusting Images iPF8300S Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions Windows 2 69 ...

Page 90: ...es in monochrome 1 Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box 2 Select the printer in the BFormat for list 3 Choose the original size in the CPaper Size list 4 Click FOK to close the dialog box 5 In the application menu choose Print Enhanced Printing Options Adjusting Images Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions Mac OS X iPF8300S 2 70 ...

Page 91: ...select the type of paper that is loaded 8 Click DAdvanced Settings to switch the print mode 9 Click Image in the EPrint Priority list Enhanced Printing Options Adjusting Images iPF8300S Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions Mac OS X 2 71 ...

Page 92: ... on adjusting brightness and contrast see Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driv er P 55 13 Access the Page Setup pane 14 Confirm the settings of APaper Source and CPage Size 15 Confirm the print settings and then click MPrint to start printing Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Mac OS X P 492 Enhanced Printing Options Adjusting Images Choosing the Document T...

Page 93: ... Paper Size Enlarge or reduce the original to match the size of the paper you are using For instructions on resizing originals to match the paper size refer to the following topics as appropriate for your com puter and operating system Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size Windows P 73 Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size Mac OS X P 75 Note For better printing results when enlarging pho...

Page 94: ...x See Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications Windows P 211 3 Make sure the Main sheet is displayed 4 In the AMedia Type list select the type of paper that is loaded In this case click Plain Paper 5 Select the printing application in the EPrint Target list Enhanced Printing Options Printing enlargements or reductions Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size Windows iPF8300S 2 7...

Page 95: ...1 Select the DFit Paper Size check box 12 Click ISO A3 in the GPaper Size list 13 Confirm the print settings and print as desired Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Windows P 207 Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size Mac OS X This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing to match the paper size based on the following example Document Any T...

Page 96: ... displayed the settings are configured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu 2 Select the printer in the APrinter list 3 In the FPaper Size list click the size of the original In this case click ISO A4 4 If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box click FOK to close the dialog box and then select Print fro...

Page 97: ...aper 7 Make your selection in the EPrint Target list 8 Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list 9 Access the Page Setup pane 10 Select and click a roll paper in the APaper Source list Enhanced Printing Options Printing enlargements or reductions iPF8300S Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size Mac OS X 2 77 ...

Page 98: ...date the printer information 12 Make sure CPage Size on the Page Setup pane shows the original size as specified in CPaper Size in the Page Attributes dialog box in this case ISO A4 13 Select the DEnlarged Reduced Printing check box 14 Make sure EFit Paper Size is selected 15 Click ISO A3 in the IPaper Size list Enhanced Printing Options Printing enlargements or reductions Resizing Originals to Ma...

Page 99: ...or your computer and operating system Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width Windows P 79 Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width Mac OS X P 82 Note For better printing results when enlarging photos from a digital camera in TIFF or JPEG format use an image editing application software such as Adobe Photoshop to specify an image resolution of 150 dpi or more at actual size Resizing Originals to ...

Page 100: ...alog Box from Applications Windows P 211 3 Make sure the Main sheet is displayed 4 In the AMedia Type list select the type of paper that is loaded In this case click Plain Paper 5 Select the printing application in the EPrint Target list Enhanced Printing Options Printing enlargements or reductions Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width Windows iPF8300S 2 80 ...

Page 101: ...aper in the LPaper Source list 8 In the APage Size list click the size of the original as specified in the application In this case click ISO A4 or Letter 8 5 x11 Enhanced Printing Options Printing enlargements or reductions iPF8300S Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width Windows 2 81 ...

Page 102: ...specify matches the width of the loaded roll 11 Confirm the print settings and print as desired Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Windows P 207 Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width Mac OS X This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing to match the roll width based on the following example Document Any Type Page size A4 210 0 297 0 mm 8 3 ...

Page 103: ...gured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu 2 Select the printer in the APrinter list 3 In the FPaper Size list click the size of the original In this case click ISO A4 4 If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box click FOK to close the dialog box and then select Print from the application software menu E...

Page 104: ...Paper 7 Make your selection in the EPrint Target list 8 Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list 9 Access the Page Setup pane 10 Select and click a roll paper in the APaper Source list Enhanced Printing Options Printing enlargements or reductions Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width Mac OS X iPF8300S 2 84 ...

Page 105: ... case ISO A4 13 Select the DEnlarged Reduced Printing check box 14 Click FFit Roll Paper Width 15 Confirm the print settings and then click MPrint to start printing Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Mac OS X P 492 Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value You can freely adjust the size of originals by enlarging or reducing them as desired Enlarged Reduce...

Page 106: ...e at actual size Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value Windows This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing by entering a scaling value based on the following example Document Any Type Page size A4 210 0 297 0 mm 8 3 11 7 in Paper Roll paper Paper type Plain Paper Roll paper width A2 A3 roll 420 0 mm 16 5 in Important In borderless printing you cannot resize originals by ...

Page 107: ...hat is loaded In this case click Plain Paper 5 Select the printing application in the EPrint Target list 6 Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet Enhanced Printing Options Printing enlargements or reductions iPF8300S Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value Windows 2 87 ...

Page 108: ...es of the paper will not be printed If the original size after enlargement or reduction is smaller than the paper size the original is printed in the upper left corner In this case you can center originals by selecting EPrint Centered on the Layout sheet 13 Confirm the print settings and print as desired Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Windows P 207 Resizin...

Page 109: ...rom Page Setup If it is not displayed the settings are configured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu 2 Select the printer in the APrinter list 3 In the FPaper Size list click the size of the original In this case click ISO A4 4 If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box click FOK to close the dialog bo...

Page 110: ...er 7 Make your selection in the EPrint Target list 8 Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list 9 Access the Page Setup pane 10 Select and click a roll paper in the APaper Source list Enhanced Printing Options Printing enlargements or reductions Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value Mac OS X iPF8300S 2 90 ...

Page 111: ...LPrinter Informa tion on the Main pane to update the printer information 12 Make sure the CPage Size setting matches the original size as selected in CPaper Size in the Page Attributes dialog box in this case ISO A4 13 Select the DEnlarged Reduced Printing check box Enhanced Printing Options Printing enlargements or reductions iPF8300S Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value Mac OS X 2 91 ...

Page 112: ...n the paper size the original is printed in the upper left corner In this case you can center originals by selecting the JPrint Centered check box 15 Confirm the print settings and then click MPrint to start printing Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Mac OS X P 492 Enhanced Printing Options Printing enlargements or reductions Resizing Originals by Entering a ...

Page 113: ...in Note If you prepare an original for printing without a margin and print it on paper of regular size the image near the edge will not be printed Oversize The margin required by the printer is added around the outside of a regular paper size For example when printing a A4 sized original 210 297 mm you have the following options a Regular paper size Gray area not printed b Page Size c Oversized pa...

Page 114: ...ions on oversized printing refer to the following topics as appropriate for your computer and operating system Printing at Full Size Windows P 94 Printing at Full Size Mac OS X P 96 Printing at Full Size Windows This topic describes how to print at full size based on the following example Oversized Printing Document Any Type Page Size A4 210 0 297 0 mm Letter 8 3 11 7 in Paper Roll Paper type Plai...

Page 115: ... type of paper that is loaded In this case click Plain Paper 5 Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet 6 Click OSize Options to display the Paper Size Options dialog box Enhanced Printing Options Printing at full size iPF8300S Printing at Full Size Windows 2 95 ...

Page 116: ...se ISO A2 A3 Roll 420 0mm 12 Confirm the print settings and print as desired Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Windows P 207 Printing at Full Size Mac OS X This topic describes how to print at full size based on the following example Oversized Printing Document Any Type Page size A4 210 0 297 0 mm 8 3 11 7 in Paper Roll paper Paper type Plain Paper Roll paper...

Page 117: ...ttings are configured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu 2 Select the printer in the APrinter list 3 In FPaper Size click the size of the original In this case click ISO A4 Oversize 4 If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box click FOK to close the dialog box and then select Print from the application...

Page 118: ...ase click Plain Paper 7 Make your selection in the EPrint Target list 8 Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list 9 Access the Page Setup pane 10 Select and click a roll paper in the APaper Source list Enhanced Printing Options Printing at full size Printing at Full Size Mac OS X iPF8300S 2 98 ...

Page 119: ...n pane to update the printer information 12 Make sure CPage Size shows the original size as specified in CPaper Size in the Page Attributes dialog box in this case ISO A4 Oversize 13 Confirm the print settings and then click MPrint to start printing Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Mac OS X P 492 Enhanced Printing Options Printing at full size iPF8300S Print...

Page 120: ...erforming bor derless printing Rotate Page 90 degrees Conserve Paper cannot be selected When borderless printing is used the edge of the paper is cut during printing Thus ink density may be uneven at the edges If you require higher image quality specify No in Auto Cut in the printer driver In this case the paper can be printed without borders on the left and right sides only After ejecting and cut...

Page 121: ...bes how to print borderlessly at actual size based on the following example Document Any type Page size 10 12 inches 254 0 304 8 mm Paper Roll Paper type Heavyweight Coated Paper Roll paper width 10 inches 254 0 mm 1 Create the original in the source application 3 mm 0 12 in larger on each side than 254 0 304 8 mm 10 12 in that is 260 0 310 8 mm 10 2 12 2 in Note If you can specify the margin as i...

Page 122: ...of paper that is loaded In this case click Heavyweight Coated Paper 6 Select the print target in the EPrint Target list 7 Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet Enhanced Printing Options Printing at full size Borderless Printing at Actual Size Windows iPF8300S 2 102 ...

Page 123: ...Information dialog box 13 In CBorderless Printing Method click FPrint Image with Actual Size 14 Confirm the print settings and print as desired Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Windows P 207 Borderless Printing at Actual Size Mac OS X This topic describes how to print borderlessly at actual size based on the following example Document Any Type Page size 10 1...

Page 124: ...f the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu 2 Select the printer in the APrinter list 3 In the FPaper Size list choose a paper size supported for borderless printing Here click 10 x12 Borderless Note Paper sizes supported for borderless printing are indicated by Borderless 4 If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box click FOK to...

Page 125: ...vyweight Coated Paper 7 Make your selection in the EPrint Target list 8 Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list 9 Access the Page Setup pane 10 Select and click a roll paper in the APaper Source list Enhanced Printing Options Printing at full size iPF8300S Borderless Printing at Actual Size Mac OS X 2 105 ...

Page 126: ...n on the Main pane to update the printer information 12 Make sure the CPage Size setting matches the original size as selected in CPaper Size in the Page Attributes dialog box in this case 10 x12 Borderless 13 Confirm the print settings and then click MPrint to start printing Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Mac OS X P 492 Enhanced Printing Options Printing ...

Page 127: ...e printer s auto cut function can be printed without borders on the left and right sides only These features cannot be used in combination with borderless printing special page layouts centering originals and printing cut lines on rolls If Fit Paper Size or Print Image with Actual Size Windows only is selected when performing bor derless printing Rotate Page 90 degrees Conserve Paper cannot be sel...

Page 128: ...e Paper Size Windows This topic describes how to enlarge originals before borderless printing to match the paper size based on the following example Document Any type Page size 10 12 inches 254 0 304 8 mm Paper Roll Paper type Heavyweight Coated Paper Roll paper width 10 inches 254 0 mm 1 In the application create an original that takes up the entire space of the paper size Note If you can specify...

Page 129: ...s loaded In this case click Heavyweight Coated Paper 6 Select the print target in the EPrint Target list 7 Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet Enhanced Printing Options Borderless Printing iPF8300S Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size Windows 2 109 ...

Page 130: ...less Printing Method click DFit Paper Size 14 Click Match Page Size in the GPaper Size list 15 Confirm the print settings and print as desired Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Windows P 207 Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size Mac OS X This topic describes how to enlarge originals before borderless printing to match the paper siz...

Page 131: ...he upper part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu 2 Select the printer in the APrinter list 3 In the FPaper Size list click the size of the original In this case click 10 x12 Note All sizes are available in borderless printing if you resize originals to match the paper size 4 If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box cl...

Page 132: ... Paper 7 Make your selection in the EPrint Target list 8 Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list 9 Access the Page Setup pane 10 Select and click a roll paper in the APaper Source list Enhanced Printing Options Borderless Printing Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size Mac OS X iPF8300S 2 112 ...

Page 133: ...ing matches the original size as selected in CPaper Size in the Page Attributes dialog box in this case 10 x12 13 On the Page Setup pane select the DEnlarged Reduced Printing check box 14 Select the HBorderless Printing check box 15 Click EFit Paper Size under DEnlarged Reduced Printing 16 In IPaper Size click the paper size In this case click 10 x12 Borderless Enhanced Printing Options Borderless...

Page 134: ...on with borderless printing special page layouts centering originals and printing cut lines on rolls If Fit Paper Size or Print Image with Actual Size Windows only is selected when performing bor derless printing Rotate Page 90 degrees Conserve Paper cannot be selected When borderless printing is used the edge of the paper is cut during printing Thus ink density may be uneven at the edges If you r...

Page 135: ... to Fit the Roll Width Windows This topic describes how to enlarge originals before borderless printing to match the roll width based on the following ex ample Document Any type Page size A4 210 0 297 0 mm Letter 8 3 11 7 in Paper Roll Paper type Heavyweight Coated Paper Roll paper width 10 inches 254 0 mm 1 In the application create an original that takes up the entire space of the paper size Not...

Page 136: ...is loaded In this case click Heavyweight Coated Paper 6 Select the print target in the EPrint Target list 7 Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet Enhanced Printing Options Borderless Printing Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width Windows iPF8300S 2 116 ...

Page 137: ...nting Method make sure EScale to fit Roll Paper Width is selected 14 Confirm the print settings and print as desired Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Windows P 207 Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width Mac OS X This topic describes how to enlarge originals before borderless printing to match the roll width based on the following ex ...

Page 138: ...ter driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu 2 Select the printer in the APrinter list 3 In the FPaper Size list click the size of the original In this case click ISO A4 Note All sizes are available in borderless printing if you resize originals to fit the roll width 4 If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box click FOK to close the dialog...

Page 139: ...d Paper 7 Make your selection in the EPrint Target list 8 Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list 9 Access the Page Setup pane 10 Select and click a roll paper in the APaper Source list Enhanced Printing Options Borderless Printing iPF8300S Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width Mac OS X 2 119 ...

Page 140: ...2 Make sure the CPage Size setting matches the original size as selected in CPaper Size in the Page Attributes dialog box in this case ISO A4 13 Select the DEnlarged Reduced Printing check box 14 Select the HBorderless Printing check box This ensures that FFit Roll Paper Width is automatically selected in DEnlarged Reduced Printing Enhanced Printing Options Borderless Printing Borderless Printing ...

Page 141: ...MPrint to start printing Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Mac OS X P 492 Enhanced Printing Options Borderless Printing iPF8300S Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width Mac OS X 2 121 ...

Page 142: ...d horizontal banners with the width of rolls use the printer driver function for automatical ly enlarging reducing and printing For example if you automatically enlarge a document created with application software such as Microsoft Word you can print the full width of the roll easily For instructions on printing vertical or horizontal banners refer to the following topics as appropriate for your c...

Page 143: ... 1 Register a Custom Paper Size in the printer driver Call a non standard paper size registered in the printer driver with Custom Paper Size Once you register Custom Paper Size you then can select it repeatedly from the paper size list Custom Paper Size can be set up to 18 0 m 2 In the application create an original in the size you registered 3 Print the banner using the settings that correspond t...

Page 144: ...aper Size Options dialog box 10 Close the printer driver dialog box Note Although you can even set Custom Size for the paper size the maximum settable size is 3 2 m The setting of Custom Size is disabled when you exit the application software For more information see Printing on Non Standard Paper Sizes Windows P 132 Creating the banner in the application Follow the steps below to create the banne...

Page 145: ... Create the banner Printing the banner Follow these steps to print the banner using the corresponding banner settings 1 Choose Print in the Microsoft Word menu 2 Select the printer in the dialog box and then display the printer driver dialog box See Accessing the Printer Driv er Dialog Box from Applications Windows P 211 3 Make sure the Main sheet is displayed 4 In the AMedia Type list select the ...

Page 146: ... Select the CEnlarged Reduced Printing check box Note If the CEnlarged Reduced Printing check box is not displayed on the Page Setup sheet clear the BBorderless Printing check box Enhanced Printing Options Printing banners or at other non standard sizes Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners Large Format Printing Windows iPF8300S 2 126 ...

Page 147: ...gs and print as desired Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Windows P 207 If printing is unsuccessful you may be able to print after completing the following setting 1 On the Layout sheet click JSpecial Settings to display the Special Settings dialog box 2 In the FineZoom Settings list click Yes Enhanced Printing Options Printing banners or at other non standar...

Page 148: ...0 5 Custom Paper Sizes Mac OS X 10 6 Once you register Custom Page Sizes Custom Paper Sizes you then can select it repeatedly from the paper size list Custom Page Sizes Custom Paper Sizes can be set up to 18 0 m 3 Print the banner using the settings that correspond to banners Note The following procedures are based on Mac OS X 10 5 The method of setting up non standard paper sizes varies depending...

Page 149: ...r Margins Here too measurements are entered in centimeters 8 Click OK to close the Custom Page Sizes dialog box 9 In the CPaper Size list click the size of the original In this case click 100 500 the size you registered 10 In DOrientation click the icon of the document in landscape orientation 11 Click FOK to close the dialog box Print the banner Follow the steps below to print the banner using th...

Page 150: ... selection in the EPrint Target list 5 Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list 6 Access the Page Setup pane 7 Select and click a roll paper in the APaper Source list Enhanced Printing Options Printing banners or at other non standard sizes Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners Large Format Printing Mac OS X iPF8300S 2 130 ...

Page 151: ... Sizes For printing on non standard size paper first register the paper size in the printer driver Once you register a paper size you then can select it repeatedly from the paper size list The paper size can be set up to 18 0 m Note In Windows although you can even set Custom Size for the paper size the maximum settable size is 3 2 m The setting of Custom Size is disabled when you exit the applica...

Page 152: ...ing and Printing With a Custom Paper Size This topic describes how to register a non standard paper size by the name of 430 mm Squareand print based on the fol lowing example Document Any Type Page Size A square sheet 430 430 mm 16 9 16 9 in Paper Sheets Media Type Any type Paper Size A square sheet 430 430 mm 16 9 16 9 in 1 Load the square paper 430 430 mm 16 9 16 9 in in the printer 2 Choose Pri...

Page 153: ...nits 11 Enter 430 16 9 in in both Width and Height Note If you select the Fix the Ratio of the Width to Height check box after you enter a value in either Width or Height the other value will be automatically applied based on the original aspect ratio 12 Click Add to register 430 mm Square 13 Click OK to close the Paper Size Options dialog box 14 Click Cut Sheet in the LPaper Source list 15 In the...

Page 154: ... mm 16 9 16 9 in 1 Load the square paper 430 430 mm 16 9 16 9 in in the printer 2 Choose Print in the application menu 3 Select the printer in the dialog box and then display the printer driver dialog box See Accessing the Printer Driv er Dialog Box from Applications Windows P 211 4 Make sure the Main sheet is displayed 5 In the AMedia Type list select the type of paper that is loaded 6 After conf...

Page 155: ...r Sizes Mac OS X For printing on non standard size paper first register the paper size in the printer driver Call a non standard paper size registered in the printer driver with Custom Page Sizes Mac OS X 10 4 11 10 5 Custom Paper Sizes Mac OS X 10 6 Once you register Custom Page Sizes Custom Paper Sizes you then can select it repeatedly from the paper size list Custom Page Sizes Custom Paper Size...

Page 156: ...ocument in the application 2 Load the square paper 430 430 mm 16 9 16 9 in in the printer 3 Choose Print in the application menu 4 Select the printer in the APrinter list 5 Click Manage Custom Sizes in the CPaper Size list to display the Custom Page Sizes dialog box 6 In Page Size enter the height and width of the original Here enter 43 00 cm in Height and Width Enhanced Printing Options Printing ...

Page 157: ...n this case click 430 430 the size you registered 11 If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box click FOK to close the dialog box and then select Print from the application software menu 12 Access the Main pane 13 In the AMedia Type list select the type of paper that is loaded 14 After confirming that DEasy Settings is selected select from the EPrint Target list 15 Make yo...

Page 158: ...d as registered in Page Setup 19 Confirm the print settings and then click MPrint to start printing Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Mac OS X P 492 Enhanced Printing Options Printing banners or at other non standard sizes Printing on Non Standard Paper Sizes Mac OS X iPF8300S 2 138 ...

Page 159: ...rinting Large Posters Windows 157 Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other By arranging originals from word processing or spreadsheet programs or web browser screen shots next to each other on single sheets you can create highly expressive presentation materials easy to understand meeting materials and a variety of other printed documents Free Layout Windows Besides combining multiple pages ...

Page 160: ...iginals Next to Each Other Mac OS X P 142 Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other Windows This topic describes how to arrange multiple originals using the Free Layout function Note Free Layout cannot be used in 64 bit version of Windows 1 Choose Print in the application menu 2 Select the printer in the dialog box and then display the printer driver dialog box See Accessing the Printer Driv ...

Page 161: ... Layout tab to display the Layout sheet 5 Select the APage Layout check box 6 Click Free Layout in the APage Layout list Enhanced Printing Options Tiling and multiple pages per sheet iPF8300S Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other Windows 2 141 ...

Page 162: ...ns on editing and rearranging images refer to the imagePROGRAF Free Layout help topic 9 Print from the imagePROGRAF Free Layout menu Note For details on imagePROGRAF Free Layout functions refer to Free Layout P 261 Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other Mac OS X This topic describes how to use the Free Layout function to arrange multiple originals next to each other before printing 1 Choos...

Page 163: ...ect the NFree Layout check box 4 Click MPrint 5 The Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout window is displayed Enhanced Printing Options Tiling and multiple pages per sheet iPF8300S Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other Mac OS X 2 143 ...

Page 164: ...int multiple pages as a single continuous image without margins between pages Roll paper banner Important This feature is only available with rolls It cannot be used when printing on sheets During banner printing settings for conserving paper number of copies borderless printing enlarge ment or reduction and other layout related settings are disregarded For instructions on borderless printing of p...

Page 165: ...rderless printing enlargement or reduction and other layout related settings are disregarded 1 Choose Print in the application menu 2 Select the printer in the dialog box and then display the printer driver dialog box See Accessing the Printer Driv er Dialog Box from Applications Windows P 211 3 Make sure the Main sheet is displayed 4 In the AMedia Type list click the type of paper that is loaded ...

Page 166: ...isplay the Roll Paper Options dialog box 8 Select the BBanner Printing check box 9 Click OK 10 Confirm the print settings and print as desired Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Windows P 207 Enhanced Printing Options Tiling and multiple pages per sheet Printing Multiple Pages Continuously Windows iPF8300S 2 146 ...

Page 167: ...OS and application software you are using If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu the settings are configured by opening the Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup If it is not displayed the settings are configured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu 2 Select the printer in the APrinter list 3 Click the original ...

Page 168: ... your selection in the EPrint Target list 8 Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list 9 Access the Page Setup pane 10 Click Roll Paper Banner in the APaper Source list Enhanced Printing Options Tiling and multiple pages per sheet Printing Multiple Pages Continuously Mac OS X iPF8300S 2 148 ...

Page 169: ...dows When printing using this function the Print Centered setting is disabled Note You can print up to 16 pages of the original on a single sheet You can also change the page layout order and print page boundary lines as desired For instructions on printing multiple pages per sheet refer to the following topics as appropriate for your computer and operating system Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet...

Page 170: ...Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications Windows P 211 3 Make sure the Main sheet is displayed 4 In the AMedia Type list select the type of paper that is loaded In this case click Plain Paper 5 Make your selection in the EPrint Target list 6 Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list Enhanced Printing Options Tiling and multiple pages per sheet Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet Windows iPF8...

Page 171: ...on software In this case click ISO A3 or Letter 8 5 x11 9 Select and click a roll paper in the LPaper Source list 10 Select the width of the loaded roll in the MRoll Paper Width list in this case ISO A2 A3 Roll 420 0mm Enhanced Printing Options Tiling and multiple pages per sheet iPF8300S Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet Windows 2 151 ...

Page 172: ...print as desired Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Windows P 207 Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet Mac OS X This topic describes how to print four pages of an original on a single sheet based on the following example Document Any Type Page size A3 297 0 420 0 mm 11 7 16 5 in Paper Roll paper Paper type Plain Paper Roll paper width A2 A3 roll 420 0 mm 16 5 in ...

Page 173: ...nfigured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu 2 Select the printer in the APrinter list 3 In the FPaper Size list click the size of the original In this case click ISO A3 4 If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box click FOK to close the dialog box and then select Print from the application software men...

Page 174: ...Direc tion and CBorder 7 Access the Main pane 8 In the AMedia Type list select the type of paper that is loaded In this case click Plain Paper 9 Make your selection in the EPrint Target list 10 Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list Enhanced Printing Options Tiling and multiple pages per sheet Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet Mac OS X iPF8300S 2 154 ...

Page 175: ...layed in the BRoll Width list in this case ISO A2 A3 420 0mm Note If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in BRoll Width click LPrinter Informa tion on the Main pane to update the printer information Enhanced Printing Options Tiling and multiple pages per sheet iPF8300S Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet Mac OS X 2 155 ...

Page 176: ...heets By assembling the printed sheets you can create a post er larger than the maximum supported paper size of the printer Page Layout Choose poster printing Important When printing using this function the Print Centered Watermark No Spaces at Top or Bottom Conserve Paper and Page Options settings are disabled For instructions on printing large posters refer to the following topics as appropriate...

Page 177: ... following example Document Poster Page size A2 420 0 594 0 mm 16 5 23 4 in Paper Sheets Paper Size A2 420 0 594 0 mm 16 5 23 4 in 1 Choose Print in the application menu 2 Select the printer in the dialog box and then display the printer driver dialog box See Accessing the Printer Driv er Dialog Box from Applications Windows P 211 3 Make sure the Main sheet is displayed 4 In the AMedia Type list s...

Page 178: ...he size of the original as specified in the application In this case click ISO A2 8 Click Cut Sheet in the LPaper Source list 9 Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet Enhanced Printing Options Tiling and multiple pages per sheet Printing Large Posters Windows iPF8300S 2 158 ...

Page 179: ...he Pages to Print dialog box On the Pages to Print dialog box clear the check boxes of the portion you do not want to print Click OK to close the Pages to Print dialog box 12 Confirm the print settings and print as desired Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Windows P 207 Enhanced Printing Options Tiling and multiple pages per sheet iPF8300S Printing Large Post...

Page 180: ...with the center of the roll relative to the width For instructions on centering originals when printing on rolls refer to the following topics as appropriate for your computer and operating system Printing Originals Centered on Rolls Windows P 160 Printing Originals Centered on Rolls Mac OS X P 162 Printing Originals Centered on Rolls Windows This topic describes how to center originals before pri...

Page 181: ... type of paper that is loaded In this case click Plain Paper 5 Select the print target in the EPrint Target list 6 Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet Enhanced Printing Options Centering originals iPF8300S Printing Originals Centered on Rolls Windows 2 161 ...

Page 182: ... EPrint Centered check box 12 Confirm the print settings and print as desired Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Windows P 207 Printing Originals Centered on Rolls Mac OS X This topic describes how to center originals before printing on rolls based on the following example Document Any Type Page size A4 210 0 297 0 mm 8 3 11 7 in Paper Roll paper Paper type Pl...

Page 183: ...are configured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu 2 Select the printer in the APrinter list 3 In the FPaper Size list click the size of the original In this case click ISO A4 4 If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box click FOK to close the dialog box and then select Print from the application softwa...

Page 184: ...ck Plain Paper 7 Make your selection in the EPrint Target list 8 Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list 9 Access the Page Setup pane 10 Select and click a roll paper in the APaper Source list Enhanced Printing Options Centering originals Printing Originals Centered on Rolls Mac OS X iPF8300S 2 164 ...

Page 185: ...mation 12 Make sure the CPage Size setting matches the original size as selected in CPaper Size in the Page Attributes dialog box in this case ISO A4 13 Select the JPrint Centered check box 14 Confirm the print settings and then click MPrint to start printing Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Mac OS X P 492 Enhanced Printing Options Centering originals iPF830...

Page 186: ...ts refer to the following topics as appropriate for your computer and operating system Printing Originals Centered on Sheets Windows P 166 Printing Originals Centered on Sheets Mac OS X P 169 Printing Originals Centered on Sheets Windows This topic describes how to reduce an original 50 for printing centered on a sheet Document Any Type Page size A4 210 0 297 0 mm 8 3 11 7 in Paper Sheets Paper ty...

Page 187: ...he type of paper that is loaded In this case click Plain Paper 5 Make your selection in the EPrint Target list 6 Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet Enhanced Printing Options Centering originals iPF8300S Printing Originals Centered on Sheets Windows 2 167 ...

Page 188: ...e list 12 Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet 13 Select the EPrint Centered check box 14 Confirm the print settings and print as desired Important If you have selected Cut Sheet as the paper source follow the instructions on the printer control pan el to enter the paper size Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Windows P 207 Enhanced Printing Option...

Page 189: ...ngs are configured by opening the Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup If it is not displayed the settings are configured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu 2 Select the printer in the APrinter list 3 In the FPaper Size list click the size of the original In this case click ISO A4 Cut Sheet 4 If you configured the settin...

Page 190: ...ase click Plain Paper 7 Make your selection in the EPrint Target list 8 Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list 9 Access the Page Setup pane 10 Click Cut Sheet in the APaper Source list Enhanced Printing Options Centering originals Printing Originals Centered on Sheets Mac OS X iPF8300S 2 170 ...

Page 191: ...onfirm the print settings and then click MPrint to start printing Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Mac OS X P 492 Important If you have selected Cut Sheet as the paper source follow the instructions on the printer control panel to enter the paper size Enhanced Printing Options Centering originals iPF8300S Printing Originals Centered on Sheets Mac OS X 2 171 ...

Page 192: ... paper width after rotation use this function with Scale to fit Roll Paper Width to print rotated pages For tips on conserving roll paper refer to the following topics as appropriate for your computer and operating system Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees Windows P 172 Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees Mac OS X P 174 Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Origi...

Page 193: ...tions Windows P 211 3 Make sure the Main sheet is displayed 4 In the AMedia Type list select the type of paper that is loaded In this case click Plain Paper 5 Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet Enhanced Printing Options Conserving roll paper iPF8300S Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees Windows 2 173 ...

Page 194: ...ows P 207 Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees Mac OS X This topic describes how to conserve roll paper by rotating originals 90 degrees before printing based on the following example Document Any Type Page size A4 210 0 297 0 mm 8 3 11 7 in Paper Roll paper Paper type Plain Paper Roll paper width A3 A4 roll 297 0 mm 11 7 in This example illustrates how to rotate an A4 210 0 297 ...

Page 195: ...ured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu 2 Select the printer in the APrinter list 3 In the FPaper Size list click the size of the original In this case click ISO A4 4 If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box click FOK to close the dialog box and then select Print from the application software menu En...

Page 196: ...f paper that is loaded In this case click Plain Paper 7 Access the Page Setup pane 8 Select and click a roll paper in the APaper Source list Enhanced Printing Options Conserving roll paper Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees Mac OS X iPF8300S 2 176 ...

Page 197: ... sure the CPage Size setting matches the original size as selected in CPaper Size in the Page Attributes dialog box in this case ISO A4 11 Select the LRotate Page 90 degrees check box 12 Confirm the print settings and then click MPrint to start printing Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Mac OS X P 492 Enhanced Printing Options Conserving roll paper iPF8300S C...

Page 198: ...inals For tips on conserving roll paper refer to the following topics as appropriate for your computer and operating system Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins Windows P 178 Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins Mac OS X P 180 Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins Windows This topic des...

Page 199: ... 5 Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet 6 In the APage Size list click the size of the original as specified in the application In this case click ISO A4 or Letter 8 5 x11 Enhanced Printing Options Conserving roll paper iPF8300S Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins Windows 2 179 ...

Page 200: ...t settings see Confirming Print Settings Windows P 207 Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins Mac OS X This topic describes how to conserve roll paper when printing originals that have a top and bottom margin based on the following example Document Any Type Page size A4 210 0 297 0 mm 8 3 11 7 in Paper Roll paper Paper type Plain Paper Roll paper width A3 A4 rol...

Page 201: ...e upper part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu 2 Select the printer in the APrinter list 3 In the FPaper Size list click the size of the original In this case click ISO A4 4 If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box click FOK to close the dialog box and then select Print from the application software menu Enhanced Pri...

Page 202: ...at is loaded In this case click Plain Paper 7 Access the Page Setup pane 8 Select and click a roll paper in the APaper Source list Enhanced Printing Options Conserving roll paper Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins Mac OS X iPF8300S 2 182 ...

Page 203: ...age Size setting matches the original size as selected in CPaper Size in the Page Attributes dialog box in this case ISO A4 11 Select the KNo Spaces at Top or Bottom check box 12 Confirm the print settings and then click MPrint to start printing Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Mac OS X P 492 Enhanced Printing Options Conserving roll paper iPF8300S Conservin...

Page 204: ...pen Preview When Print Job Starts Windows While viewing the preview screen you can also adjust orientation or other settings and your changes will be instantly applied on the preview screen Note Under some settings and in some environments PageComposer may be started Enhanced Printing Options Checking Images Before Printing Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing iPF8300S 2 184 ...

Page 205: ...eview screen For instructions on how to check the layout before printing refer to the following topics Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing Windows P 208 Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing Mac OS X P 493 Enhanced Printing Options Checking Images Before Printing iPF8300S Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing 2 185 ...

Page 206: ... You can add watermarks background images to documents that require special handling Watermark Watermarks are applied to all pages of your document Important Watermarks are not printed if you select poster as the type of page layout The following watermarks are provided CONFIDENTIAL COPY DRAFT FILE COPY FINAL PRELIMINARY PROOF TOP SECRET You can also create your own watermarks Specify the followin...

Page 207: ... Watermarks COPY FILE COPY and so on Windows This topic describes how to print with watermarks based on the following example of printing with a FILE COPY water mark Document Any type Page size A2 420 0 594 0 mm 16 5 23 4 in Paper Roll paper Paper type Plain Paper Roll paper width A2 A3 roll 420 0 mm 16 5 in 1 Choose Print in the application menu 2 Select the printer in the dialog box and then dis...

Page 208: ...ick the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet 7 In APage Size click the size of the original as specified in the application software In this case click ISO A2 8 Select and click a roll paper in the LPaper Source list 9 Select the width of the loaded roll in the MRoll Paper Width list in this case ISO A2 A3 Roll 420 0mm Enhanced Printing Options Other useful settings Printing with Waterma...

Page 209: ... dialog box In the Edit Watermark dialog box you can create custom watermarks and change the position and angle of watermarks 13 Confirm the print settings and print as desired Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Windows P 207 Enhanced Printing Options Other useful settings iPF8300S Printing with Watermarks COPY FILE COPY and so on Windows 2 189 ...

Page 210: ...ystem Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation Windows P 190 Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation Mac OS X P 192 Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation Windows This topic describes how to print an original in landscape orientation after matching the paper orientation based on the fol lowing example Document An original in landscape ori...

Page 211: ... of paper that is loaded In this case click Plain Paper 5 Make your selection in the EPrint Target list 6 Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list Enhanced Printing Options Other useful settings iPF8300S Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation Windows 2 191 ...

Page 212: ... and print as desired Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Windows P 207 Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation Mac OS X This topic describes how to print an original in landscape orientation after matching the paper orientation based on the fol lowing example Document An original in landscape orientation Page size A4 210 0 297 0 mm 8 3 11 7...

Page 213: ...river displayed when you select Print from the application software menu 2 Select the printer in the APrinter list 3 In the FPaper Size list click the size of the original In this case click ISO A4 4 In DOrientation click the icon of the document in landscape orientation 5 If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box click FOK to close the dialog box and then select Print fr...

Page 214: ...r 8 Make your selection in the EPrint Target list 9 Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list 10 Access the Page Setup pane 11 Select and click a roll paper in the APaper Source list Enhanced Printing Options Other useful settings Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation Mac OS X iPF8300S 2 194 ...

Page 215: ...rinter information 13 Make sure the CPage Size setting matches the original size as selected in CPaper Size in the Page Attributes dialog box in this case ISO A4 14 Confirm the print settings and then click MPrint to start printing Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Mac OS X P 492 Enhanced Printing Options Other useful settings iPF8300S Making the Original Ori...

Page 216: ... the Paper Reference Guide See Types of Paper P 774 Automatic Cutting Roll paper is cut automatically after printing If you prefer you can print continuously without cutting the roll or you can print a cut line For instructions on cutting roll paper after printing refer to the following topics as appropriate for your computer and operating system Cutting Roll Paper After Printing Windows P 196 Cut...

Page 217: ...utomatic Cutting list If you prefer to cut the paper later yourself click Print Cut Guideline 7 Click OK to close the Roll Paper Options dialog box 8 Confirm the print settings and print as desired Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Windows P 207 Roll paper will be automatically cut after printing Enhanced Printing Options Other useful settings iPF8300S Cuttin...

Page 218: ...epending on the OS and application software you are using If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu the settings are configured by opening the Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup If it is not displayed the settings are configured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu 2 Select the printer in the APrinter list 3 Cho...

Page 219: ...d click a roll paper in the APaper Source list 7 Access the Main pane 8 In the AMedia Type list select the type of paper that is loaded Enhanced Printing Options Other useful settings iPF8300S Cutting Roll Paper After Printing Mac OS X 2 199 ...

Page 220: ...utomatic cut function has been deactivated on the printer change the auto cut setting on the printer Control Panel 11 Click OK to close the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box 12 Confirm the print settings and then click MPrint to start printing Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Mac OS X P 492 Enhanced Printing Options Other useful settings Cutting Roll Paper ...

Page 221: ...imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy 292 Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional 307 Print Plug In for Office 373 Status Monitor 426 Accounting 429 Digital Photo Front Access 442 Device Setup Utility 443 Media Configuration Tool 448 Windows Software iPF8300S 3 201 ...

Page 222: ...5 Ambient Light Adjust dialog box 227 Light Source Check Tool 229 Color Adjustment Sheet Monochrome 230 Object Adjustment dialog box Monochrome 231 Gray Adjustment Sheet 232 Page Setup Sheet 233 Output Method dialog box 236 Paper Size Options Dialog Box 237 Layout Sheet 238 Page Options Dialog Box 240 Special Settings Dialog Box 241 Favorites Sheet 242 Utility Sheet 244 Support Sheet 245 Settings ...

Page 223: ...tching Sheet P 225 Ambient Light Adjust dialog box P 227 Light Source Check Tool P 229 Color Adjustment Sheet Monochrome P 230 Object Adjustment dialog box Monochrome P 231 Gray Adjustment Sheet P 232 Page Setup Sheet P 233 You can specify the page size of the original borderless printing enlargement or reduction the orientation the paper size and feed source and automatic cutting Output Method di...

Page 224: ...freely arranging originals from various source applications on a single page as desired before printing For details see Free Layout P 261 Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy is a feature for automatic enlargement and printing of scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER For details see Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy P 292 Note Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy and imagePROGRAF Free Layout can...

Page 225: ...f paper that is loaded Note Click the BGet Information button to display the Paper Information on Printer dialog box On the Paper Information on Printer dialog box you can obtain information on the paper in the printer and configure printer driver settings for the feed source and type of paper This function requires that the Status Monitor be installed Windows Software Printer Driver iPF8300S Spec...

Page 226: ...per is supplied 8 If you have selected roll paper in LPaper Source select the width of the loaded roll in MRoll Paper Width Note A variety of settings are available in the printer driver to suit different printing applications For details on available printing conditions see Printer Driver Settings P 202 Windows Software Printer Driver Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver iPF8300S 3 206 ...

Page 227: ...size paper size and method and percentage of enlargement or reduction are indicated RBottom illustrations Illustrations indicate the feed source orientation borderless printing selection and other settings information Note To confirm the Print Target specified in Easy Settings click GView Settings on the Main sheet to display the View Settings dialog box Checking a print preview You can check an i...

Page 228: ...lication menu 2 Select the printer in the dialog box and then display the printer driver dialog box See Accessing the Printer Driv er Dialog Box from Applications P 211 3 Make sure the Main sheet is displayed 4 Select the LOpen Preview When Print Job Starts check box Windows Software Printer Driver Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing iPF8300S 3 208 ...

Page 229: ...ee Preview P 248 Using Favorites This topic describes how to register favorites and print using favorite settings Registering a favorite This section describes the procedure for registering printing settings that have been changed in the driver as Favorites 1 Choose Print in the application menu 2 Select the printer in the dialog box and then display the printer driver dialog box Refer to Accessin...

Page 230: ...ort 7 Choose a fitting icon for these print settings in the Icon list 8 In Comment enter a description of the favorite to be added as desired 9 Click OK to close the Add dialog box The favorite you have added is now displayed in AFavorites Note To save a favorite as a file click JExport and specify the file to save Windows Software Printer Driver Using Favorites iPF8300S 3 210 ...

Page 231: ...ose the favorite you registered Note To import a favorite click IImport and specify the favorite file 5 Click DApply Favorite to replace the favorite settings with the current print settings 6 Confirm the print settings and print as desired Note For instructions on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings P 207 Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications 1 Choose Print...

Page 232: ... the source application In some cases when you select the printer a sheet for configuring the printer driver is added to the dialog box In the following case click Preferences Example Print dialog box displayed by the application software Windows Software Printer Driver Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications iPF8300S 3 212 ...

Page 233: ...izes you specify temporarily in the printer driv er the sizes will not be available after you exit the application You can also access the printer driver dialog box from the Windows system menu To use the settings continuously in all applications open the printer driver from the system menu to make the settings See Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu P 213 Access...

Page 234: ... display the Printing Preferences dialog box titled with the name of this printer Note The Device Settings sheet is also an extension of the printer driver See Device Settings Sheet P 247 Windows Software Printer Driver Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu iPF8300S 3 214 ...

Page 235: ...s the printer driver dialog box from applications See Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications P 211 Main Sheet The following settings are available on the Main sheet For details on settings items refer to the printer driver help file Note On the Main sheet choose Easy Settings to specify basic print settings based on the particular printing ap plication or switch to Advanced Sett...

Page 236: ...type of media such as the ink drying time Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box P 220 LOpen Preview When Print Job Starts If you turn this on imagePROGRAF Preview starts before printing This allows you to check on screen previews of documents before printing Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing P 184 MStatus Monitor Starts imagePROGRAF Status Monitor You can check the printer status job s...

Page 237: ...ocuments P 38 Depending on the AMedia Type setting some EPrint Target options may not be available FPrint Quality Choose the level of print quality Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing P 64 GView Settings Displays the EPrint Target setting values You can view and change the order of EPrint Target setting values View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application...

Page 238: ... results with the highest quali ty Note If you set FPrint Quality to High you can select THighest quality However depending on AMe dia Type and EPrint Priority you may not be able to select THighest quality UEconomy Printing If you select this option you can print with less ink consumed However print quality is lower than in regular printing Select this option to save ink such as when printing to ...

Page 239: ... print quality However the printing speed becomes slower Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box On the Paper Information on Printer dialog box you can obtain information on the paper in the printer and configure printer driver settings for the paper source and media type Note To display the Paper Information on Printer dialog box on the Main sheet click Get Information by Media Type See Main Shee...

Page 240: ...ied even if Cutting Mode is set to Automatic Setting Item Details Printer Default The setting of the control panel of the printer is applied Off Paper is ejected immediately after printing completes 30 sec 1 min 3 min 5 min 10 min 30 min 60 min Paper is ejected when the set time elapses after printing completes CBetween Scans You can set the time to wait after printing 1 line on a page until print...

Page 241: ...e control panel of the printer is applied High Speed When the Standard setting does not result in cutting the surface cleanly select this Standard Select this when you do not have any problems in automatic cutting Low Speed This helps prevent adhesive from sticking to the cutter and keeps the cutter sharp if you select it when using adhesive paper HCalibration Value You can specify whether to appl...

Page 242: ...ows all Print Target options settings items for the printing application BName Identifies the item selected in Print Target by its name and an icon CDetails Here you can confirm detailed settings values for each listed item for the selected Print Target Color Adjustment Sheet Color If the color tone as printed is not as you expected you can adjust it on the Color Adjustment sheet Windows Software ...

Page 243: ...nged with blue or Warm Black tinged with red HBrightness Adjust the overall image brightness as desired You can adjust the brightness if the printed document is lighter or dark er than the original image that is the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic as it appears on the com puter screen IContrast Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other ...

Page 244: ... dialog box you can specify what type of print jobs to apply color adjustment to If an original comprises images graphics and text you can specify which portion to apply color adjustment to Note To display the Object Adjustment dialog box click Object Adjustment on the Color Adjustment sheet AImage Select this option to apply color adjustment to image areas such as photos BGraphics Select this opt...

Page 245: ... Mode in the AMatching Mode list AMatching Mode Select the color matching mode to use as desired Normally select Driver Matching Mode For color matching based on ICC profiles select ICC Matching Mode Driver ICM Mode or Host ICM Mode depending on your color matching system BMatching Method Select the color matching method that suits the document to be printed Various Matching Method options are ava...

Page 246: ...Select the color matching mode to use as desired BInput Profile Settings You can select Image Graphics or Text You can choose Matching Method and Input Profile Various options are available depending on your selected Matching Mode To apply the same input profile automatically for Graphics and Text select Use the Same Profile for All Objects To apply separate input profiles to Graphics and Text cle...

Page 247: ...or printing Chart The Light Source Check Tool must be installed to use this function Light Source Check Tool P 229 CChart Number In Chart select the number of the pattern with your desired colors DColor Temperature Enter the DColor Temperature measured during monitor calibration Displayed when the AMatching Method is set to Monitor Matching on the Matching sheet EIlluminance Enter the EIlluminance...

Page 248: ...d using the i1 colorimeter DColor Temperature Enter the Color Temperature measured using the i1 colorimeter EIlluminance Enter the Illuminance measured using the i1 colorimeter Displayed when the AMatching Method is set to Monitor Matching on the Matching sheet Note For details on settings items see Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver P 55 Windows Software Printer Driver Ambient Light Adjust...

Page 249: ...played here BMedia Type Select the paper type See Types of Paper P 774 CPaper Source Choose the paper source as desired Options displayed in the list vary depending on the selection in BMedia Type in the Main sheet DPrint Click to print the Chart Windows Software Printer Driver iPF8300S Light Source Check Tool 3 229 ...

Page 250: ...heckbox to apply the changed settings to the sample image DCyan EMagenta FYellow Not available GGray Tone Not available HBrightness Adjust the overall image brightness as desired You can adjust the brightness if the printed document is lighter or dark er than the original image that is the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic as it appears on the com puter screen IContrast Adjus...

Page 251: ...ject Adjustment dialog box you can specify what type of print jobs to apply color adjustment to If an original comprises images graphics and text you can specify which portion to apply color adjustment to Note To display the Object Adjustment dialog box click Object Adjustment on the Color Adjustment sheet AImage Select this option to apply color adjustment to image areas such as photos BGraphics ...

Page 252: ...olor Balance Click the list to select a color balance that suits the printing application DX EY Adjust the color balance as you check the color tone in the adjustment area You can adjust the square area in the center by clicking or dragging it Drag the vertical or horizontal scroll bars for adjustment as desired You can click the arrows by the DX horizontal and EY vertical boxes or enter the value...

Page 253: ...djust the brightness of the darkest portion SDefaults Click to restore all settings on the sheet to the default values Page Setup Sheet The following settings are available on the Page Setup sheet For details on settings items refer to the printer driver help file APage Size Select the page size as specified in the source application For details on available page sizes see Paper Sizes P 775 Window...

Page 254: ... selected the size same as the width of Roll Paper for either the length or width of the document from the APage Size list GPaper Size Available when DFit Paper Size is selected Choose the size of the paper you will print on For details on available paper sizes see Paper Sizes P 775 Paper sizes compatible with borderless printing are shown in the list CEnlarged Reduced Printing Choose from the fol...

Page 255: ...width For details on available roll widths see Paper Sizes P 775 NRoll Paper Options Complete optional roll paper settings Click to display the Roll Paper Options dialog box Under AAutomatic Cutting you can specify Yes or No and Print Cut Guideline Cutting Roll Paper After Printing P 196 Select BBanner Printing when printing multiple pages continuously Printing Multiple Pages Continuously P 144 PO...

Page 256: ...l box also specify the destination personal box in the Mail box list If Print after reception is complete is checked the print job is first saved completely on the printer hard disk before printing begins These can be selected as Print options BName of data to be saved To use the file name choose Use file name Otherwise choose Enter name and enter a name in Name CMail box Displays a list of mail b...

Page 257: ...If a standard paper size of the printer driver is selected If an oversized paper size is selected If a paper size marked with a red circle is selected CCustom Paper Size Name You can name Custom Paper Size as desired DUnits Specify the desired unit of measure for the Custom Paper Size height and width EPaper Size Specify the desired Width and Height You can make your selection from sizes that are ...

Page 258: ...e Originals Next to Each Other P 139 Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals P 44 BSet Click to display one of the following dialog boxes depending on the selection in APage Layout In these dialog box es you can specify layout details and which pages to print as well as other settings Page Layout Printing Pages to Print Free Layout Settings CWatermark Activating this option makes two settings avai...

Page 259: ...ich enables you to conserve the paper Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins P 178 HCopies Enter the number of copies to print in a range of 1 999 Reverse Order Activate this option to print pages in reverse order IPage Options Click to display the Page Options dialog box which enables you to complete settings for printing the user name date or page number in th...

Page 260: ...ted as desired DPrint Page Number Select where the page number is printed as desired EFormat Settings Click to display the Format Settings dialog box which enables you to complete format related settings Note If you specify the same position for multiple items the items are printed from left to right in this order date user name and page number When you print multiple pages per sheet using Page La...

Page 261: ...lication Color Matching Priority You can give applications priority in color management CEnable Preview Switching When this option is selected PageComposer starts if you print with Open Preview When Print Job Starts selected on the Main sheet DFast Graphic Process If image colors are inconsistent in printed documents or if lines are printed in varying thicknesses clearing this option may help prod...

Page 262: ...rint settings to those of the favorite selected in the AFavorites EApplication Settings Priority Activate this setting to use settings values specified in the source application in preference to favorite settings selected in the AFavorites when clicking DApply Favorite For details on the settings items used in preference refer to the printer driver help FDelete Click to delete the selected favorit...

Page 263: ...enables you to import favorite settings saved as a file JExport Click to display the Save As dialog box which enables you to save the favorite settings as a file KUp Click to move the selected favorite up in the AFavorites list LDown Click to move the selected favorite down in the AFavorites list Windows Software Printer Driver iPF8300S Favorites Sheet 3 243 ...

Page 264: ...nment adjustment Feed amount adjustment BColor imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Click to launch Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy iR enlargement copy which enables you to create hot fold ers used for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy and assign print settings to hot folders Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER P 304 For details see Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy P ...

Page 265: ...sumables check for printer driver updates and browse other information BUser Manual Click to view the printer user s manual This function requires the user s manual to be installed on your computer CSettings Summaries Click to display the View Settings dialog box which enables you to confirm the settings for the Main Page Setup Layout and Favorites sheets Windows Software Printer Driver iPF8300S S...

Page 266: ...ings for the Main Page Setup Layout and Favorites sheets ACopy Click to copy the settings information to the clipboard You can paste the settings information into a file created with a text editor or similar application Windows Software Printer Driver Settings Summaries Dialog Box iPF8300S 3 246 ...

Page 267: ...ns However the Device Settings sheet is for configuring the printer and it is an extension of the printer driver The following settings are available on the Device Settings sheet AAbout You can display version information for the printer driver Windows Software Printer Driver iPF8300S Device Settings Sheet 3 247 ...

Page 268: ... applied on the preview screen and you can print the preview screen as it is seen Note The media type image size detailed media settings and the printer settings can cause the actual print output to differ from the Preview settings Operating Environment You can use the Preview in the following environments Compatible Operating System 32 bit edition Windows OS Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Windows...

Page 269: ...pen the Print dialog box Note Normally select Print from the File menu 3 On the Main sheet click on the Open Preview When Print Job Starts check box Click the OK button to save the settings Note Your printer is depicted in the lower left area of this screen 4 On the Print dialog box in the apllication software click the Print button Windows Software Preview iPF8300S Starting Preview 3 249 ...

Page 270: ...Preview Main Window The Preview main window consists of the menu and tool bars preview and dialog area and status bar Note You can use the View menu to show or hide the tool bar Windows Software Preview Preview Main Window iPF8300S 3 250 ...

Page 271: ...ar This allows you to select tool buttons required for major operations Preview Area You can check the settings you made in this area Dialog Area This allows you to set the print conditions and perform a print job Windows Software Preview iPF8300S Preview Main Window 3 251 ...

Page 272: ...For more information about Dialog Area see Dialog Area P 253 Status Bar This shows the message Pages and Output Size Windows Software Preview Preview Main Window iPF8300S 3 252 ...

Page 273: ...ls Across Roll You can print on the center of the media loaded in the printer For more information about Center Originals Across Roll see Print on the Center P 259 Note Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source No Spaces at Top or Bottom You can save paper on not to feed roll paper for the empty spaces when the print data contains spaces at the top or bottom For more information about N...

Page 274: ...View menu Setting Details Fit Screen Display all Fit to Width Display to the width of the paper Reduce Display at half of the standard size Standard Display at the standard size Enlarge Display with the double of the standard size Enlarge More Display with the triple of the standard size Note This item can be selected even if you have clicked the button in the toolbar Zoom Moving a Page You can mo...

Page 275: ... mm Use mm as the ruler unit inch Use inches as the ruler unit Priority setting for rotating 90 degrees You can select Rotate 90 Degrees If Possible or Use Driver Settings from the Options menu Setting Details Rotate 90 Degrees If Possible Rotates pages in portrait orientation 90 degrees before printing Pages are only rota ted if they can fit lengthwise across the roll Use Driver Settings Follows ...

Page 276: ...0 Degrees If Possible or Placing a checkmark for Rotate Page 90 degrees Conserve Paper on the printer driver Selecting Use Driver Settings Windows Software Preview Priority setting for rotating 90 degrees iPF8300S 3 256 ...

Page 277: ... selecting the layout 1 In Layout Selection click the layout button to use Button Details Upper Button Turn at the position of Right Button Turn at the position of Left Button Turn at the position of Windows Software Preview iPF8300S Printing with Selecting the Layout 3 257 ...

Page 278: ...t Button you can save paper by printing in landscape orientation on roll paper You can select only Upper Button or Lower Button if Cut Sheet is selected Button Details The button is selected currently The button can be selected The button can not be selected 2 Click the Print Button Printing on the selected layout begins Windows Software Preview Printing with Selecting the Layout iPF8300S 3 258 ...

Page 279: ... media loaded in the printer 1 Click the Center Originals Across Roll check box on 2 Click the Print button Printing on the center begins Note Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source Windows Software Preview iPF8300S Print on the Center 3 259 ...

Page 280: ...e empty spaces when the print data contains spaces at the top or bottom 1 Click the No Spaces at Top or Bottom check box on 2 Click the Print button Printing on the settings with no spaces at top or bottom begins Windows Software Preview Not Print Spaces at the Top Bottom iPF8300S 3 260 ...

Page 281: ...284 Pasting a Copied or Cut Object 286 Folded Duplex Window 287 Finished Size Settings Dialog Box 288 Binding Settings Dialog Box 289 Prints using Folded Duplex 290 The Features of Free Layout The main features of Free Layout are as follows Allows you to lay out at will and print a document created with application software You can not only lay out multiple pages on one page but also lay out and p...

Page 282: ...rver 2008 Windows 7 Note This function is not available on 64 bit version of Windows For the Windows OS use the latest version of Service Pack Software that requires installation imagePROGRAF Printer Driver Starting Free Layout Follow the procedure below to start the Free Layout 1 Start the apllication software which you use 2 From the application software s File menu select the printer setup menu...

Page 283: ...ower left area of this screen 4 In the Layout sheet click on the Page Layout check box and select Free Layout from the list Click the OK button to save the settings Note When you select Free Layout all other setting items will be disabled Windows Software Free Layout iPF8300S Starting Free Layout 3 263 ...

Page 284: ...5 On the Print dialog box in the apllication software click the Print button Free Layout main window is displayed Windows Software Free Layout Starting Free Layout iPF8300S 3 264 ...

Page 285: ...a and status bar Note You can use the View menu to show or hide the tool and status bar Menu Bar This allows you to select menus required for operations Tool Bar This allows you to select tool buttons required for major operations Windows Software Free Layout iPF8300S Free Layout Main Window 3 265 ...

Page 286: ...his allows you to lay out objects and edit the object size and orientation Status Bar This shows the paper size unit of length and number of objects Windows Software Free Layout Free Layout Main Window iPF8300S 3 266 ...

Page 287: ...tch the type of media loaded in the printer Refer to Printer Driver P 202 for details on the printer driver Note When you select the Detailed Settings the only three sheets displayed are the Main sheet the Page Setup sheet and the Layout sheet Some of the printer driver settings may be disabled Windows Software Free Layout iPF8300S Detailed Settings 3 267 ...

Page 288: ...e numbers by clicking either button or button Divisions You can change the number of divisions of grid lines so that they serve as a guide to laying out objects Note You can input between 1 and 10 You can change the numbers by clicking either button or button Grid Color Select the grid line color Auto Arrange Spacing Change the object to object spacing to be applied in the operation of laying out ...

Page 289: ...s Dialog Box This dialog box appears when you select Page Options from the File menu This allows you to configure the roll paper length object layout order and margins of Free Layout Roll Paper Length Set the length of one page to print on roll paper The following settings are available for roll paper length Setting Details Auto Settings The one page length to be printed on roll paper is automatic...

Page 290: ...per Length Auto Settings and Paper Orientation Vertical you can choose Upper Left to Right or Upper Right to Left When you have selected Roll Paper Length Auto Settings and Paper Orientation Horizontal you can choose Upper Left to Bottom or Lower Left to Top Margins You can input the paper margins in numerical characters Note You can input between 0 0 and 50 0 mm between 0 00 and 1 97 inch You can...

Page 291: ...ct Rotate Right or Rotate Left Setting Details Rotate Right Rotates the object 90 degrees clockwise Rotate Left Rotates the object 90 degrees counterclockwise Note When several objects are selected you cannot select Rotate Enl Red When you place a checkmark here you can select Scaling Fit Paper Size or Fit Photo Size Setting Details Scaling Allows you to input the value of the enlargement or reduc...

Page 292: ...on or button Position Sheet You can rotate enlarge or reduce an object Note When the objects are not selected you can not select Format Object Position You can move the object position by changing the values Setting Details Vertical Pos You can input the number of the vertical position in numerical characters Horizontal Pos You can input the number of the horizontal position in numerical character...

Page 293: ...d print a multiple file document on one page 1 From the application software s File menu select the printer setup menu to open the Print dialog box Note Normally select Print from the File menu 2 Click Properties to open the Properties dialog box Windows Software Free Layout iPF8300S Laying out a Multiple File Document on One Page 3 273 ...

Page 294: ...e Your printer is depicted in the lower left area of this screen 4 In the Layout sheet click on the Page Layout check box and select Free Layout from the list Windows Software Free Layout Laying out a Multiple File Document on One Page iPF8300S 3 274 ...

Page 295: ...lick the OK button to save the settings 6 In the Print dialog box select the pages to print and the number of copies and click the OK button Free Layout starts laying out the document created with application software in the layout area as an object Windows Software Free Layout iPF8300S Laying out a Multiple File Document on One Page 3 275 ...

Page 296: ...and print a document created with multiple application programs on one page 1 From the application software s File menu select the printer setup menu to open the Print dialog box Note Normally select Print from the File menu 2 Click Properties to open the Properties dialog box Windows Software Free Layout Laying out a Document Created with Multiple Application Programs on One Page iPF8300S 3 276 ...

Page 297: ... is depicted in the lower left area of this screen 4 In the Layout sheet click on the Page Layout check box and select Free Layout from the list Windows Software Free Layout iPF8300S Laying out a Document Created with Multiple Application Programs on One Page 3 277 ...

Page 298: ...tton to save the settings 6 In the Print dialog box select the pages to print and the number of copies and click the OK button Free Layout starts laying out the document created with application software in the layout area as an object Windows Software Free Layout Laying out a Document Created with Multiple Application Programs on One Page iPF8300S 3 278 ...

Page 299: ...e To select an object click that object To select multiple successive objects click them while holding down the Shift key To select multiple arbitrary objects click them while holding down the Ctrl key To select all objects select Select All from the Edit menu When you specify the area with dragging the mouse the object in the area is selected Windows Software Free Layout iPF8300S Selecting an Obj...

Page 300: ...round the object to show the arrow handle and drag this handle to change the object size Resizing by specifying a scaling value 1 Select an object Click on the Enl Red checkbox in the Format Dialog Box P 271 and select Scaling 2 You either enter numbers directly Note You can input between 25 and 600 You can change the numbers by clicking either button or button 3 Click the OK button Moving an Obje...

Page 301: ...orizontal Pos and Page Pos in the Format Dialog Box P 271 Rotating an Object You can rotate the object 1 Select an object 2 Select Rotate Left 90 Degrees or Rotate Right 90 Degrees from the toolbar Alternatively you may click on the Rotate check box in the Format Dialog Box P 271 then select Rotate Right or Rotate Left and click the OK button Windows Software Free Layout iPF8300S Rotating an Objec...

Page 302: ...er varies depending on the Order setting in the Page Options Dialog Box P 269 dialog box Aligning Objects You can align objects systematically 1 Select multiple objects 2 Click the align button from the toolbar Alternatively you may select the align menu from the Object menu Align Top Lays out the objects justifying them to the top Windows Software Free Layout Laying out Objects Automatically iPF8...

Page 303: ... objects justifying them to the vertical center Align Bottom Lays out the objects justifying them to the bottom Align Left Lays out the objects justifying them to the left Windows Software Free Layout iPF8300S Aligning Objects 3 283 ...

Page 304: ...apping Order You can change the object overlapping order 1 Select an object 2 Select the Overlapping Order menu from the Object menu Note The order of overlapping affects the order of objects automatically laid out You can also select by clicking the right button of the mouse on an object Windows Software Free Layout Changing the Object Overlapping Order iPF8300S 3 284 ...

Page 305: ...object to the frontmost position Send to Back Moves the object to the backmost position Bring Forward Moves the object one position to the front Windows Software Free Layout iPF8300S Changing the Object Overlapping Order 3 285 ...

Page 306: ... you may select Paste from the Edit menu Note The copied or cut object is laid out at the end of the page You can also select by clicking the right button of the mouse on an object In order to paste an object on any position that you like you can paste the object with Pointed Paste by clicking the right button of the mouse on any position that you want Windows Software Free Layout Pasting a Copied...

Page 307: ...ded The Folded Duplex window consists of the menu and tool bars layout area and status bar Note The toolbar and status bar can be toggled between hidden and displayed from the View menu Menu Bar This allows you to select menus required for operations Tool Bar This allows you to select tool buttons required for major operations Windows Software Free Layout iPF8300S Folded Duplex Window 3 287 ...

Page 308: ...Size Settings Dialog Box This dialog box is displayed when you select Finished Size Settings from the Edit menu This allows you to configure finished size settings Finished Size Selects the method for setting the finished size The following settings are available for the finished size Windows Software Free Layout Finished Size Settings Dialog Box iPF8300S 3 288 ...

Page 309: ...l paper width Binding Settings Dialog Box This is displayed when you select Binding Settings from the Edit menu This allows you to configure the binding edge settings Binding Edge Configures the binding edge when folding paper The following settings are available for the binding edge Setting Details Bottom Prints by placing the binding margin gutter at the bottom of the document Top Prints by plac...

Page 310: ...s 2 pages consecutively Folding back the paper at the fold lines of the center substitutes for duplex printing 1 Select two objects from the layout area of Free Layout 2 Select Folded Duplex from the Edit menu of Free Layout Open the Folded Duplex window and arrange the selected objects in the layout area 3 Open the Finished Size Settings dialog box from the Edit menu 4 Select Fit Roll Paper Width...

Page 311: ...the Only Print Center and Edges checkbox is selected fold lines are only printed at the three locations of the center and both edges 10 Click OK to save the settings 11 Confirm the print setting and begin printing Windows Software Free Layout iPF8300S Prints using Folded Duplex 3 291 ...

Page 312: ...er driver Note The media type image size detailed media settings and the printer settings can cause the actual print output to differ from the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy settings Operating Environment You can use the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy in the following environments Compatible Operating System Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2003 R2 Windows Vista Windows Server...

Page 313: ...olor imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box displays Note If you click on the Add to Startup folder check box in the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box the icon of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility will appear on the task bar when starting Windows thereafter Windows Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy iPF8300S Starting Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy 3 293 ...

Page 314: ...lays Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Dialog Box The explanation below is on the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box Note For the step to open the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box see Starting Color image RUNNER Enlargement Copy P 292 Hot Folder The hot folder list appears Windows Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Dialog Box iPF...

Page 315: ...egister the application in the Windows startup menu Save Printed Data Automatically saves printed data About Button Click the button to display the name and the version number of the utility Operation Guide Button Click the button to display the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Setup Manual Hot Folder Hot folder refers to a folder used for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy When transferred to t...

Page 316: ...e Add button Note For the step to open the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box see Starting Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy P 292 2 The Easy Setup Wizard dialog box displays Click the Next button Windows Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Creating a New Hot Folder iPF8300S 3 296 ...

Page 317: ... media type to print Note If the Borderless Printing checkbox is checked only media types that can be used for borderless printing are displayed in the list Click the Next button Windows Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy iPF8300S Creating a New Hot Folder 3 297 ...

Page 318: ...eceive a document scanned with the Color imageRUNNER you need to share a folder Enter the folder shared name in Shared Name Click the Next button Note This shared name is used as the name of the hot folder You cannot use the Back button after clicking the Next button here Windows Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Creating a New Hot Folder iPF8300S 3 298 ...

Page 319: ...8 Click Finish button to close the Easy Setup Wizard dialog box Windows Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy iPF8300S Creating a New Hot Folder 3 299 ...

Page 320: ...e folder you want to specify as a hot folder 2 Open the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box and then click the Add button Note For the step to open the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box see Starting Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy P 292 Windows Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Specifying an Existing Shared Folder as a Hot Folder iPF8300S 3 300 ...

Page 321: ... Add Edit Hot Folder dialog box displays Enter the hot folder name in Name Click the Browse botton with selecting Specify a folder to set the existing shared folder Windows Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy iPF8300S Specifying an Existing Shared Folder as a Hot Folder 3 301 ...

Page 322: ... the OK button 6 As necessary set the print conditions in the hot folder See Setting the Print Parameters P 303 Click the OK button to close the Add Edit Hot Folder dialog box Windows Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Specifying an Existing Shared Folder as a Hot Folder iPF8300S 3 302 ...

Page 323: ...older dialog box The printer driver is used to configure basic settings to match the type of media loaded in the printer Refer to Printer Driver P 202 for details on the printer driver Note The only three sheets displayed are the Main sheet the Page Setup sheet and the Layout sheet Some of the printer driver settings may be disabled Windows Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy iPF8300S Sett...

Page 324: ...mputer Register a hot folder on your computer for storing scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER and complete the settings for enlargement copy 2 Complete the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER Configure the Color imageRUNNER to send scanned originals to the hot folder After these settings are complete you can print enlarged copies of scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER Regi...

Page 325: ...eRUNNER For instructions on assigning scanning settings and destinations to a Favorites button refer to the setting manual displayed by clicking Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Setup Manual button of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility or refer to the Color imageRUNNER manual Scanning the original and print an enlargement Follow the steps below to scan an original on the Color imageRUNNE...

Page 326: ...ress Done on the touch panel display Scanned originals are sent to the hot folder and automatically enlarged and printed following the conditions you specified for the folder Windows Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER iPF8300S 3 306 ...

Page 327: ...nt 340 Adjust the Colors while Checking the Preview for Color 341 Adjust the Colors while Checking the Preview for Monochrome 342 Adjust the Colors by Color Matching 346 Print High Quality Adobe RGB16bit Images 347 Prints monochrome photographs with high quality 349 Using Adobe CMM 349 Perform Black Point Compensation 351 Perform Printing Press Simulation Print 352 Enlarge Reduce and Print 353 Enl...

Page 328: ...an cause the actual print output to differ from the Print Plug In settings the arrangement of the image in the layout preview the print start position and the media size Loss of gradation in dark areas can be reduced by performing black point compensation Note Adobe CMM is required in order to use the black point compensation function You can perform printing press simulation printing by specifyin...

Page 329: ...r Note If the installer screen does not appear open the CD ROM icon in My Computer and click on set up exe to open the icon 2 Click imagePROGRAF Print Plug in button 3 Click the appropriate Install button for your Print Plug In For 32 bit Windows Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300S Installation Procedures 3 309 ...

Page 330: ... Print Plug In cannot be found Specify the des tination for installation of the plug in will appear In this case refer to the Photoshop manual then specify a folder for the Plug In The Print Plug In cannot be installed in Photoshop until after Photoshop has been installed and then opened at least once on a PC Install the Print Plug In after installing opening and quitting Photoshop 4 Click Next bu...

Page 331: ...icensing Agreement select I accept the terms of the license agreement and click the Next button 6 Click Install button Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300S Installation Procedures 3 311 ...

Page 332: ... xx then click Change Remove Uninstall the Print Plug In for Digital Photo Professional 1 Select start in Control Panel menu 2 Open Add or Remove Programs For Windows 7 and Windows Vista Programs and Features 3 Select Canon iPFxxxx Print Plug In for Digital Photo Professional then click Change Remove Note iPFxxxx is the name of your printer Starting from Photoshop Follow the procedure below to sta...

Page 333: ...ofile changes to Adobe RGB To use an ICCv4 profile in a Windows XP environment exit Plug In and then install Adobe CMM For details on installing Adobe CMM refer to Using Adobe CMM P 349 Note If the message below is displayed but the Print Plug In window is not displayed install the newest imagePROGRAF printer driver and then attempt step 3 The imagePROGRAF Printer Driver for iPFxxxx is either not ...

Page 334: ...magePROGRAF Print Plug In for Digital Photo Professional window hereinafter referred to as the Print Plug In window is displayed Important When a profile is created with a commercially available profile creation tool it may be created in ICCv4 format When an image source profile is ICCv4 you must install AdobeCMM or use Print Plug In in a Windows Vista or later environment When Adobe CMM is not in...

Page 335: ...en each sheet on the Print Plug In window are displayed When you select a tab a sheet is displayed The settings available on each sheet are as follows Main Sheet P 318 Page Setup Sheet P 322 Color Settings Sheet P 325 Print History Sheet P 326 Support Sheet P 327 Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300S Print Plug In Main Window 3 315 ...

Page 336: ...contains the buttons Print Quit and Help PrintButton Click this button to begin printing QuitButton Click this button to close the Print Plug In window and return to application software HelpButton Click this button to display the Print Plug In Help file Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Print Plug In Main Window iPF8300S 3 316 ...

Page 337: ... image while the cursor is dis played as When you click the image while the cursor is displayed as the selected area is deselected Roll Paper Preview Display the media size and roll paper information on the top in the layout printing on roll paper To select Roll Paper Preview select Roll Paper in Paper Source Print Selected Range Place a checkmark here to only print the selected range Note When yo...

Page 338: ... you are using the color balance of the actual print product will differ Image Properties button When you click the button to open the Image Properties dialog box where Image Size Resolution Bit and Color Space information of the image imported to Print Plug In are displayed Click the Close button to return to Print Plug In Main Sheet You can use this sheet to perform basic settings such as select...

Page 339: ... and memory capacity High Accuracy 600ppi This processes images at a more accurate resolution This setting results in the best print quality but this takes more time to print than Accuracy 300ppi while also re quiring more memory capacity This may not be displayed depending on how you set Media Type Input Bit to Plug in You can select the bit number to process with Print Plug In The following sett...

Page 340: ...mally select these settings Auto Monochrome Photo Performs the best color conversion to monochrome from the input image data color space information sRGB Adobe RGB media settings etc None No Color Correction You cannot perform color conversion with a plug in This is useful for creating an original ICC profile External ICC Profiles This selects printer ICC profiles to be output to ICC profiles save...

Page 341: ...the Output Profile When this button is clicked the ICC Conversion Options dialog box is displayed allowing you to configure color conversion related settings Refer to ICC Conversion Options dialog box P 331 for details on ICC Conversion Options Copies You can input the number of print copies in numerical characters Note The maximum value is 99 You can change the numbers by clicking either or Set C...

Page 342: ...uction The image size sent to the printer is displayed matching the selected method in Output Image Size The following settings are available for enlarged reduced printing Setting Details Fit Paper Size This automatically enlarges reduces the entire image imported to Print Plug In to match the export media size when printing Fit Roll Paper Width This automatically enlarges reduces the entire image...

Page 343: ...ees Layout You can select the print position of an image on the media The following settings are available for layout Layout Setting Details Upper Left of Output Paper Size Prints the image with fitting the top left of the active print area for Paper Size Center of Output Paper Size Prints the center of the image on the center of the selected Paper Size Specify Print Start Position You can print w...

Page 344: ...he cut sheet Roll Paper Options button Click this button to open the Roll Paper Options dialog box where you can set roll paper width and perform auto cut settings For more information about the roll paper options see Roll Paper Options Dialog Box P 332 Size Options Click the Size Options button to open the Size Options dialog box and you can select a media name size and other settings For more in...

Page 345: ...inputting a numerical value or dragging the slide bar Note You can check the adjustments in the preview display Brightness You can adjust the brightness of the printed image without losing the brightest and darkest areas by either inputting a numerical value or dragging the slide bar Note You can check the adjustments in the preview display Contrast You can relatively adjust the brightness of the ...

Page 346: ... sheet to their defaults Print History Sheet You can use this sheet to apply settings history used in printing and to print information such as the image file name with the image Print History and Favorites This displays a list of print preferences Select Restore Defaults and click the Apply button to restore all settings to their initial settings Note You can check the 3 print preferences in the ...

Page 347: ...image Bottom Footer Information is printed on the bottom of the image Print History Number Place a checkmark here to print the print history number File Name Place a checkmark here to print the file name Printed at Place a checkmark here to print the time and date Color Adjustment Value Place a checkmark here to print the color adjustment value Printer Name Place a checkmark here to print the prin...

Page 348: ...This dialog box appears when you click the Advanced Settings button on the Main Sheet You can set Drying Time and Roll Paper Margin for Safety by media type Drying Time Between Pages This sets the wait time for the ink to dry between each completely printed sheet and the output of the sheet Setting Details Printer Default The settings of the printer operating panel are applied None The paper is ej...

Page 349: ...elect this setting when you are not experiencing problems Slow This helps prevent adhesive from sticking to the cutter and keeps the cutter sharp if you select it when using adhesive paper Calibration Value When calibration has been carried out on the printer use this setting to choose whether or not to use the results Setting Details Printer Default The settings of the printer operating panel are...

Page 350: ...rgement method The following settings are available for the image enlargement method Setting Details Nearest Neighbor Performs simple enlargement Bilinear Performs line vector enlargement Bicubic Adjust pixels with calculation of elements such as a color or brightness of neighbor ing pixels Close Plug in After Printing When you place a checkmark here the plug in closes after printing finishes Note...

Page 351: ... screen again become displayed ICC Conversion Options dialog box This is displayed when an ICC profile is selected in the Output Profile list in the Main sheet and the ICC Conversion Options button is clicked This allows you to configure detailed color matching related settings Conversion Engine Selects the conversion engine to use when converting colors Note Adobe CMM needs to be installed in ord...

Page 352: ...aper width and perform the auto cut settings Roll Paper Width This selects the width of the roll media set to the printer Automatic Cutting You can set the printer to cut roll paper automatically or print a guideline for cutting The following settings are available for automatic cutting Setting Details Available Each page is automatically cut after it is printed None Each page is not cut after it ...

Page 353: ... enter any name up to 63 characters Units You can select the units of measure to use when you define custom media size Switching this setting resets the units of measure for the entire Plug In Paper Size Width Enter the width of the media size Height Enter the height of the media size Add button Click the button to register the contents of the settings Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop ...

Page 354: ...alue Note The allowed entry range is 0 to 255 You can change the numbers by clicking either button or button Output Enter an output value Note The allowed entry range is 0 to 255 You can change the numbers by clicking either button or button Load Curves button Click the button to load stored data for a tone curve Save Curves button Click the button to stores the current tone curve settings Windows...

Page 355: ... Displays time and date of printing Comment Displays comment details Note Up to 200 print history items can be displayed All items above 200 are deleted When you cannot print properly because you canceled the printing or an error occurred appears to the left of the print history number Delete button Click the button to delete the selected print history Add button Click the button to add the select...

Page 356: ...selected from the Print History or Favorites Setting Details Main When you select this the Main sheet settings are displayed Page Setup When you select this the Page Setup sheet settings are displayed Color Settings When you select this the Color Settings sheet settings are displayed Utilize Three Types of Previews You can use Print Plug In to check an image in three types of previews The preview ...

Page 357: ...isplayed as on the preview you can specify the print position by dragging the image When the cursor is displayed as on the preview the below conditions on the Page Setup sheet have all been met There is no checkmark in Borderless Printing There is no checkmark in Enlarged Reduced Printing or Scaling has been selected Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300S ...

Page 358: ...ass while there is an Image in the Preview area the Selected Range feature is enabled and you an drag the cursor on the image and select an area for print ing When you click the image while the cursor is displayed as on the preview the selected area is deselec ted Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Check the original image with Image iPF8300S 3 338 ...

Page 359: ... Select Roll Paper Preview in Preview Note To select Roll Paper Preview in Preview select Roll Paper in Paper Source Print with a Desired Picture Quality You can specify and print at the resolution you desire 1 Display the Main sheet Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300S Check Image with Roll Paper Preview 3 339 ...

Page 360: ... in Input Bit to Plug in Note When you select High Gradation 8bit images are processed at 8 bit channel 24 bit When you select Highest Gradation 16bit images are processed at 16bit channel 48 bit Highest Gradation 16bit will not display with some Media Type or Input Resolution to Plug in settings 5 Select the mode to be printed when processing images in Print Mode Note The settings that can be sel...

Page 361: ... Yellow Low for Saturation Warm Black for Gray Tone Enhance brightness for the curves The above image adjustments are reflected in the before and after images below Before Application After Application 1 Display the Color Settings sheet 2 Drag the slide bar in the direction of Low in Cyan Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300S Adjust the Colors while Check...

Page 362: ...e OK button 8 Click the Print button The adjustments are reflected in the image and printing begins Adjust the Colors while Checking the Preview for Monochrome You can adjust the colors while checking the adjustments in the preview The following explanation is about the procedures for adjusting example image below Low for Contrast Light for Highlight Light for Shadow Enhance brightness for the cur...

Page 363: ...pplication 1 Open the Main sheet 2 Select Auto Monochrome Photo in Output Profile Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300S Adjust the Colors while Checking the Preview for Monochrome 3 343 ...

Page 364: ...oward Light Note You can change the numbers by inputting in numerical characters You can change the numbers by clicking either button or button 7 Click the Curves button then click near the center of the curve Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Adjust the Colors while Checking the Preview for Monochrome iPF8300S 3 344 ...

Page 365: ...ck the OK button 9 Click the Print button This applies the image adjustments and starts the print job Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300S Adjust the Colors while Checking the Preview for Monochrome 3 345 ...

Page 366: ...eet 2 Select the profile in Output Profile Note When you place a checkmark in Perform Proof in Preview you can check the color matching in the preview This may not be displayed depending on how you set Media Type The details of Output Profile you have set is saved even when you close the Print Plug In but when the specified profile cannot be located it is set to Auto Color If an ICC profile is sel...

Page 367: ...oshop without compromising the level of tone in the image 1 Select the Adobe RGB16bit image data in Photoshop and start Print Plug In See Starting from Photoshop P 312 2 Click button 3 Check that Adobe RGB is displayed in Color Space and 16bit channel is displayed in Bit in the Image Properties dialog box and click the Close button Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Profess...

Page 368: ...y possible in Print Mode 8 If required adjust the colors using color matching Note For more information about the color matching see Adjust the Colors by Color Matching P 346 9 Click the Print button Printing of the Adobe RGB16bit image begins Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Print High Quality Adobe RGB16bit Images iPF8300S 3 348 ...

Page 369: ...uitable monochrome and printing begins Using Adobe CMM Adobe CMM is a color conversion engine made by Adobe Using Adobe CMM makes it possible to obtain uniform color conversion results and to use the black point compensation function How to Obtain Adobe CMM Adobe CMM can be obtained using the following procedure 1 Open the Adobe website http www adobe com 2 Enter Adobe CMM in the search input box ...

Page 370: ...dows XP SP2 Windows Vista Supported CPU Intel Xeon Xeon Dual Intel Centrino Pentium 4 processor Note Check with Adobe for details How to Use Adobe CMM The procedure for using Adobe CMM is as follows 1 Display the Main sheet 2 Select one of the ICC profiles as the Output Profile 3 Click the ICC Conversion Options button Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Using A...

Page 371: ...this to avoid saturation in the black areas of images Important Adobe CMM needs to be installed in order to use black point compensation Refer to Using Adobe CMM P 349 for details on how to install Adobe CMM 1 Display the Main sheet 2 Select one of the ICC profiles as the Output Profile 3 Click the ICC Conversion Options button to open the ICC Conversion Options dialog box Windows Software Print P...

Page 372: ... prints by specifying ICC profiles such as Japan Color or SWOP and specifying an ICC profile for the printing press 1 Display the Main sheet 2 Select one of the ICC profiles as the Output Profile 3 Check the Proof check box and select the profile for the printing press you want to target from the list on the right Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Perform Prin...

Page 373: ...53 Enlarge Reduce and Print Matching Width of Roll Paper P 355 Specify Scaling Enlarge Reduce and Print P 356 Enlarge Reduce and Print Matching Output Media Size By specifying the media type loaded in the printer the image can be enlarged or reduced to fit the size of the image area of the media This feature is useful when you need to print on the full width of Media that you have selected Note Wh...

Page 374: ...entation Note When you select Portrait the image on the media prints as it appears on the screen When you select Landscape the image on the media prints rotated 90 degrees 4 Click the Enlarged Reduced Printing check box on Note This is not displayed when a checkmark is placed in Borderless Printing 5 Select Fit Paper Size 6 Click the Print button The image prints filling the entire output media su...

Page 375: ...ormation about the Roll Paper Options dialog box see Roll Paper Options Dialog Box P 332 Click the Defaults button to return all of the roll paper option settings to their defaults 5 Select either Portrait or Landscape as the media orientation for the image in Orientation Note When you select Portrait the image on the media prints as it appears on the screen When you select Landscape the image on ...

Page 376: ...en a checkmark is placed in Borderless Printing Fit Roll Paper Widthis set in Enlarged Reduced Printing 3 Select either Portrait or Landscape as the media orientation for the image in Orientation Note When you select Portrait the image on the media prints as it appears on the screen When you select Landscape the image on the media prints rotated 90 degrees 4 Click the Enlarged Reduced Printing che...

Page 377: ...ng rate Print with No Borders You can use the borderless printing function to print without margins surrounding the image Note With some media borderless printing can be performed only between two edges To use the borderless printing function the specified media must be set to the printer 1 Display the Page Setup sheet 2 Select Roll Paper in Paper Source 3 Click the Borderless Printing check box o...

Page 378: ...elect media type that is actually set in the printer When the media you chose is different from the media set in the printer you may not receive the desired print results 3 Click the Advanced Settings button 4 Perform the settings in the Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box P 328 and click the OK button Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Customize Media Settings ...

Page 379: ... things using print history Confirm Print History Details P 359 Apply Print History to an Image P 361 Store Print History to Print Preferences P 361 Delete Print History P 364 Export Print History from Print Preferences P 366 Import Print History to Print Preferences P 367 Delete Print History from Print Preferences P 369 Set Information to Print with Image P 371 Confirm Print History Details You ...

Page 380: ...ory or Favorites in the Print History Details dialog box 3 Check the print history details in Settings and click the OK button Note You can display the print history details by switching the sheets Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Confirm Print History Details iPF8300S 3 360 ...

Page 381: ...int History and Favorites and click the Apply button Store Print History to Print Preferences You can store often used print history to print preferences Not only can you store the print history stored under a different name in print preferences you can also find it with ease Note You can store up to 200 print history items to print preferences Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital ...

Page 382: ...history you wish to store in print preferences from Print History in the Print History Details dialog box and check the print history details in Settings Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Store Print History to Print Preferences iPF8300S 3 362 ...

Page 383: ...tory and click the button 5 In the Add Favorites dialog box input the name of the print history in Name input a comment in Comment and click the OK button Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300S Store Print History to Print Preferences 3 363 ...

Page 384: ...rint History You can delete print history Important Be aware that you cannot undo deletions of print history 1 Display the Print History sheet 2 Click the Details button Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Delete Print History iPF8300S 3 364 ...

Page 385: ... in the Print History Details dialog box and click the Delete button 4 Click the OK button 5 Click the OKbutton to close the Print History Details dialog box Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300S Delete Print History 3 365 ...

Page 386: ...splay the Print History sheet 2 Click the Details button 3 Select the print history you wish to export from Favorites in the Print History Details dialog box and click the Export button Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Export Print History from Print Preferences iPF8300S 3 366 ...

Page 387: ...k the OK button to close the Print History Details dialog box Import Print History to Print Preferences You can import print history in file format and store it to print preferences 1 Display the Print History sheet 2 Click the Details button Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300S Import Print History to Print Preferences 3 367 ...

Page 388: ... history is imported Note The print history file name suffix is pjb You cannot import a print history file exported from a different OS in Print Plug In You cannot import a print history file exported from a different printer in Print Plug In Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Import Print History to Print Preferences iPF8300S 3 368 ...

Page 389: ... can delete print history store to print preferences You cannot store more than 200 print history items in print preferen ces 1 Display the Print History sheet 2 Click the Details button Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300S Delete Print History from Print Preferences 3 369 ...

Page 390: ...History Details dialog box and click the Delete button 4 Click the OK button 5 Click the OK button to close the Print History Details dialog box Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Delete Print History from Print Preferences iPF8300S 3 370 ...

Page 391: ...me media sizes enlargement rates and print position values When Keep Media Size is set to On on the printer a portion of bottom of the print data is not printed 1 Display the Print History sheet 2 Click the Print Information check box on 3 Select the position where you wish to print the information in Information Print Position 4 Click the information check box you wish to print on 5 When you wish...

Page 392: ...e Edit Comment dialog box and click OK button 7 Click the Print button Comments are printed with images Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Set Information to Print with Image iPF8300S 3 372 ...

Page 393: ...l 417 Print Selected Area Excel 420 Configuring Binding Excel 423 Configuring Special Settings 424 Print Plug In for Office features Print Plug In for Office is a Plug In that enables easy printing from Microsoft Office It is displayed on the toolbar ribbon so it is easily accessible It can be set by just selecting from the Wizard Large Format Printing custom size can also be set in the Wizard fro...

Page 394: ...12MB or more for Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 HDD free space 20GB or more Important If you opened the Office document from Internet Explorer the software will not run correctly If you are editing an embedded object or link object the software will not run correctly If you added the imagePROGRAF Print Plug In ribbon to the Microsoft Office 2007 2010 Quick Access toolbar the software will not ...

Page 395: ...2 Click the Install Individual Software button 3 Click Install in imagePROGRAF Print Plug In for Office Windows Software Print Plug In for Office iPF8300S Steps to install 3 375 ...

Page 396: ...4 Click the Next button 5 Read the License Agreement and click the Yes button Windows Software Print Plug In for Office Steps to install iPF8300S 3 376 ...

Page 397: ... Click the Start button 7 Click the Yes button 8 Click the Exit button The installation for Print Plug In for Office is complete Windows Software Print Plug In for Office iPF8300S Steps to install 3 377 ...

Page 398: ... steps to uninstall Print Plug In for Office 1 If Microsoft Office is open close it 2 Select Control Panel from the start menu 3 Open Add or Remove Programs 4 Select imagePROGRAF Print Plug In and click the Remove button Note You cannot uninstall Print Plug In for Office if an Office application is running When a message appears select Cancel and close all Office applications that are running When...

Page 399: ...ion Re install Print Plug In for Office as follows 1 Close Microsoft Office if it is open 2 Install Print Plug In for Office For information about instsalling see Steps to install P 374 Enabling Print Plug In for Office for items disabled in Office applications If a problem occurs such as the system or an application terminating abnormally the Microsoft Office application disables add ins as a saf...

Page 400: ...eprograf print plug in ipfaddinif dll is displayed in the Disabled Items dialog box select it and click the Enable button 5 Close all the dialog boxes and restart the Office application Windows Software Print Plug In for Office When Print Plug In for Office is not displayed iPF8300S 3 380 ...

Page 401: ...ame options button 2 From the list on the left side of the application name options dialog box select Add ins 3 Select Disabled Items in the Manage combo box and click the Go button Windows Software Print Plug In for Office iPF8300S When Print Plug In for Office is not displayed 3 381 ...

Page 402: ...ox select it and click the Enable button 5 Close all the dialog boxes and restart the Office application For Microsoft Office 2003 1 Click About application name in the Help menu of application Windows Software Print Plug In for Office When Print Plug In for Office is not displayed iPF8300S 3 382 ...

Page 403: ... the Disabled Items dialog box select it and click the Enable button 4 Close all the dialog boxes and restart the Office application To start from Microsoft Word Below are the steps to start Print Plug In for Office from Microsoft Word 1 Start Microsoft Word Windows Software Print Plug In for Office iPF8300S To start from Microsoft Word 3 383 ...

Page 404: ... change the settings using the Special Settings dialog box Refer to Configuring Special Settings P 424 for details Printer list Select Printer If you select Show All Printers the imagePROGRAF printers will be displayed again Select this when you want to display all printer drivers or update the display Print Button The print Wizard is displayed The settings Print Matching Roll Width Borderless Pri...

Page 405: ...le or application while the Printing Wizard is open close the Printing Wizard dialog box Otherwise you may not be able to change displays or operate the toolbar Large Format Printing Wizard dialog box Windows Software Print Plug In for Office iPF8300S To start from Microsoft Word 3 385 ...

Page 406: ... can print large exhibits and posters and also print Portrait and Landscape orienta tions made in Large Format Printing Wizard 1 Start Microsoft Word 2 If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug In is displayed click it 3 Click Print from the imagePROGRAF Print Plug In toolbar ribbon The Printing Wizard dialog box is displayed Important If you want to change the display to another file or application while ...

Page 407: ...nt Matching Roll Width 5 Select Roll Paper Width that is set in the printer 6 Select image size 7 Select layout 8 Select Next Windows Software Print Plug In for Office iPF8300S Print Matching Roll Width Word 3 387 ...

Page 408: ...le times using the same setting Press the Print Preview button to display the preview screen You can check and make changes to the layout in the preview screen When you print to the edge of the roll width the maximum length will be the lesser of 5 587 times the roll paper width or 18 0m 12 Press Print to start printing Borderless Printing Word Prints up to the border of the media Photos and poster...

Page 409: ... you want to change the display to another file or application while the Printing Wizard is open close the Printing Wizard dialog box Otherwise you may not be able to change displays or operate the toolbar ribbon 4 Click Borderless Printing Windows Software Print Plug In for Office iPF8300S Borderless Printing Word 3 389 ...

Page 410: ...cted in Choose how to proceed and press OK Note To adjust the data select Return to application and press OK Exit Print Plug In for Office and return to the application 6 Select Roll Paper Width that is set in the printer 7 Select Layout Windows Software Print Plug In for Office Borderless Printing Word iPF8300S 3 390 ...

Page 411: ...his is useful for multiple printing using the same settings Press the Print Preview button to display the preview screen You can confirm and make changes to the layout in the preview screen The maximum length for Borderless Printing is the lesser of 5 587 times the roll paper width or 18 0m 12 Press Print to start printing Multi Page Printing Word Prints multiple pages as one page You can print ha...

Page 412: ... Wizard dialog box is displayed Important If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Printing Wizard is open close the Printing Wizard dialog box Otherwise you may not be able to change displays or operate the toolbar ribbon Windows Software Print Plug In for Office Multi Page Printing Word iPF8300S 3 392 ...

Page 413: ... Printing 5 Select the Roll Paper Width that is set in the printer 6 Select layout from Layout Selection 7 Select Next 8 Select Media Type Windows Software Print Plug In for Office iPF8300S Multi Page Printing Word 3 393 ...

Page 414: ... maximum length for Multi Page Printing is the lesser of 5 587 times the roll paper width or 18 0m 11 Press Print to start printing Register the settings Word If you are going to print multiple times using the same setting you can select One Touch Registration Registered settings can be recalled from Print Using Registered Settings 1 Set up to the Print screen from Print Matching Roll Width Border...

Page 415: ...cking Cancel in the Print screen will not delete the registered settings Print Using Registered Settings Word Prints using the registered settings 1 Start Microsoft Word 2 If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug In is displayed click it 3 Click Print from the imagePROGRAF Print Plug In toolbar ribbon The Printing Wizard dialog box is displayed Windows Software Print Plug In for Office iPF8300S Print Usin...

Page 416: ... is open close the Printing Wizard dialog box Otherwise you may not be able to change displays or operate the toolbar ribbon 4 Click Print Using Registered Settings 5 Click the Next button 6 Select Media Type Windows Software Print Plug In for Office Print Using Registered Settings Word iPF8300S 3 396 ...

Page 417: ... and posters or print the Landscape or Portrait Orientation Page Sizes made in the Large Format Printing Wizard Create Page Size in Portrait or Landscape Orientation Use the Large Format Printing Wizard to create portrait page sizes for Potrait Orientation and landscape page sizes for Landscape Orientation 1 Start Microsoft Word 2 If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug In is displayed click it 3 Click P...

Page 418: ...taken to create a Portrait Page Size will be used as an example to explain the procedure 5 Adjust Length from the list box or slide bar 6 Click the Create Page button Windows Software Print Plug In for Office Portrait Orientation Landscape Orientation Word iPF8300S 3 398 ...

Page 419: ... again To start from Microsoft PowerPoint Below are the steps to start Print Plug In for Office from Microsoft PowerPoint 1 Start Microsoft PowerPoint 2 If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug In is displayed on the toolbar ribbon click it Important If the imagePROGRAF Print Plug In toolbar ribbon is not displayed refer to the following When Print Plug In for Office is not displayed P 378 3 Check that th...

Page 420: ...ing Roll Width Borderless Printing Multi Page Print ing and Print Using Registered Settings can be set Paper Settings Button Large Format Wizard is displayed Settings for Portrait or Landscape Orientation can be set Printing Wizard dialog box Important If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Printing Wizard is open close the Printing Wizard dialog box Otherwise y...

Page 421: ...hat is the case modify the data again Note If you open a password protected document as read only the Large Format Printing Wizard cannot be run Remove the password protection Print Matching Roll Width PowerPoint Prints to the edge of the roll width You can print large exhibits and posters and also print Portrait and Landscape orienta tions made in Large Format Printing Wizard 1 Start Microsoft Po...

Page 422: ...another file or application while the Printing Wizard is open close the Printing Wizard dialog box Otherwise you may not be able to change displays or operate the toolbar ribbon 4 Click Print Matching Roll Width 5 Select Roll Paper Width that is set in the printer Windows Software Print Plug In for Office Print Matching Roll Width PowerPoint iPF8300S 3 402 ...

Page 423: ...vividly The settings are registered when the One Touch Registration is pressed This is convenient if you to need print multiple times using the same setting Press the Print Preview button to display the preview screen You can check and make changes to the layout in the preview screen When you print to the edge of the roll width the maximum length will be the lesser of 14 22 times the roll paper wi...

Page 424: ... 3 Click Print from the imagePROGRAF Print Plug In toolbar ribbon The Printing Wizard dialog box is displayed Important If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Printing Wizard is open close the Printing Wizard dialog box Otherwise you may not be able to change displays or operate the toolbar ribbon Windows Software Print Plug In for Office Borderless Printing Pow...

Page 425: ... in is selected in Choose how to proceed and press OK Note To adjust the data select Return to application and press OK Exit Print Plug In for Office and return to the application 6 Select Roll Paper Width that is set in the printer 7 Select Layout Windows Software Print Plug In for Office iPF8300S Borderless Printing PowerPoint 3 405 ...

Page 426: ...s is useful for multiple printing using the same settings Press the Print Preview button to display the preview screen You can confirm and make changes to the layout in the preview screen The maximum length for Borderless Printing is the lesser of 14 22 times the roll paper width or 18 0m 12 Press Print to start printing Multi Page Printing PowerPoint Prints multiple pages as one page You can prin...

Page 427: ...zard dialog box is displayed Important If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Printing Wizard is open close the Printing Wizard dialog box Otherwise you may not be able to change displays or operate the toolbar ribbon Windows Software Print Plug In for Office iPF8300S Multi Page Printing PowerPoint 3 407 ...

Page 428: ...inting 5 Select the Roll Paper Width that is set in the printer 6 Select layout from Layout Selection 7 Select Next 8 Select Media Type Windows Software Print Plug In for Office Multi Page Printing PowerPoint iPF8300S 3 408 ...

Page 429: ...h for Multi Page Printing is the lesser of 14 22 times the roll paper width or 18 0m 11 Press Print to start printing Register the settings PowerPoint If you are going to print multiple times using the same setting you can select One Touch Registration Registered settings can be recalled from Print Using Registered Settings 1 Set up to the Print screen from Print Matching Roll Width Borderless Pri...

Page 430: ...cel in the Print screen will not delete the registered settings Print Using Registered Settings PowerPoint Prints using the registered settings 1 Start Microsoft PowerPoint 2 If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug In is displayed click it 3 Click Print from the imagePROGRAF Print Plug In toolbar ribbon The Printing Wizard dialog box is displayed Windows Software Print Plug In for Office Print Using Regi...

Page 431: ... open close the Printing Wizard dialog box Otherwise you may not be able to change displays or operate the toolbar ribbon 4 Click Print Using Registered Settings 5 Click the Next button 6 Select Media Type Windows Software Print Plug In for Office iPF8300S Print Using Registered Settings PowerPoint 3 411 ...

Page 432: ...times the roll paper width or 18 0m 9 Press Print to start printing Portrait Orientation Landscape Orientation PowerPoint Print to the edge of the roll width You can print large exhibits and posters or print the Landscape or Portrait Orientation Page Sizes made in the Large Format Printing Wizard Create Page Size in Portrait or Landscape Orientation Use the Large Format Printing Wizard to create p...

Page 433: ...rmat Printing Wizard is open close the Large Format Printing Wizard dialog box Otherwise you may not be able to change displays or operate the toolbar ribbon 4 Click Portrait Orientation or Landscape Orientation Note The steps taken to create a Portrait Page Size will be used as an example to explain the procedure Windows Software Print Plug In for Office iPF8300S Portrait Orientation Landscape Or...

Page 434: ...collapse if you create a form using existing data If that is the case modify the data again Note Printing is done in Print Matching Roll Width of the Printing Wizard For details on Print Match ing Roll Width refer to see Print Matching Roll Width PowerPoint P 401 Windows Software Print Plug In for Office Portrait Orientation Landscape Orientation PowerPoint iPF8300S 3 414 ...

Page 435: ...oolbar ribbon is displayed 4 Click the buttons on the toolbar ribbon according to the items you want to set Icon Contents Menu Displays the About Help and Special Settings dialog boxes See Configuring Special Settings P 424 Printer list Select Printer If you select Show All Printers the imagePROGRAF printers will be displayed again Select this when you want to display all printer drivers or update...

Page 436: ... dialog box will appear asking if you want to continue printing If you click No you will return to the application If you click the Print button with a page break set a message dialog box will appear asking if you want to continue printing If you click No you will return to the application If you do not use the set page break check the page break preview and change the setting If you click the Pri...

Page 437: ...Print from the imagePROGRAF Print Plug In toolbar ribbon Important When more than one worksheet is selected the Printing Wizard cannot be run Select only one worksheet and click Print again If a print area is set a confirmation message dialog box will appear To print the entire sheet cancel the setting of the print area The Printing Wizard dialog box is displayed Windows Software Print Plug In for...

Page 438: ...The Layout menu will appear automatically Note If data analysis requires time a message dialog will appear If you select No you will return to the application 5 Select Roll Paper Width that is set in the printer Windows Software Print Plug In for Office Print Entire Sheet Excel iPF8300S 3 418 ...

Page 439: ...isplay the preview screen You can check and make changes to the layout in the preview screen When you print to the edge of the roll width the maximum print length is 18 0m 12 If the upper and lower margins are too wide check No Spaces at Top or Bottom Conserve Paper The upper and lower margins can be checked in Print Preview 13 Press Print to start printing Important If divided into plural pages t...

Page 440: ...lick Print from the imagePROGRAF Print Plug In toolbar ribbon Important When more than one worksheet is selected the Printing Wizard cannot be run Select only one worksheet and click Print again If a print area is set a confirmation message dialog box will appear To print the selected area cancel the setting of the print area The Printing Wizard dialog box is displayed Windows Software Print Plug ...

Page 441: ...ar informing you that analysis is in progress The Layout menu will appear automatically Important If the range selected in Excel 2007 2010 is too large it will not be possible to analyze the data Select a smaller range and then run the analysis Windows Software Print Plug In for Office iPF8300S Print Selected Area Excel 3 421 ...

Page 442: ...Copies Note When Print in Draft mode is selected printing is fast but the print quality is poor When Saturation is selected you can print posters etc vividly Press the Print Preview button to display the preview screen You can check and make changes to the layout in the preview screen When you print to the edge of the roll width the maximum print length is 18 0m 12 If the upper and lower margins a...

Page 443: ... Selected Area Refer to Print Entire Sheet Excel P 417 and Print Selected Area Excel P 420 for the configuration methods 2 Click the Binding Settings button Important You cannot click the Binding Settings button in the following situations When the Image Size is set to 100 When a graph is selected When page breaks have been set When a sheet or cell is protected Open the Binding Settings dialog box...

Page 444: ...e item you want to change on or off Item Details Show progress indicator during plug in startup When this setting is off hides the progress indicator that appears while the plug in is starting up Center sheets and print areas When this setting is off printing is performed without changing the po sition When this setting is on printing is performed with the top bot tom left and right margins layed ...

Page 445: ...he quality of photos etc This function is only valid in Microsoft PowerPoint Correct the print area when analyzing For data that cannot be processed with usual data analysis the print area is corrected and then the data is processed When data analysis fails you may be able to print by turning on this checkbox This function is only valid in Microsoft Excel 3 Click OK to close the Special Settings d...

Page 446: ...us and managing print jobs Two screens are available in imagePROGRAF Status Monitor Printer List shows a list of printers and Status Monitor shows details for each printer You can view a list of the printers for which printer drivers have been installed on your computer printers connected to your computer and printers found on the network Windows Software Status Monitor The Features of imagePROGRA...

Page 447: ...disk You can use the Accounting Manager to collect the print job logs for the printers and check information such as the printing costs For details of the Accounting Manager see Accounting Manager P 429 Note For details refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help Job Management Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor You can use the Job sheet in imagePROGRAF Status Monitor for operations such as pausi...

Page 448: ...loaded in the printer Use the procedure below to print the held job 1 Select the held job and click the Replace Paper button 2 Replace the paper in the printer with the correct paper Note To continue printing without changing the paper in the printer select the held job and click Continue to print button The printing behavior when the paper specified by the driver does not match the paper currentl...

Page 449: ...Log Collection This allows you to check which documents were printed from each printer who printed them and when Calculation of the Total Pages Used and the Total Cost This allows you to use the collected print job logs to calculate totals for items such as the number of pages printed the amount of paper used and the printing costs incurred Regular Data Acquisition for Print Jobs Job logs can be a...

Page 450: ...lect Accounting in the Accounting menu Or open the Accounting sheet and click the Accounting button Accounting Manager Main Window The Accounting Manager main window consists of a title bar menu bar toolbars listed job selection area job list area totals area and status bar Windows Software Accounting Launching the Accounting Manager iPF8300S 3 430 ...

Page 451: ...he View menu Listed Job Selection Area You can use this area to select which job log is displayed If you are using regular data acquisition this area allows you to view the collective job logs for each specified period For more information on how to select the job logs displayed see Switching Between Displaying Jobs on Printer and Regularly Acquired Jobs P 439 Job List Area This area lists the det...

Page 452: ...the total costs for the selected job and the amounts of paper and ink consumed Note If you are viewing regularly acquired print jobs selecting a period on the left side of the window dis plays the total costs for that period and the amounts of paper and ink consumed Windows Software Accounting Accounting Manager Main Window iPF8300S 3 432 ...

Page 453: ...the printed document Printing Results Displays OK when printing is executed and Cancel when it is not executed Media Type This is the type of paper used in printing Paper Consumed This is the area of paper used in printing Note Paper Consumed may differ from the value derived by multiplying Paper Width by Paper Length Output Image Size This is the size of the document used in printing Note When th...

Page 454: ...n settings For details of the Regular Data Acquisition settings see Automatically Acquiring Print Job Logs at Regular Inter vals P 439 4 Specify the jobs to be listed For details of how to select the job logs displayed see Switching Between Displaying Jobs on Printer and Regu larly Acquired Jobs P 439 This displays the required print job logs and lists the details Configuring Unit Costs in Account...

Page 455: ... all ink checkbox 2 Enter the Tank Capacity and corresponding Price 3 Click the OK button Important Your settings are not applied until you click the OK button To set different unit costs for each ink color 1 Select the ink color to be costed 2 Enter the Tank Capacity and corresponding Price Windows Software Accounting iPF8300S Setting the Unit Cost for Ink 3 435 ...

Page 456: ...er sheet Set the unit cost for paper in this sheet 1 Select a media type from the Media Type list 2 Enter the Width and Length of the paper and the Price per area for the configured width x height 3 Click the Add button To change the unit cost for a media type you have already set click the Overwrite button 4 Click the OK button Windows Software Accounting Setting the Unit Cost for Paper iPF8300S ...

Page 457: ...e Name field 2 Enter a value in Unit Cost 3 Use Allocated to specify whether the costs are allocated as being incurred by the print job 4 Click the Add button To change the unit cost for a media type you have already set click the Overwrite button 5 Click the OK button Important Your settings are not applied until you click the OK button Windows Software Accounting iPF8300S Setting the Unit Cost f...

Page 458: ...it Enter a text string up to 3 characters long 1000 Separator Use this option to select the symbol used as a separator in numbers The symbol is inserted every 3 digits Decimal Symbol Use this option to select the symbol used as a decimal point Ink Consumed Use this option to select the unit used for ink consumption Paper Width Use this to select the unit used for paper width Paper Length Use this ...

Page 459: ... file For details of how to export print job logs as CSV files see Exporting Print Job Data as a CSV File P 440 Canceling Regular Print Job Log Acquisition You can use this procedure to cancel the regular acquisition of print job logs from printers 1 Select Regular Data Acquisition in the Settings menu 2 Uncheck the Acquire print job logs regularly option 3 Click the OK button to close the dialog ...

Page 460: ...ote You can also select Export Job Cost Data using the icon in the toolbar Selected Jobs Exports the data for the selected print jobs in the job list as a CSV file Note You can select multiple jobs by holding down the Shift key or Ctrl key as you click the job names Listed Jobs Exports the data for the print jobs currently displayed in the list as a CSV file Showing Job Properties If you select a ...

Page 461: ...paper is saved as a file Load Unit Cost Data Selecting Load Unit Cost Data in the File menu loads saved unit cost data Showing the Total Amount of Ink and Paper Consumed Select Show Ink and Paper Consumed in the File menu to open the Show Ink and Paper Consumed dialog box This lists the total amounts of ink and paper consumed by the printer so far You can copy text based information in this dialog...

Page 462: ...Front Access In short Digital Photo Front Access can help you manage images in many ways from editing to printing as an effective way to work with other applications Digital Photo Front Access also enables image retouching For automatic retouching select an image for retouching and click Image Adjustment Because this application automates the workflow from retouching to display for all of your ima...

Page 463: ...ng the printer list Communication between your com puter and these printers is possible Note We recommend that your network or printer administrator complete the setup work using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility For details refer to the imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility help Installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility Install imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the User Software CD ROM provid...

Page 464: ...ling imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility see Installing imagePROGRAF De vice Setup Utility P 443 When specifying an IPv4 IP address 1 Start imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the start menu 2 In the Device Name list displayed select the printer to configure 3 Choose Protocol Settings from the Printer menu Windows Software Device Setup Utility Configuring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device ...

Page 465: ...irmation message is displayed 8 Exit imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility Note To configure the IP address automatically choose Auto in the Setting IP Address list and select DHCP BOOTP or RARP You can also specify the subnet mask and default gateway Windows Software Device Setup Utility iPF8300S Configuring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility 3 445 ...

Page 466: ...tart menu 2 In the Device Name list displayed select the printer to configure 3 Choose Protocol Settings from the Printer menu 4 Select the IPv6 tab 5 In IPv6 select On Windows Software Device Setup Utility Configuring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility iPF8300S 3 446 ...

Page 467: ...elect On in DHCPv6 Note When there is no IPv6 compatible router or DHCPv6 compatible server select On in Manual and enter the IPv6 Address and Prefix Length 7 Click Set 8 Click OK after the Confirmation message is displayed 9 Exit imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility Windows Software Device Setup Utility iPF8300S Configuring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility 3 447 ...

Page 468: ...el and in printer driver dialog boxes and rename them in addition to other functions You can add custom paper paper that is not Canon genuine paper or Canon feed confirmed paper to the printer con trol panel and printer driver Important Normally the Media Configuration Tool is installed and the media information is configured when you in stall the printer driver from the User Software CD ROM Use t...

Page 469: ...er Driver Installation Procedures The Media Configuration Tool installation screen appears when you start the installation of a new version of the Media Configuration Tool The installation procedure started from this screen is described below Important If the printer driver is installed from the User Software CD ROM the Media Configuration Tool is also in stalled and the media information is also ...

Page 470: ... Click the Next button 2 The next screen presents selections for the country or area where the printer is used Select a country or territory then click the Next button Windows Software Media Configuration Tool Installation Procedures iPF8300S 3 450 ...

Page 471: ...ept the terms of the license agreement and click the Next button 4 The Choose Destination Location screen appears Select the destination folder then click the Next button Windows Software Media Configuration Tool iPF8300S Installation Procedures 3 451 ...

Page 472: ...ick the Finish button This completes the installation of Media Configuration Tool Starting the Media Configuration Tool Follow the procedure below to start Media Configuration Tool From the start menu go to All Programs iPFxxxx Media Configuration Tool iPFxxxx Media Configuration Tool Windows Software Media Configuration Tool Starting the Media Configuration Tool iPF8300S 3 452 ...

Page 473: ...indow The explanation below is on the Media Configuration Tool main window Note For the step to open the Media Configuration Tool main window see Starting the Media Configuration Tool P 452 Windows Software Media Configuration Tool iPF8300S Media Configuration Tool Main Window 3 453 ...

Page 474: ...to Using Paper Other Than Genuine Paper Feed Confirmed Paper P 467 for details on Add Custom Paper Link to Support Information button Opens imagePROGRAF Support Information You can check information such as the latest information for the product and software version upgrade information Link to User Manual Button Click this button to display the User s Guide This function requires that the User s G...

Page 475: ...om the Canon website Note It may not be possible to deleting showing hiding and changing the display order under some conditions Adding Media Types Media information files amf files released by Canon are registered in the printer control panel and printer driver Important Do not perform printing on the target printer while adding the media types Reinstalling Media Configuration Tool after register...

Page 476: ...s Click the Browse button 3 The Browse for Folder dialog box opens Select the folder that contains the media information files amf files and then click the OK button Windows Software Media Configuration Tool Adding Media Types iPF8300S 3 456 ...

Page 477: ...Important If Master Media Information File is displayed as the Type of the Media Information File the me dia type display order and media type display non display settings are initialized Reconfigure these after added the master media information file 5 Click OK when the confirmation message is displayed 6 In the Edit Media Types dialog box click the Update button Windows Software Media Configurat...

Page 478: ...ng Media Types P 465 Important Be sure to click the Update button If you do not your changes will not be applied to the printer and printer driver Changing Media Names 1 Open the Edit Media Types dialog box 2 In the Media Type list select the name to change Click the Rename button Windows Software Media Configuration Tool Changing Media Names iPF8300S 3 458 ...

Page 479: ...s dialog box click the Update button The Update Media Types wizard is started at this point For details on the procedure to update paper information using the Update Media Types wizard see Updating Media Types P 465 Important Be sure to click the Update button If you do not your changes will not be applied to the printer and printer driver Windows Software Media Configuration Tool iPF8300S Changin...

Page 480: ... dialog box 2 In the Media Type list select the name of the media to delete Click the Delete button Note Only paper for which Status in the Media Type is Add can be deleted Windows Software Media Configuration Tool Deleting Media Types You Have Added iPF8300S 3 460 ...

Page 481: ...on using the Update Media Types wizard see Updating Media Types P 465 Important Be sure to click the Update button If you do not your changes will not be applied to the printer and printer driver Switching Media Types Display Show Hide 1 Open the Edit Media Types dialog box Windows Software Media Configuration Tool iPF8300S Switching Media Types Display Show Hide 3 461 ...

Page 482: ...appear grayed out in the Media Type list Each time you click the Show Hide button the display mode cycles from showing both the printer driver and printer panel to hiding both the printer driver and printer panel and then to showing only the printer panel 3 In the Edit Media Types dialog box click the Update button Windows Software Media Configuration Tool Switching Media Types Display Show Hide i...

Page 483: ...wizard see Updating Media Types P 465 Important Be sure to click the Update button If you do not your changes will not be applied to the printer and printer driver Changing the Display Order of Media Types 1 Open the Edit Media Types dialog box Windows Software Media Configuration Tool iPF8300S Changing the Display Order of Media Types 3 463 ...

Page 484: ...ox click the Update button The Update Media Types wizard is started at this point For details on the procedure to update paper information using the Update Media Types wizard see Updating Media Types P 465 Important Be sure to click the Update button If you do not your changes will not be applied to the printer and printer driver Windows Software Media Configuration Tool Changing the Display Order...

Page 485: ...media type information perform the same update on all of the PCs that are using that printer 1 Confirm the printer where media type information is to be updated to be displayed in Printer in the Update Media Types Select Printer dialog box and then click the Next button Note If the printer driver is not installed the following dialog box is displayed Select how the printer to update is connected 2...

Page 486: ...date Media Types Confirm Update Confirm the information received from the printer To update click the Execute button Important When setting a data to the printer that differs from the data to be updated the selected media informa tion file is updated When you would like to remain the data that is set to the printer click the Cancel button 4 Communication with the printer starts and the following d...

Page 487: ...t you want to update in Step 1 and update the media information by following the Update Media Types wizard Using Paper Other Than Genuine Paper Feed Confirmed Paper When the Add Custom Paper button is clicked in the Media Configuration Tool main window the Add Custom Paper dialog box is displayed Adding custom paper to the printer control panel and printer driver is performed from this screen Note...

Page 488: ...on genuine paper and feed confirmed paper cannot be changed from this dialog box Refer to Editing Media Type Information P 454 Changing the display order of media types displayed in the printer control panel and printer driver is per formed from the Edit Media Types dialog box regardless of whether it is Canon genuine paper or custom paper Refer to Editing Media Type Information P 454 Compatible P...

Page 489: ...ies of customer paper paper that is not Canon genuine paper or Canon feed confirmed paper Add Custom Paper In order to add new custom paper to the printer control panel and printer driver first select the media type to use as the basis from among the Canon genuine paper and feed confirmed paper Add this as custom paper after making various changes to the standard paper as necessary Important Do no...

Page 490: ...ick the Next button 3 The Step 1 Select the standard paper dialog box is displayed In Paper Category select the category of media type to use as the basis of the custom paper you are adding Important Select the category that you think is the closest to the custom paper you are adding Windows Software Media Configuration Tool Add Custom Paper iPF8300S 3 470 ...

Page 491: ...y Alternatively select the media type called General from among the displayed Media Type Name Depending on the selected category there might not be a media type called General Depending on the selected category the Assist button may be disabled 5 The Step 2 Set the custom paper name dialog box is displayed Enter an arbitrary name to display in the printer control panel and printer driver and then ...

Page 492: ...plete click the Next button Important Check that there is no paper left on the ejection guide If Paper Feed Adjustment is not executed horizontal stripes with different color tones may appear in the printed material Paper feed adjustment does not need to be executed more than once Execute paper feed adjustment only once each time you add a custom paper 9 The Roll Paper Settings dialog box is displ...

Page 493: ...such as to wait for the ink to dry User Cut Cutting is not performed by the cutter unit Cut the roll paper using scissors after each sheet Select this for paper that cannot be cut by the cutter unit Drying Time Specify the time that the printer waits for ink to dry as needed Off Ejects immediately after printing finishes 30 sec 1 min 3 min 5 min 10 min 30 min 60 min Ejects after the specified time...

Page 494: ...cut well by the cutter set the Automatic Cutting Settings to User Cut and cut the roll paper using scissors etc Paper where borderless printing can be performed is limited by the media type and roll paper width Refer to Compatible Paper P 468 For custom paper where there is a need to set the Automatic Cutting Settings to User Cut set the Borderless Printing to Deny 10 The Step 5 Configure the amou...

Page 495: ...12 Determine and set the ink level that is thought to give the best visual test print results with no bleeding or scraping of ink Note Select the optimal ink level by referring to the help If you cannot obtain sufficiently high quality printing no matter which maximum ink usage level you select use the Step 1 Select the standard paper dialog box to change the paper that is the basis of the custom ...

Page 496: ...ter driver may become unselectable 13 Configure Head Height and Vacuum Strength as required and click the Next button Usually these do not need to be set Important If you set the Head Height lower than the automatically set height in parentheses check that the printhead does not rub against the paper If the printhead rubs against the paper there will be scratches in the printing results If the pri...

Page 497: ...irm the updates and then click the Execute button The custom paper is added to the control panel of the printer and to the printer driver of the PC you are using Important If you have added custom paper with the POP Board Cardboard category as the Standard Paper remove the loaded custom paper from the printer Windows Software Media Configuration Tool iPF8300S Add Custom Paper 3 477 ...

Page 498: ... Configuration Tool window Delete Custom Paper You can delete custom paper that you have already added from printer control panel and from the printer driver of the PC you are using 1 Open the Add Custom Paper dialog box 2 Select the paper you want to delete from the Added Custom Paper list and then click the Delete button Windows Software Media Configuration Tool Delete Custom Paper iPF8300S 3 47...

Page 499: ...then click the Execute button The custom paper is deleted from the control panel of the printer and from the printer driver of the PC you are using Edit Custom Paper You can change the settings of custom paper you have already added 1 Open the Add Custom Paper dialog box Windows Software Media Configuration Tool iPF8300S Edit Custom Paper 3 479 ...

Page 500: ...69 for details on how to configure each setting Export Custom Media Information You can export to file and save media information about custom paper that you have added The saved Custom Media Information File can be used by importing it into another printer or PC Refer to Import Custom Media Information P 481 for details on importing custom media information 1 Open the Add Custom Paper dialog box ...

Page 501: ... File A Custom Media Information File am1 file is saved Import Custom Media Information You can import a Custom Media Information File that has been saved in a folder and add the file to the printer control panel and to the printer driver of the PC you are using 1 Open the Add Custom Paper dialog box Windows Software Media Configuration Tool iPF8300S Import Custom Media Information 3 481 ...

Page 502: ...the printer to add the custom paper to Note Double click Custom Media Information File to start the Media Configuration Tool and display this screen Windows Software Media Configuration Tool Import Custom Media Information iPF8300S 3 482 ...

Page 503: ...the printer and to the printer driver of the PC you are using Note When the custom paper is correctly added to the printer driver the name of the added custom paper is displayed in the Edit Media Types dialog box that is opened by Add Genuine Paper in the Media Configuration Tool window Windows Software Media Configuration Tool iPF8300S Import Custom Media Information 3 483 ...

Page 504: ...bs even after changing the Vacuum Strength set the Head Height to be higher in the Step 5 Configure the amount of ink used dialog box Refer to Paper rubs against the Printhead for details on how to handle the printhead rubbing against the paper See Paper rubs against the printhead P 1072 About Borderless Printing When performing borderless printing on paper where the ink does not dry well the cutt...

Page 505: ... used as the basis for the custom paper in the Step 1 Select the standard paper dialog box If there is no luster in printed material set the paper used as the basis for the custom paper to a paper that uses photo ink as the Black ink The types of Black ink used are displayed on the right side of each media type in the Step 1 Select the standard paper dialog box Note Refer to Problems with the prin...

Page 506: ...inter Driver 487 Preview 519 Free Layout 550 Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy 584 Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional 609 Printmonitor 674 Media Configuration Tool 677 Mac OS X Software iPF8300S 4 486 ...

Page 507: ...cation 503 Matching pane 503 Ambient Light Adjust dialog box 506 Light Source Check Tool 508 Color Settings Pane Color 509 Object Adjustment dialog box Color 510 Color Settings Pane Monochrome 511 Object Adjustment dialog box Monochrome 512 Gray Adjustment Pane 513 Page Setup Pane 514 Utility Pane 516 Additional Settings Pane 517 Support Pane 518 Printer Driver Settings For instructions on accessi...

Page 508: ...s Pane Color P 509 Object Adjustment dialog box Color P 510 Matching pane P 503 Ambient Light Adjust dialog box P 506 Light Source Check Tool P 508 Color Settings Pane Monochrome P 511 Object Adjustment dialog box Monochrome P 512 Gray Adjustment Pane P 513 Page Setup Pane P 514 You can specify the page size of the original borderless printing enlargement or reduction the orientation the paper siz...

Page 509: ... print scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER For details see Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy P 584 Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver If you have replaced the paper you must complete the following settings in the printer driver 1 This sets the BFormat for and CPaper Size Note The configuration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using If Page Setup is dis...

Page 510: ...es dialog box click FOK to close the dialog box and then select Print from the application software menu 5 Access the Main pane 6 In the AMedia Type list select the type of paper that is loaded 7 Access the Page Setup pane Mac OS X Software Printer Driver Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver iPF8300S 4 490 ...

Page 511: ...d roll is displayed in BRoll Width Note If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in BRoll Width click LPrinter Informa tion on the Main pane to update the printer information Note A variety of settings are available in the printer driver to suit different printing applications For details on available printing conditions see Printer Driver Settings P 487 Mac OS X Software Printe...

Page 512: ... settings information Under this the page size paper size and method and percentage of enlargement or reduction is displayed Pane displayed when the ISize tab is clicked Paper size details are indicated numerically Pane with printer and paper illus trations Illustrations indicate the paper source orientation borderless printing selection and other settings information Note To confirm the Print Tar...

Page 513: ...the layout before printing using the Canon imagePROGRAF Preview function 1 Choose Print in the application menu 2 Access the Main pane 3 Select the OPrint Preview check box 4 Click MPrint Mac OS X Software Printer Driver iPF8300S Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing 4 493 ...

Page 514: ...e printing dialog box click Save As in the Presets list to save the current print settings This is a stand ard feature of the operating system For details refer to the Mac OS documentation Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications 1 In the application software select Print from the File menu to display the dialog box for printing conditions Note This dialog box includes basic print...

Page 515: ...g enlarged and reduced printing borderless printing and so on Main Pane The following settings are available on the Main pane For details on settings items refer to the printer driver help Note On the Main pane choose Easy Settings to specify basic print settings based on the print target or switch to Advanced Settings to complete more detailed settings as desired Mac OS X Software Printer Driver ...

Page 516: ...gs You can configure the printing settings to match the type of media such as the ink drying time Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box P 500 OPrint Preview If you turn this on imagePROGRAF Preview starts before printing This allows you to check on screen previews of documents before printing Important When Free Layout is selected on the Page Setup panel Free Layout is disabled Checking the Layout in...

Page 517: ...rawings and Text P 47 FPrint Quality Choose the level of print quality GView set Click to display the View settings dialog box which enables you to confirm the settings for the selected item from the EPrint Target list or change the order of items listed in EPrint Target View settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application P 503 Mac OS X Software Printer Driver iPF8300S Main Pane 4 497 ...

Page 518: ...ever you will attain print results with the highest quali ty Note If you set FPrint Quality to High you can select NHighest quality However depending on AMe dia Type you may not be able to select NHighest quality KEconomy Printing When this mode is selected you can print with less ink consumed However print quality is lower than in regular printing Select this option to save ink such as when print...

Page 519: ...nts and Colors for Printing P 64 ISet Click to display the Color Settings dialog box for more advanced color settings Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver P 55 JUnidirectional Printing Select this checkbox to prevent problems such as misaligned lines and improve the print quality However the printing speed becomes slower QThicken Fine Lines Activate this option to print fine lines more distin...

Page 520: ...e Main panel etc You can display this dialog box by clicking Set of Media Type on the Main panel Refer to Main Pane P 495 You also can select from the control panel of the printer the items for which you can select Printer Default in this dialog box Refer to Menu Settings P 938 AMedia Type The paper selected with Media Type of the Main panel is displayed For information on the types of paper the p...

Page 521: ...ding to the occurrence condition of bleeding or unevenness ERoll Paper Margin for Safety You can specify the length of a margin on the leading edge of paper to ensure that paper susceptible to curling is held firmly against the Platen FNear End Margin Specify the length of the Near End Margin the leading edge margin of the roll as needed Setting Item Details Printer Default The setting of the cont...

Page 522: ...performed on the printer to image processing Setting Item Details Printer Default The setting of the control panel of the printer is applied Enabled Print using the calibration results Disabled Print without using the calibration results Select this to avoid the changing of the color of images during printing by color calibration JMirror Specify whether to print a mirror image as needed Select thi...

Page 523: ...d an icon CDetails Here you can confirm detailed settings values for each item selected in the Print Target list Matching pane On the Matching pane you can specify color matching to compensate for differences in the appearance of colors on various devices Important If No color correction is selected under Color Mode the Matching pane is not displayed Note To display the Matching pane on the Main p...

Page 524: ...od options are available depending on your selection in AMatching Mode CColor Space Select the applicable color space as desired DMonitor White Point Enter the color temperature set on the monitor Displayed when the BMatching Method is set to Monitor Matching EUse ambient light adjustment Select this option for adjustment of colors to suit the ambient light in the viewing environment FAmbient Ligh...

Page 525: ...he color matching mode to use as desired BInput Profile Settings You can choose Input Profile Various options are available depending on your selected AMatching Mode CMatching Method You can choose CMatching Method Various options are available depending on your selected AMatching Mode DPrinter Profile Settings Specify the printer profile as desired Note For details on settings items see Adjusting...

Page 526: ...tart the Light Source Check Tool for printing Chart Light Source Check Tool P 508 CChart Number In Chart select the number of the pattern with your desired colors DColor Temperature Enter the DColor Temperature measured during monitor calibration Displayed when the BMatching Method is set to Monitor Matching on the Matching pane EIlluminance Enter the EIlluminance measured during monitor calibrati...

Page 527: ... using the i1 colorimeter DColor Temperature Enter the DColor Temperature measured using the i1 colorimeter EIlluminance Enter the EIlluminance measured using the i1 colorimeter Displayed when the BMatching Method is set to Monitor Matching on the Matching pane Note For details on settings items see Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver P 55 Mac OS X Software Printer Driver iPF8300S Ambient Li...

Page 528: ...or details on paper types supported by Driver Matching Mode refer to the Paper Reference Guide See Paper Reference Guide CPaper Source Choose the paper source as desired Options displayed in the list vary depending on the selection in BMedia Type in the Main pane DPrint Click to print the Chart Mac OS X Software Printer Driver Light Source Check Tool iPF8300S 4 508 ...

Page 529: ...andard Portrait Landscape or Graphics BView Color Pattern Select this checkbox to display the color pattern CApply to Sample Select this checkbox to apply the changed settings to the sample image DCyan EMagenta FYellow Correct color tones by adjusting the levels of each color GGray Tone Adjust the color tone of grays as desired Choose Cool tinged with blue or Warm tinged with red HBrightness Adjus...

Page 530: ...bjects subject to color ad justment Object Adjustment dialog box Color P 510 Object Adjustment dialog box Color In the Object Adjustment dialog box you can specify what type of print jobs to apply color adjustment to If an original comprises images graphics and text you can specify which portion to apply color adjustment to Note To display the Object Adjustment dialog box click Object Adjustment o...

Page 531: ...apply the changed settings to the sample image DCyan EMagenta FYellow Not available GGray Tone Not available HBrightness Adjust the overall image brightness as desired You can adjust the brightness if the printed document is lighter or dark er than the original image that is the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic as it appears on the com puter screen IContrast Adjust the contr...

Page 532: ...cify what type of print jobs to apply color adjustment to If an original comprises images graphics and text you can specify which portion to apply color adjustment to Note To display the Object Adjustment dialog box click Object Adjustment on the Color Adjustment panel AImages Select this option to apply color adjustment to image areas such as photos BGraphics Select this option to apply color adj...

Page 533: ...Balance Click the list to select a color balance that suits the printing application DX EY Adjust the color balance as you check the color tone in the adjustment area You can adjust the square area in the center by clicking or dragging it Drag the vertical or horizontal scroll bars for adjustment as desired You can click the arrows by the DX horizontal and EY vertical boxes or enter the values dir...

Page 534: ...displayed in the list vary depending on the selection in AMedia Type in the Main pane BRoll Width Displays the paper width of the roll loaded in the printer Unknown is displayed if the printer cannot detect the roll paper width CPage Size Displays the size of the original as specified in the page settings of the application For details on page sizes available in the application see Paper Sizes P 7...

Page 535: ...see Paper Sizes P 775 JPrint Centered Select this checkbox to print document images in the center of the paper Printing Originals Centered on Rolls P 160 Printing Originals Centered on Sheets P 166 KNo Spaces at Top or Bottom Select this checkbox to print the next image skipping blank areas above and below printable data in documents which enables you to conserve the paper Conserving Roll Paper by...

Page 536: ... ink ejecting outlet cleaning Head alignment adjustment Feed amount adjustment BView Click to start imagePROGRAF Printmonitor which enables you to view the status of print jobs CSet Click to complete the settings for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy iR enlargement copy For details see Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy P 584 Mac OS X Software Printer Driver Utility Pane iPF8300S 4 516 ...

Page 537: ...ings pane DSend job to You can configure the method for saving print jobs to the printer hard disk EPrint FSave in mail box GPrint after reception is complete Jobs are printed after they are saved on the hard disk Mac OS X Software Printer Driver iPF8300S Additional Settings Pane 4 517 ...

Page 538: ...nter driver updates and browse other information BUser Manual Click to view the printer user s manual This function requires the user s manual to be installed on your computer CSettings The settings can be saved as a file Click to display the Export dialog box which enables you to specify where to save the file DAbout You can display version information for the printer driver Mac OS X Software Pri...

Page 539: ...h All 547 Display with Actual Size 548 Moving a Page 548 The Features of Preview The main features of Preview are as follows While viewing this screen you can adjust layout settings of a document created with application software You can not only adjust layout settings but also your changes will be instantly applied on the preview screen and you can print the preview screen as it is seen Note The ...

Page 540: ...le menu select the printer setup menu to open the Print dialog box Note Normally select Print from the File menu 3 Click Print Preview in the Main panel to attach a checkmark 4 Click the Print button in the Print dialog box Note Your printer is depicted in the lower left area of this screen Mac OS X Software Preview Starting Preview iPF8300S 4 520 ...

Page 541: ...eview Main Window The Preview main window consists of the menu and tool bars and preview dialog drawer and status area Note You can use the View menu to show or hide the tool bar Mac OS X Software Preview iPF8300S Preview Main Window 4 521 ...

Page 542: ...ect menus required for operations Tool Bar This allows you to select tool buttons required for major operations Preview Area You can check the settings you made in this area Mac OS X Software Preview Preview Main Window iPF8300S 4 522 ...

Page 543: ... perform a print job Drawer Area This allows you to display the thumbnails of a document This area appears when you click Drawer from the tool bar Alternatively you may select Drawer from the View menu Mac OS X Software Preview iPF8300S Preview Main Window 4 523 ...

Page 544: ... type that is actually set in the printer When the media you chose is different from the media set in the printer you may not receive the desired print results Easy Settings Advanced Settings Two modes are available to provide the optimum print settings for jobs The settings available on each mode are as follows Easy Settings P 526 Advanced Settings P 528 Mac OS X Software Preview Paper Settings P...

Page 545: ...ilable only if rolls are selected in Paper Source Copies You can input the number of print copies in numerical characters Note The maximum value is 999 You can change the numbers by clicking either button or button Restore Defaults Button Click the button to reset to the setting when starting Preview Print Button Click the button to begin printing Update Printer Info Button Click the button to acq...

Page 546: ...al camera Photo Monochrome Suitable for optimized printing of monochrome photos Poster The best setting for posters Prints using vivid and high impact colors Faithful Color Reproduction Prints by faithfully reproducing the colors of the original image Photo Adobe RGB Achieves the best color when printing an image created with the Adobe RGB color space feature CAD Color Line Drawing Prints the fine...

Page 547: ...ttings are displayed in the following combinations Setting Details Print Quality Highest quality High Standard Fast Resolution 600dpi 300dpi Note The availability of settings is determined by the media type and print priority selections Printing time is longer and more ink is consumed with High than with Fast however print quality is higher Printing time is shorter and less ink is consumed with Fa...

Page 548: ...heet or other documents that contain large amounts of text However you may not achieve the quality you expect with printing photographs or other images with many filled areas For these types of jobs select Image Proof This is a setting for enhancing the reproducibility of characters illustrations and photos with print proofing However this takes more time than regular printing Office Document Prin...

Page 549: ...t priority selections Printing time is longer and more ink is consumed with High than with Fast however print quality is higher Printing time is shorter and less ink is consumed with Fast than with High however print quality is lower For Highest quality the resolution is not displayed Output Settings Panel This panel appears when you select Output Settings in the dialog area Enlarged Reduced Print...

Page 550: ... margins on all sides when the roll paper with the specific width and the specific media type is used For more information about Borderless Printing see Print with No Borders P 543 Note Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source This is not displayed when a checkmark is placed in Print Centered Paper Size You can select the size of the print media Note This is not displayed when Fit Roll...

Page 551: ...ll paper the page is rotated automatically and when it can not fit in the width of roll paper the page is not rotated Rotate 180 degrees Allows you to rotate the image 180 degrees from the vertical to the right Restore Defaults Button Click the button to reset to the setting when starting Preview Print Button Click the button to begin printing Update Printer Info Button Click the button to acquire...

Page 552: ... can set the color adjustment and matching Color Adjustment P 532 Gray Adjustment P 535 Matching P 536 Note You can select Gray Adjustment only after Monochrome Photo has been selected in Color Mode Matching is not displayed if No color correction has been selected in Color Mode Restore Defaults Button Click the button to reset to the setting when starting Preview Print Button Click the button to ...

Page 553: ...oto before scanning and graphics created on the display or when you want to print in different degrees of brightness use this feature Contrast Adjusts the relative brightness between the brightest and darkest portions of the im age For soft gradation decrease the contrast For hard gradation increase the contrast Saturation Adjusts the hues for vivid color or dark color Gray Adjustment Adjusts gray...

Page 554: ...en the results of the printout are brighter than the original images such as the original photo before scanning and graphics created on the display or when you want to print in different degrees of brightness use this feature Contrast Adjusts the relative brightness between the brightest and darkest portions of the im age For soft gradation decrease the contrast For hard gradation increase the con...

Page 555: ...stment 3 Click the Color Balance list and select the color settings Setting Details Cool Black Adjusts cool black blue tones to gray Pure Neutral Black Adjusts to neutral gray Warm Black Adjusts warm black red tones to gray Note To perform the adjustments drag the X or Y slide bar left and right You can also click the up or down arrow or enter the number directly to increase or decrease the value ...

Page 556: ...ween the brightest and darkest portions of the im age For soft gradation decrease the contrast For hard gradation increase the contrast Highlight Adjusts the brightness of the brightest areas Shadow Adjusts the brightness of the darkest areas Note You can also click the up or down arrow or enter the number directly to increase or decrease the value The availability of settings depends on the selec...

Page 557: ...u to use ICC profiles for digital cameras and scanners ICC profiles created using the profile creation tool etc ColorSync P 541 Enables color matching by using the ColorSync function of Mac OS Select this if you want to perform soft proofing using ColorSync before printing Note You need to set each correction on the printer driver Using Mac OS X 10 5 or later ColorSync needs to be selected in the ...

Page 558: ...ter profile Note Using Mac OS X 10 4 You can select only after ICC Matching Mode or ColorSync has been selected in Matching Mode Using Mac OS X 10 5 or later You can select only after ICC Matching Mode has been selected in Matching Mode Soft Proof When you place a checkmark here ColorSync applies to the preview area Note You can select only after ColorSync has been selected in Matching Mode Mac OS...

Page 559: ...ware Saturation Color matching optimized for printing posters etc vividly Colorimetric Color matching optimized for printing image data with accurate colors in input color space This is the easiest to use mode when you want to adjust the color and print However gradation may be lost for colors of wider range than the color reproduction range of the printer Generally this is also called relative co...

Page 560: ...imized for printing posters etc vividly Colorimetric Color matching optimized for printing image data with accurate colors in input color space This is the easiest to use mode when you want to adjust the color and print However gradation may be lost for colors of wider range than the color reproduction range of the printer Generally this is also called relative colorimetric Colorimetric No White P...

Page 561: ...ync 1 Check that ColorSync is selected in Matching Mode 2 To apply ColorSync to previews check the Soft Proof check box Preferences Dialog Box This dialog box appears when you select Preferences from the imagePROGRAF Advanced Preview menu You can set the preferences for Preview Mac OS X Software Preview iPF8300S ColorSync 4 541 ...

Page 562: ...ay Note You can input between 10 and 400 You can change the numbers by clicking button Go to Page Dialog Box This dialog box appears when you select Go to Page from the View menu Note You can not select Go to Page if the document is only one page Page Input the page number in numerical characters to display in the preview area Note You can change the numbers in the range of the page of the documen...

Page 563: ... Paper Settings Panel P 524 select Roll Paper in Paper Source 2 On the Output Settings panel click the Enlarged Reduced Printing check box on 3 Select Fit Roll Paper Width 4 Click the Borderless Printing check box on 5 Click the Print button Borderless printing begins Print on the Center You can print on the center of the media loaded in the printer Note This is not displayed when a checkmark is p...

Page 564: ... Bottom You can save paper on not to feed roll paper for the empty spaces when the print data contains spaces at the top or bottom Note This is not displayed when a checkmark is placed in Borderless Printing 1 On the Paper Settings Panel P 524 select Roll Paper in Paper Source Mac OS X Software Preview Not Print Spaces at the Top Bottom iPF8300S 4 544 ...

Page 565: ...o spaces at top or bottom begins Print Page Rotated 90 Degrees You can save paper by printing in landscape orientation on roll paper 1 On the Paper Settings Panel P 524 select Roll Paper in Paper Source 2 On the Output Settings panel click the Rotate Page check box on Mac OS X Software Preview iPF8300S Print Page Rotated 90 Degrees 4 545 ...

Page 566: ... Printing on rotating 90 degrees begins Display with Fitting to the Width of the Paper In the preview area you can display to the width of the paper 1 Select Fit Roll Paper Width from the tool bar Mac OS X Software Preview Display with Fitting to the Width of the Paper iPF8300S 4 546 ...

Page 567: ...o the width of the paper it is displayed Display with All In the preview area you can display all 1 Select Fit Screen from the tool bar 2 All is displayed Mac OS X Software Preview iPF8300S Display with All 4 547 ...

Page 568: ...bar 2 Actual size is displayed Moving a Page You can move a page to display in the preview area 1 Select each button in Go to Page on the tool bar Setting Details Go to the first page Go to the previous page Go to the next page Go to the last page Mac OS X Software Preview Display with Actual Size iPF8300S 4 548 ...

Page 569: ...2 The target page appears Note You can also move a page by clicking the page on the thumbnails Mac OS X Software Preview iPF8300S Moving a Page 4 549 ...

Page 570: ...utomatically 579 Aligning Objects 579 Changing the Object Overlapping Order 581 Pasting a Copied or Cut Object 583 The Features of Free Layout The main features of Free Layout are as follows Allows you to lay out at will and print a document created with application software You can not only lay out multiple pages on one page but also lay out and print a multiple file document on one page or lay o...

Page 571: ...ftware s File menu select the printer setup menu to open the Print dialog box Note Normally select Print from the File menu 3 Click on Free Layout in the Page Setup panel to attach a checkmark 4 Click the Print button in the Print dialog box Note Your printer is depicted in the lower left area of this screen Mac OS X Software Free Layout iPF8300S Starting Free Layout 4 551 ...

Page 572: ...Free Layout Main Window The Free Layout main window consists of the menu and tool bars layout area and dialog areas Note You can use the View menu to show or hide the tool Mac OS X Software Free Layout Free Layout Main Window iPF8300S 4 552 ...

Page 573: ...d for operations Tool Bar This allows you to select tool buttons required for major operations Layout Area This allows you to lay out objects and edit the object size and orientation Mac OS X Software Free Layout iPF8300S Free Layout Main Window 4 553 ...

Page 574: ... Dialog Area This allows you to set the print conditions and perform a print job Mac OS X Software Free Layout Free Layout Main Window iPF8300S 4 554 ...

Page 575: ...eceive the desired print results Easy Settings Advanced Settings Two modes are available to provide the optimum print settings for jobs The settings available on each mode are as follows Easy Settings P 557 Advanced Settings P 559 Paper Source You can select the paper source The following settings are available for paper source Setting Details Cut Sheet Select to print on the cut sheet Roll Paper ...

Page 576: ...merical characters Note The maximum value is 999 You can change the numbers by clicking either button or button Restore Defaults Button Click the button to reset to the setting when starting Free Layout Print Button Click the button to begin printing Update Printer Info Button Click the button to acquire printer information Mac OS X Software Free Layout Paper Settings Panel iPF8300S 4 556 ...

Page 577: ... camera Photo Monochrome Suitable for optimized printing of monochrome photos Poster The best setting for posters Prints using vivid and high impact colors Faithful Color Reproduction Prints by faithfully reproducing the colors of the original image Photo Adobe RGB Achieves the best color when printing an image created with the Adobe RGB color space feature CAD Color Line Drawing Prints the fine l...

Page 578: ...ings are displayed in the following combinations Setting Details Print Quality Highest quality High Standard Fast Resolution 600dpi 300dpi Note The availability of settings is determined by the media type and print priority selections Printing time is longer and more ink is consumed with High than with Fast however print quality is higher Printing time is shorter and less ink is consumed with Fast...

Page 579: ...sheet or other documents that contain large amounts of text However you may not achieve the quality you expect with printing photographs or other images with many filled areas For these types of jobs select Image Proof This is a setting for enhancing the reproducibility of characters illustrations and photos with print proofing However this takes more time than regular printing Office Document Pri...

Page 580: ...is determined by the media type and print priority selections Printing time is longer and more ink is consumed with High than with Fast however print quality is higher Printing time is shorter and less ink is consumed with Fast than with High however print quality is lower For Highest quality the resolution is not displayed Color Settings Panel This panel appears when you select Color Settings in ...

Page 581: ... set the color adjustment and matching Color Adjustment P 561 Gray Adjustment P 564 Matching P 565 Note You can select Gray Adjustment only after Monochrome Photo has been selected in Color Mode Matching is not displayed if No color correction has been selected in Color Mode Restore Defaults Button Click the button to reset to the setting when starting Free Layout Print Button Click the button to ...

Page 582: ...hoto before scanning and graphics created on the display or when you want to print in different degrees of brightness use this feature Contrast Adjusts the relative brightness between the brightest and darkest portions of the im age For soft gradation decrease the contrast For hard gradation increase the contrast Saturation Adjusts the hues for vivid color or dark color Gray Tone Adjusts gray from...

Page 583: ... the results of the printout are brighter than the original images such as the original photo before scanning and graphics created on the display or when you want to print in different degrees of brightness use this feature Contrast Adjusts the relative brightness between the brightest and darkest portions of the im age For soft gradation decrease the contrast For hard gradation increase the contr...

Page 584: ...ment 3 Click the Color Balance list and select the color settings Setting Details Cool Black Adjusts cool black blue tones to gray Pure Neutral Black Adjusts to neutral gray Warm Black Adjusts warm black red tones to gray Note To perform the adjustments drag the X or Y slide bar left and right You can also click the up or down arrow or enter the number directly to increase or decrease the value by...

Page 585: ...en the brightest and darkest portions of the im age For soft gradation decrease the contrast For hard gradation increase the contrast Highlight Adjusts the brightness of the brightest areas Shadow Adjusts the brightness of the darkest areas Note You can also click the up or down arrow or enter the number directly to increase or decrease the value The availability of settings depends on the selecte...

Page 586: ...to use ICC profiles for digital cameras and scanners ICC profiles created using the profile creation tool etc ColorSync P 570 Enables color matching by using the ColorSync function of Mac OS Select this if you want to perform soft proofing using ColorSync before printing Note You need to set each correction on the printer driver Using Mac OS X 10 5 or later ColorSync needs to be selected in the Co...

Page 587: ...r profile Note Using Mac OS X 10 4 You can select only after ICC Matching Mode or ColorSync has been selected in Matching Mode Using Mac OS X 10 5 or later You can select only after ICC Matching Mode has been selected in Matching Mode Soft Proof When you place a checkmark here ColorSync applies to the layout area Note You can select only after ColorSync has been selected in Matching Mode Mac OS X ...

Page 588: ...re Saturation Color matching optimized for printing posters etc vividly Colorimetric Color matching optimized for printing image data with accurate colors in input color space This is the easiest to use mode when you want to adjust the color and print However gradation may be lost for colors of wider range than the color reproduction range of the printer Generally this is also called relative colo...

Page 589: ...ized for printing posters etc vividly Colorimetric Color matching optimized for printing image data with accurate colors in input color space This is the easiest to use mode when you want to adjust the color and print However gradation may be lost for colors of wider range than the color reproduction range of the printer Generally this is also called relative colorimetric Colorimetric No White Poi...

Page 590: ... 4 Click the Printer Profile list and select a printer profile ColorSync 1 Check that ColorSync is selected in Matching Mode 2 Place a checkmark on Soft Proof to simulate the output product in Layout Area Mac OS X Software Free Layout ColorSync iPF8300S 4 570 ...

Page 591: ... 0 and 200 0 mm between 0 39 and 7 87 inch You can change the numbers by clicking either button or button Divisions You can change the number of divisions of grid lines so that they serve as a guide to laying out objects Note You can input between 1 and 10 You can change the numbers by clicking either button or button Grid Color Select the grid line color Print Object Frames You can print the obje...

Page 592: ...m between 0 00 and 3 94 inch You can change the numbers by clicking either button or button Page Setup Dialog Box This dialog box appears when you select Page Setup from the File menu This dialog box provides selections for setting the media size orientation and other important features Paper Orientation This selects the paper orientation The following settings are available for orientation Settin...

Page 593: ... Left to Bottom The objects are laid out from upper left to bottom Note When you have selected Roll Paper Length Auto Settings and Paper Orientation Vertical you can choose only Upper Left to Right When you have selected Roll Paper Length Auto Settings and Paper Orientation Horizontal you can choose only Upper Left to Bottom Paper Size You can select the size of the print media Note You cannot dis...

Page 594: ...ates the object 90 degrees clockwise Rotate Left Rotates the object 90 degrees counterclockwise Note When several objects are selected you cannot select Rotate Scaling You can input the value for enlargement or reduction of the obeject in numerical characters Note You can input between 25 and 400 You can change the numbers by clicking either button or button Object Size You can confirm the object ...

Page 595: ...nd repeat the above steps Laying out a Document Created with Multiple Application Programs on One Page You can lay out and print a document created with multiple application programs on one page 1 From the application software s File menu select the printer setup menu to open the Print dialog box Note Normally select Print from the File menu 2 Click on Free Layout in the Page Setup panel to attach...

Page 596: ...ary objects click them while holding down the command key To select all objects select Select All from the Edit menu Changing the Object Size You can change the object size by means of mouse operation or by specifying a scaling value Note The vertical to horizontal ratio remains unchanged when the object is enlarged or reduced Resizing by means of mouse operation 1 Select an object Mac OS X Softwa...

Page 597: ...bject 2 Open the Format Dialog Box P 574 3 Use Scaling to set the magnification for enlargement or reduction You either enter numbers directly Note You can input between 25 and 400 You can change the numbers by clicking either button or button 4 Click the OK button Moving an Object You can move the object position 1 Select an object Mac OS X Software Free Layout iPF8300S Moving an Object 4 577 ...

Page 598: ...e object 1 Select an object 2 Select Rotate Left or Rotate Right from the toolbar Alternatively you may click on the Rotate check box in the Format Dialog Box P 574 then select Rotate Right or Rotate Left and click the OK button Note When several objects are selected you cannot select Rotate Mac OS X Software Free Layout Rotating an Object iPF8300S 4 578 ...

Page 599: ...t menu Note The object layout order varies depending on the Order setting on the Page Setup Dialog Box P 572 Aligning Objects You can align objects systematically 1 Select multiple objects 2 Select the align menu from the Object menu Align Top Lays out the objects justifying them to the top Mac OS X Software Free Layout iPF8300S Laying out Objects Automatically 4 579 ...

Page 600: ...objects justifying them to the vertical center Align Bottom Lays out the objects justifying them to the bottom Align Left Lays out the objects justifying them to the left Mac OS X Software Free Layout Aligning Objects iPF8300S 4 580 ...

Page 601: ...ht Lays out the objects justifying them to the right Changing the Object Overlapping Order You can change the object overlapping order 1 Select an object 2 Select the overlapping order menu from the Object menu Mac OS X Software Free Layout iPF8300S Changing the Object Overlapping Order 4 581 ...

Page 602: ...object to the frontmost position Send to Back Moves the object to the backmost position Bring Forward Moves the object one position to the front Mac OS X Software Free Layout Changing the Object Overlapping Order iPF8300S 4 582 ...

Page 603: ...ut from the toolbar Alternatively you may select Copy or Cut from the Edit menu 2 Click Paste from the toolbar Alternatively you may select Paste from the Edit menu Note The copied or cut object is laid out at the end of the page Mac OS X Software Free Layout iPF8300S Pasting a Copied or Cut Object 4 583 ...

Page 604: ...r imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy are as follows Allows the document scanned with the Color imageRUNNER to be automatically enlarged and printed You can perform basic printer settings such as printer selection media type and output profile selection and matching methods in addition to borderless printing and enlargement reduction process without growing through the printer driver Note The media type ...

Page 605: ... start the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy 1 Open the Utility panel of the Print dialog box Note Your printer is depicted in the lower left area of this screen Mac OS X Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy iPF8300S Starting Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy 4 585 ...

Page 606: ...app icon in Applications Canon Utilities iR Enlargement Copy Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Dialog Box The explanation below is on the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box Note For the step to open the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box see Starting Color image RUNNER Enlargement Copy P 585 Mac OS X Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Color imageRUNNER Enlargement C...

Page 607: ...m the Hot Folder list select a hot folder and click this button to open the Add Edit Hot Folder dialog box that allows you to edit the hot folder Monitor Hot Folder Constantly If you click on the check box the icon of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility will appear on the Dock when starting OS X thereafter Hot Folder Hot folder refers to a folder used for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy ...

Page 608: ...gement Copy dialog box see Starting Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy P 585 2 Click the Add button in Enlarged Copy Settings to open the Destination Selection dialog box 3 From the printer list in Destination select the printer of destination Mac OS X Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Creating a New Hot Folder iPF8300S 4 588 ...

Page 609: ...e name to display in the Hot Folder list 6 In Hot Folder enter the Hot Folder name 7 Click the OK button The created Hot Folder is listed in the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box Mac OS X Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy iPF8300S Creating a New Hot Folder 4 589 ...

Page 610: ...d folders using FTP and Share files and folders using SMB to make shared settings Note You can create up to 10 hot folders Editing a Hot Folder Setting Print Conditions 1 Open the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box 2 Select the Hot Folder from the Hot Folder list 3 From Enlarged Copy Settings click Edit button to open the Add Edit Hot Folder dialog box Mac OS X Software Color imageRUNNE...

Page 611: ...4 Make the necessary settings in the Paper Settings Panel P 595 Mac OS X Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy iPF8300S Editing a Hot Folder Setting Print Conditions 4 591 ...

Page 612: ...5 Make the necessary settings in the Output Settings Panel P 600 Mac OS X Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Editing a Hot Folder Setting Print Conditions iPF8300S 4 592 ...

Page 613: ...he check box labeled File Sharing and click the Options button 10 Select the check box labeled Share files and folders using FTP and Share files and folders using SMB to make shared settings Note If you ve made shared settings when you created a new Hot Folder you do not need to execute steps 8 to 10 Mac OS X Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy iPF8300S Editing a Hot Folder Setting Print C...

Page 614: ...ssag e and then click the OK button Note Select Delete files in the folder to delete only files in the hot folder Setting the Print Parameters You can set the print conditions in the setting panels within the Add Edit Hot Folder dialog box The settings available on each panel are as follows Paper Settings Panel P 595 Output Settings Panel P 600 Color Settings Panel P 602 Mac OS X Software Color im...

Page 615: ...actually set in the printer When the media you chose is different from the media set in the printer you may not receive the desired print results Paper Source You can select the paper source The following settings are available for paper source Setting Details Cut Sheet Select to print on the cut sheet Roll Paper Select to print on roll paper Roll Paper Width This selects the width of the roll med...

Page 616: ... None Each page is not cut after it is printed and printing continues without interruption Print Cut Guideline A print cut guideline is printed after each page and printing continues without inter ruption Note Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source Copies You can input the number of print copies in numerical characters Note The maximum value is 999 You can change the numbers by click...

Page 617: ... monochrome photos Poster The best setting for posters Prints using vivid and high impact colors Faithful Color Reproduction Prints by faithfully reproducing the colors of the original image Photo Adobe RGB Achieves the best color when printing an image created with the Adobe RGB color space feature CAD Color Line Drawing Prints the fine lines of CAD drawings and other such documents sharp and cle...

Page 618: ... 300dpi Note The availability of settings is determined by the media type and print priority selections Printing time is longer and more ink is consumed with High than with Fast however print quality is higher Printing time is shorter and less ink is consumed with Fast than with High however print quality is lower Advanced Settings Presents detailed settings for the print priority the print qualit...

Page 619: ...cument Prints common office documents such as proposals memos for distribution etc so they are easy to read Note The number of settings available for selection depends on the media type Print Quality Selecting print quality strikes a balance between the quality of the printed image and printing speed The level of the print quality and resolution settings are displayed in the following combinations...

Page 620: ...n the Paper Settings panel Displayed only if rolls are selected in Paper Source Scaling Enlarges reduces the whole page by the scaling rate as specified Input the scaling value in numerical characters You can specify a range between 5 and 600 You can change the numbers by clicking either button or button Although Scaling can be set to make the image larger than the media size the part that does no...

Page 621: ...ethod for rotating page The following settings are available for rotating page Setting Details Rotate Right 90 Degrees Rotates the portrait page right 90 degrees and print in landscape orientation When the rotated page can fit in the width of roll paper the page is rotated automatically and when it can not fit in the width of roll paper the page is not rotated When Fit Roll Paper Width is selected...

Page 622: ...ting Monochrome Photo Prints monochrome photo image data in a gray scale that is free of color casting phenomenon of grays that appear tinted Monochrome Disables color printing and converts image from continuous color to grayscaled monochrome Note The availability of settings depends on the print priority and media type selections Matching Mode Under Matching Mode select the matching mode Mac OS X...

Page 623: ...Mac OS Select this if you want to perform soft proofing using ColorSync before printing No Correction No color matching is performed Select this option when you want to perform color matching in the software application Driver Matching Mode 1 Under Matching Mode select Driver Matching Mode 2 Click Matching Method list and then select a setting Setting Details Auto Automatically selects the best co...

Page 624: ... select a setting Setting Details Perceptual Color matching optimized for printing typical photos attractively Smooth gradation is a feature This is also an easy to use mode when performing color adjustment us ing application software Saturation Color matching optimized for printing posters etc vividly Colorimetric Color matching optimized for printing image data with accurate colors in input colo...

Page 625: ... Profile list and then select an input profile Note To match the color on the printing select the input profile for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy of the Color imageRUNNER type in use 4 Click the Printer Profile list and then select a printer profile ColorSync 1 Under Matching Mode select ColorSync 2 Click the Printer Profile list and then select a printer profile Note Available when using Mac...

Page 626: ...mageRUNNER Enlargement Copy first complete these settings in the following order 1 Register a hot folder on your computer Register a hot folder on your computer for storing scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER and complete the settings for enlargement copy 2 Complete the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER Configure the Color imageRUNNER to send scanned originals to the hot folder A...

Page 627: ... click Set in the Utility pane Note Your printer is depicted in the lower left area of this screen 2 In Enlarged Copy Settings click Add or Edit and either create or modify the hot folder For instructions on registering and modifying hot folders refer to the help file for Color imageRUNNER Enlarge ment Copy Completing the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER Configure the Color imageRUNNER t...

Page 628: ...the screen for transmission 3 Press Favorites and then press the Favorites button assigned to the hot folder 4 Press Start on the control panel If you scan originals on the platen glass after scanning all originals press Done on the touch panel display Scanned originals are sent to the hot folder and automatically enlarged and printed following the conditions you specified for the folder Mac OS X ...

Page 629: ...t 642 Adjust the Colors while Checking the Preview for Color 643 Adjust the Colors while Checking the Preview for Monochrome 644 Adjust the Colors by Color Matching 648 Print High Quality Adobe RGB16bit Images 649 Prints monochrome photographs with high quality 651 Using Adobe CMM 651 Perform Black Point Compensation 653 Perform Printing Press Simulation Print 654 Enlarge Reduce and Print 655 Enla...

Page 630: ...pe image size detailed media settings and the printer settings can cause the actual print output to differ from the Print Plug In settings the arrangement of the image in the layout preview the print start position and the media size Loss of gradation in dark areas can be reduced by performing black point compensation Note Adobe CMM is required in order to use the black point compensation function...

Page 631: ...OM into the CD ROM drive to start the installer 2 Click on the iPFxxxx PlugIn InstallerX icon in the Plug in folder in the User Software CD ROM Note The iPFxxxx icon is the name of the printer you are using 3 Input the Administrator name and password and click the OK button Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300S Installation Procedures 4 611 ...

Page 632: ...nt click the Continue button 5 Click the Agree button 6 Select Custom Install to put a checkmark on your Print Plug In then click the Install button Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Installation Procedures iPF8300S 4 612 ...

Page 633: ...Uninstall Print Plug In for Photoshop 1 Close Photoshop 2 In Finder display the Print Plugin for iPFxxxx folder 3 Delete the Print Plugin for iPFxxxx folder Note iPFxxxx is the name of your printer Uninstall Print Plug In for Digital Photo Professional 1 Perform the installation procedures 1 through 5 Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300S Uninstall Proce...

Page 634: ...t Uninstall 3 Click the Uninstall button 4 To quit another application click on the Continue button Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Uninstall Procedures iPF8300S 4 614 ...

Page 635: ... If required select the print range Note Images for use with Print Plug In are less than 60 000 pixels in width and height Reduce the selec tion range or reduce the image with processing for images more than 60 000 pixels in width and height and then attempt step 3 Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300S Starting from Photoshop 4 615 ...

Page 636: ...Photoshop When Photoshop is running in multiple windows the plug in may not start If the message below is displayed but the Print Plug In window is not displayed convert the color space of the image to either RGB color grayscale or CMYK color and then attempt step 3 Set the color space of the image to either RGB color grayscale or CMYK color Starting from Digital Photo Professional Follow the proc...

Page 637: ...or Digital Photo Professional window hereinafter referred to as the Print Plug In window is displayed Print Plug In Main Window The Print Plug In main window consists of the sheet selection area and the preview and button area Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300S Print Plug In Main Window 4 617 ...

Page 638: ...are as follows Main Sheet P 621 Page Setup Sheet P 624 Color Settings Sheet P 627 Print History Sheet P 628 Support Sheet P 629 Preview Area You can check the settings you made on the image in this area About the settings available on the preview area see Preview Area P 619 Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Print Plug In Main Window iPF8300S 4 618 ...

Page 639: ...ck this button to close the Print Plug In window and return to application software Button Click this button to display the Print Plug In Help file Preview Area You can check the settings you made on the image in this area Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300S Preview Area 4 619 ...

Page 640: ...ected range Note When you select Preview in the Image then select a portion of the image on the preview display this becomes valid Perform Proof in Preview Place a checkmark here to simulate the colors of the output product in the preview Note If Auto Color is selected under Output Profile some media types are enabled If ICC profile is selected under Output Profile this is always enabled The actua...

Page 641: ... after selecting the printer in the Select Printer dialog box you can change the printer that corresponds with Print Plug In Media Type This allows you to select the media type For more information about Media Type see Customize Media Settings P 660 Note Always select media type that is actually set in the printer When the media you chose is different from the media set in the printer you may not ...

Page 642: ... Input Res olution to Plug in Print Mode Selecting the printing mode strikes the balance between the quality of the printed image and printing speed The following settings are available for the print mode Setting Details Highest A setting for printing at the highest resolution when quality is most important Print ing takes longer and consumes more ink than in other modes but this mode offers super...

Page 643: ...ion Print P 654 for details on printing press simulation prints Matching Method You can select the processing method when performing color conversion The following settings are available for the matching method Setting Details Perceptual This converts the image to an image with natural color balance and gradation This is useful for pictures Saturation This converts the image to an image with heigh...

Page 644: ...s sheet to set the size of the image to be printed the media size and whether to enlarge reduce the image Input Image Size The size of the image imported to Print Plug In is displayed Borderless Printing When you place a checkmark here the Specify Roll Paper Width dialog box is displayed and you can print an image without borders For more information about Borderless Printing see Print with No Bor...

Page 645: ...displayed when a checkmark is placed in Borderless Printing Output Image Size The output image size is displayed up to one place after the decimal point in millimeters Note When Paper Size is smaller than Output Image Size part of the image may not print Paper Size You can select the size of the print media Note This is not displayed when a checkmark is placed in Borderless Printing This is not di...

Page 646: ...r of the selected roll paper Note Select Roll Paper Preview in Preview when you select Roll Paper Layout Paper Source You can select the media source The following settings are available for media source Setting Details Roll Paper Select to print on roll paper Cut Sheet Select to print on the cut sheet Roll Paper Options button Click this button to open the Roll Paper Options dialog box where you ...

Page 647: ...inputting a numerical value or dragging the slide bar Note You can check the adjustments in the preview display Brightness You can adjust the brightness of the printed image without losing the brightest and darkest areas by either inputting a numerical value or dragging the slide bar Note You can check the adjustments in the preview display Contrast You can relatively adjust the brightness of the ...

Page 648: ...sheet to their defaults Print History Sheet You can use this sheet to apply settings history used in printing and to print information such as the image file name with the image Print History and Favorites This displays a list of print preferences Select Restore Defaults and click the Apply button to restore all settings to their initial settings Note You can check the 3 print preferences in the p...

Page 649: ...image Bottom Footer Information is printed on the bottom of the image Print History Number Place a checkmark here to print the print history number File Name Place a checkmark here to print the file name Printed at Place a checkmark here to print the time and date Color Adjustment Value Place a checkmark here to print the color adjustment value Printer Name Place a checkmark here to print the prin...

Page 650: ...ation window of the Print Plug In Click the OK button in the version infor mation window to return to the Print Plug In window Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box This dialog box appears when you click the Advanced Settings button on the Main Sheet You can set Drying Time and Roll Paper Margin for Safety by media type Drying Time Between Pages This sets the wait time for the ink to dry between each...

Page 651: ...ize Select for Media Type that has no problem when printing with a standard size mar gin 20mm Select this when rubbing against the printhead occurs such as when using paper that tends to curl Cut Speed This selects the auto cut speed Setting Details Printer Default The settings of the printer operating panel are applied Fast Select this setting if cutting with the Standard setting is not clean Sta...

Page 652: ... more time than regular printing Note When Highest Max No of Passes is selected as the print mode High Precision Text and Fine Lines cannot be selected Set Configuration Dialog Box This dialog box appears when you click the Set Configuration button on the Main Sheet You can set the adjustment of image sharpness and image enlargement method Sharpen Performs adjustment of the sharpness outline setti...

Page 653: ...in the box as the job prints Save in mail box Saves the print data in the mail box If you select Save in mail box you must specify Name of data to be saved Print after reception is complete When you place a checkmark here you can print after saving jobs in the temporary storage space This cannot be used when Save in mail box is selected Initialize all warning dialog boxes When this is checked all ...

Page 654: ...aper Options button on the Page Setup Sheet You can set the roll paper width and perform the auto cut settings Roll Paper Width This selects the width of the roll media set to the printer Automatic Cutting You can set the printer to cut roll paper automatically or print a guideline for cutting The following settings are available for automatic cutting Setting Details Available Each page is automat...

Page 655: ... enter any name up to 63 characters Units You can select the units of measure to use when you define custom media size Switching this setting resets the units of measure for the entire Plug In Paper Size Width Enter the width of the media size Height Enter the height of the media size Add button Click the button to register the contents of the settings Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop...

Page 656: ... Note Gray is displayed for monochrome printing and this selection cannot be changed Input Enter an input value Note The allowed entry range is 0 to 255 You can change the numbers by clicking either button or button Output Enter an output value Note The allowed entry range is 0 to 255 Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Curves Dialog Box iPF8300S 4 636 ...

Page 657: ... Print History Number Displays the print history number File Name Displays image file name Printed at Displays time and date of printing Comment Displays comment details Note Up to 200 print history items can be displayed All items above 200 are deleted When you cannot print properly because you canceled the printing or an error occurred appears to the left of the print history number Delete butto...

Page 658: ...e print history settings selected from the Print History or Favorites Setting Details Main When you select this the Main sheet settings are displayed Page Setup When you select this the Page Setup sheet settings are displayed Color Settings When you select this the Color Settings sheet settings are displayed Utilize Three Types of Previews You can use Print Plug In to check an image in three types...

Page 659: ...isplayed as on the preview you can specify the print position by dragging the image When the cursor is displayed as on the preview the below conditions on the Page Setup sheet have all been met There is no checkmark in Borderless Printing There is no checkmark in Enlarged Reduced Printing or Scaling has been selected Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300S...

Page 660: ...ass while there is an Image in the Preview area the Selected Range feature is enabled and you an drag the cursor on the image and select an area for printing When you click the image while the cursor is displayed as on the preview the selected area is deselec ted Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Check the original image with Image iPF8300S 4 640 ...

Page 661: ... Select Roll Paper Preview in Preview Note To select Roll Paper Preview in Preview select Roll Paper in Paper Source Print with a Desired Picture Quality You can specify and print at the resolution you desire 1 Display the Main sheet Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300S Check Image with Roll Paper Preview 4 641 ...

Page 662: ... in Input Bit to Plug in Note When you select High Gradation 8bit images are processed at 8 bit channel 24 bit When you select Highest Gradation 16bit images are processed at 16bit channel 48 bit Highest Gradation 16bit will not display with some Media Type or Input Resolution to Plug in settings 5 Select the mode to be printed when processing images in Print Mode Note The settings that can be sel...

Page 663: ...Yellow Low for Saturation Warm Black for Gray Tone Enhance brightness for the curves The above image adjustments are reflected in the before and after images below Before Application After Application 1 Display the Color Settings sheet 2 Drag the slide bar in the direction of Low in Cyan Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300S Adjust the Colors while Check...

Page 664: ...the center of the curve 7 Enter 120 in Input and 135 in Output then click the OK button 8 Click the Print button The adjustments are reflected in the image and printing begins Adjust the Colors while Checking the Preview for Monochrome You can adjust the colors while checking the adjustments in the preview The following explanation is about the procedures for adjusting example image below Low for ...

Page 665: ...mages of the above image adjustments are as below Before Application After Application 1 Open the Main sheet 2 Select Auto Monochrome Photo in Output Profile Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300S Adjust the Colors while Checking the Preview for Monochrome 4 645 ...

Page 666: ...oward Light Note You can change the numbers by inputting in numerical characters You can change the numbers by clicking either button or button 7 Click the Curves button then click near the center of the curve Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Adjust the Colors while Checking the Preview for Monochrome iPF8300S 4 646 ...

Page 667: ...ck the OK button 9 Click the Print button This applies the image adjustments and starts the print job Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300S Adjust the Colors while Checking the Preview for Monochrome 4 647 ...

Page 668: ...et 2 Select the profile in Output Profile Note When you place a checkmark in Perform Proof in Preview you can check the color matching in the preview This may not be displayed depending on how you set Media Type The details of Output Profile you have set is saved even when you close the Print Plug In but when the specified profile cannot be located it is set to Auto Color If an ICC profile is sele...

Page 669: ...shop without compromising the level of tone in the image 1 Select the Adobe RGB16bit image data in Photoshop and start Print Plug In See Starting from Photoshop P 615 2 Click button 3 Check that Adobe RGB is displayed in Color Space and 16bit channel is displayed in Bit in the Image Properties dialog box and click the Close button Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Profess...

Page 670: ...y possible in Print Mode 8 If required adjust the colors using color matching Note For more information about the color matching see Adjust the Colors by Color Matching P 648 9 Click the Print button Printing of the Adobe RGB16bit image begins Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Print High Quality Adobe RGB16bit Images iPF8300S 4 650 ...

Page 671: ... Print button Performs conversion to the most suitable monochrome and printing begins Using Adobe CMM Adobe CMM is a color conversion engine made by Adobe Using Adobe CMM makes it possible to obtain uniform color conversion results and to use the black point compensation function Important Use version 1 1 or higher of Adobe CMM How to Obtain Adobe CMM Adobe CMM can be obtained using the following ...

Page 672: ...r Adobe CMM are as follows Supported OS Mac OS X 10 4 8 or later Supported CPU PowerPC G4 or G5 Intel Core Duo Intel Core 2 Duo Intel Xeon processor Note Check with Adobe for details How to Use Adobe CMM The procedure for using Adobe CMM is as follows 1 Display the Main sheet 2 Select one of the ICC profiles as the Output Profile 3 Click the ICC Conversion Options button Mac OS X Software Print Pl...

Page 673: ...n order to make the black point compensation settings effective close down and restart Photoshop or Digital Photo Professional Adobe CMM needs to be installed in order to use black point compensation Refer to Using Adobe CMM P 651 for details on how to install Adobe CMM 1 Display the Main sheet 2 Select one of the ICC profiles as the Output Profile 3 Click the ICC Conversion Options button to open...

Page 674: ... prints by specifying ICC profiles such as Japan Color or SWOP and specifying an ICC profile for the printing press 1 Display the Main sheet 2 Select one of the ICC profiles as the Output Profile 3 Check the Proof check box and select the profile for the printing press you want to target from the list on the right Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Perform Pri...

Page 675: ...r P 657 Specify Scaling Enlarge Reduce and Print P 658 Enlarge Reduce and Print Matching Output Media Size By specifying the media type loaded in the printer the image can be enlarged or reduced to fit the size of the image area of the media This feature is useful when you need to print on the full width of Media that you have selected Note When you need to print on the full width of roll media se...

Page 676: ...ntation Note When you select Portrait the image on the media prints as it appears on the screen When you select Landscape the image on the media prints rotated 90 degrees 4 Click the Enlarged Reduced Printing check box on Note This is not displayed when a checkmark is placed in Borderless Printing 5 Select Fit Paper Size 6 Click the Print button The image prints filling the entire output media sur...

Page 677: ...ormation about the Roll Paper Options dialog box see Roll Paper Options Dialog Box P 634 Click the Defaults button to return all of the roll paper option settings to their defaults 5 Select either Portrait or Landscape as the media orientation for the image in Orientation Note When you select Portrait the image on the media prints as it appears on the screen When you select Landscape the image on ...

Page 678: ...n a checkmark is placed in Borderless Printing Fit Roll Paper Widthis set in Enlarged Reduced Printing 3 Select either Portrait or Landscape as the media orientation for the image in Orientation Note When you select Portrait the image on the media prints as it appears on the screen When you select Landscape the image on the media prints rotated 90 degrees 4 Click the Enlarged Reduced Printing chec...

Page 679: ...ng rate Print with No Borders You can use the borderless printing function to print without margins surrounding the image Note With some media borderless printing can be performed only between two edges To use the borderless printing function the specified media must be set to the printer 1 Display the Page Setup sheet 2 Select Roll Paper in Paper Source 3 Click the Borderless Printing check box o...

Page 680: ...elect media type that is actually set in the printer When the media you chose is different from the media set in the printer you may not receive the desired print results 3 Click the Advanced Settings button 4 Perform the settings in the Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box P 630 and click the OK button Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Customize Media Settings...

Page 681: ...o an Image P 662 Store Print History to Print Preferences P 663 Delete Print History P 665 Export Print History from Print Preferences P 667 Import Print History to Print Preferences P 668 Delete Print History from Print Preferences P 670 Set Information to Print with Image P 672 Confirm Print History Details You can confirm the print history details 1 Display Print History sheet 2 Click the Detai...

Page 682: ...vious print history and apply it to an image 1 Display the Print History sheet 2 If required check the print history details See Confirm Print History Details P 661 3 Select the print history you wish to apply from Print History and Favorites and click the Apply button Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Apply Print History to an Image iPF8300S 4 662 ...

Page 683: ...e You can store up to 200 print history items to print preferences 1 Display the Print History sheet 2 Click the Details button 3 Select the print history you wish to store in print preferences from Print History in the Print History Details dialog box and check the print history details in Settings Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300S Store Print Histo...

Page 684: ...ory and click the button 5 In the Add Favorites dialog box input the name of the print history in Name input a comment in Comment and click the OK button Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Store Print History to Print Preferences iPF8300S 4 664 ...

Page 685: ...rint History You can delete print history Important Be aware that you cannot undo deletions of print history 1 Display the Print History sheet 2 Click the Details button Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300S Delete Print History 4 665 ...

Page 686: ... in the Print History Details dialog box and click the Delete button 4 Click the OK button 5 Click the OKbutton to close the Print History Details dialog box Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Delete Print History iPF8300S 4 666 ...

Page 687: ...splay the Print History sheet 2 Click the Details button 3 Select the print history you wish to export from Favorites in the Print History Details dialog box and click the Export button Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300S Export Print History from Print Preferences 4 667 ...

Page 688: ...he OK button to close the Print History Details dialog box Import Print History to Print Preferences You can import print history in file format and store it to print preferences 1 Display the Print History sheet 2 Click the Details button Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Import Print History to Print Preferences iPF8300S 4 668 ...

Page 689: ...story is imported Note The print history file name suffix is pjb pjb2 You cannot import a print history file exported from a different OS in Print Plug In You cannot import a print history file exported from a different printer in Print Plug In Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300S Import Print History to Print Preferences 4 669 ...

Page 690: ...can delete print history store to print preferences You cannot store more than 200 print history items in print preferen ces 1 Display the Print History sheet 2 Click the Details button Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Delete Print History from Print Preferences iPF8300S 4 670 ...

Page 691: ...History Details dialog box and click the Delete button 4 Click the OK button 5 Click the OK button to close the Print History Details dialog box Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300S Delete Print History from Print Preferences 4 671 ...

Page 692: ...me media sizes enlargement rates and print position values When Keep Media Size is set to On on the printer a portion of bottom of the print data is not printed 1 Display the Print History sheet 2 Click the Print Information check box on 3 Select the position where you wish to print the information in Information Print Position 4 Click the information check box you wish to print on 5 When you wish...

Page 693: ...e Edit Comment dialog box and click OK button 7 Click the Print button Comments are printed with images Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300S Set Information to Print with Image 4 673 ...

Page 694: ...ou can check the status of the hard disk and the documents saved on the hard disk Note If the status of the desired printer is not shown in imagePROGRAF Printmonitor select the printer again as follows 1 Make sure the printer is on and connected to the network or to a local port 2 In the Printer menu select the name of the desired printer After the printer is detected the printer status is shown 3...

Page 695: ...nting of a paused print job select the print job and click the button Note Once all the print data for a print job has been sent to the printer the job can no longer be paused re sumed Canceling Print Jobs Selecting a print job and clicking the button cancels printing of the selected job Note You cannot cancel other users print jobs Printing Held Jobs Printing of the job with a Status of Holding i...

Page 696: ...ce the paper in the printer with the correct paper Note To continue printing without changing the paper in the printer select the held job and click Continue to print button Mac OS X Software Printmonitor Job Management Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor iPF8300S 4 676 ...

Page 697: ...inter control panel and in printer driver dialog boxes and rename them in addition to other functions You can add custom paper paper that is not Canon genuine paper or Canon feed confirmed paper to the printer con trol panel and printer driver Important Normally the Media Configuration Tool is installed and the media information is configured when you in stall the printer driver from the User Soft...

Page 698: ...river is installed from the User Software CD ROM the Media Configuration Tool is also in stalled and the media information is also configured Therefore the following procedure does not normally need to be performed To install the Media Configuration Tool without using the User Software CD ROM such as when you have downloaded a new version of the Media Configuration Tool from the Canon website use ...

Page 699: ...r is used Select a country or territory then click the OK button 4 The License is displayed After you have read Canon Software License Agreement click the Continue button 5 Click the Agree button Mac OS X Software Media Configuration Tool iPF8300S Procedures for Installing 4 679 ...

Page 700: ...click the Install button 7 Click the Continue button to quit another application 8 When the following message is displayed click the Quit button Mac OS X Software Media Configuration Tool Procedures for Installing iPF8300S 4 680 ...

Page 701: ...figuration Tool The iPFxxxx in the folder above will be the printer name in use Procedures for Uninstalling 1 Double click the MCT Installer iPFxxxx for X icon to start the Media Configuration Tool installer Note The iPFxxxx in the icon will be the printer name in use 2 Input the administrator name and password and click the OK button Mac OS X Software Media Configuration Tool iPF8300S Procedures ...

Page 702: ... is used Select a country or territory then click the OK button 4 The License is displayed After you have read Canon Software License Agreement click the Continue button 5 Click the Agree button Mac OS X Software Media Configuration Tool Procedures for Uninstalling iPF8300S 4 682 ...

Page 703: ...6 Select Uninstall 7 Click the Uninstall button 8 Press the Continue button when another application is running Mac OS X Software Media Configuration Tool iPF8300S Procedures for Uninstalling 4 683 ...

Page 704: ... Media Configuration Tool Follow the procedure below to start the Media Configuration Tool From the Applications menu Canon Utilities iPFxxxx Media Configuration Tool MCTxxxx app Media Configuration Tool main window is displayed Mac OS X Software Media Configuration Tool Starting the Media Configuration Tool iPF8300S 4 684 ...

Page 705: ...og box is displayed which allows you to add media informa tion files released by Canon to the printer control panel and printer driver You can also change names toggle between displaying and hiding and delete added media types You can also change the display order of Canon genuine paper and custom paper Refer to Editing Media Type Information P 686 for details on Add Genuine Paper Add Custom Paper...

Page 706: ... Adding Media Types P 687 Changing Media Names P 690 Deleting Media Types You Have Added P 692 Switching Media Types Display Show Hide P 694 Changing the Display Order of Media Types P 696 Important When you update the media type information perform the same update on all of the PCs that are using that printer Adding deleting toggling display non display and changing the paper name of a media type...

Page 707: ...rinting on the target printer while adding the media types Reinstalling Media Configuration Tool after registering a media information file may delete the registered media information file In this case first download and install latest Media Configuration Tool then down load and register the required media information file 1 Open the Edit Media Types dialog box and then click the Add button Mac OS...

Page 708: ...dialog box displays Click the Browse button 3 Select the folder that contains the media information files amf files and then click the Open button Mac OS X Software Media Configuration Tool Adding Media Types iPF8300S 4 688 ...

Page 709: ...nt If Master Media Information File is displayed as the Type of the Media Information File the me dia type display order and media type display non display settings are initialized Reconfigure these after added the master media information file 5 Click OK when the confirmation message is displayed 6 In the Edit Media Types dialog box click the Update button Mac OS X Software Media Configuration To...

Page 710: ... Update Media Types wizard see Updating Media Types P 698 Important Be sure to click the Update button If you do not your changes will not be applied to the printer and printer driver Changing Media Names 1 Open the Edit Media Types dialog box Mac OS X Software Media Configuration Tool Changing Media Names iPF8300S 4 690 ...

Page 711: ...n 3 The Rename Media dialog box is displayed Edit the names in Name in Printer Driver and Name on Control Panel and click the OK button Note To restore the original names click the Restore button Mac OS X Software Media Configuration Tool iPF8300S Changing Media Names 4 691 ...

Page 712: ...mation using the Update Media Types wizard see Updating Media Types P 698 Important Be sure to click the Update button If you do not your changes will not be applied to the printer and printer driver Deleting Media Types You Have Added 1 Open the Edit Media Types dialog box Mac OS X Software Media Configuration Tool Deleting Media Types You Have Added iPF8300S 4 692 ...

Page 713: ...delete Click the Delete button Note Only paper for which Status in the Media Type is Add can be deleted 3 In the Edit Media Types dialog box click the Update button Mac OS X Software Media Configuration Tool iPF8300S Deleting Media Types You Have Added 4 693 ...

Page 714: ... wizard see Updating Media Types P 698 Important Be sure to click the Update button If you do not your changes will not be applied to the printer and printer driver Switching Media Types Display Show Hide 1 Open the Edit Media Types dialog box Mac OS X Software Media Configuration Tool Switching Media Types Display Show Hide iPF8300S 4 694 ...

Page 715: ...appear grayed out in the Media Type list Each time you click the Show Hide button the display mode cycles from showing both the printer driver and printer panel to hiding both the printer driver and printer panel and then to showing only the printer panel 3 In the Edit Media Types dialog box click the Update button Mac OS X Software Media Configuration Tool iPF8300S Switching Media Types Display S...

Page 716: ...izard see Updating Media Types P 698 Important Be sure to click the Update button If you do not your changes will not be applied to the printer and printer driver Changing the Display Order of Media Types 1 Open the Edit Media Types dialog box Mac OS X Software Media Configuration Tool Changing the Display Order of Media Types iPF8300S 4 696 ...

Page 717: ...x click the Update button The Update Media Types wizard is started at this point For details on the procedure to update paper information using the Update Media Types wizard see Updating Media Types P 698 Important Be sure to click the Update button If you do not your changes will not be applied to the printer and printer driver Mac OS X Software Media Configuration Tool iPF8300S Changing the Disp...

Page 718: ...Media Types wizard are as follows Important When you update the media type information perform the same update on all of the PCs that are using that printer 1 Confirm the printer where media type information is to be updated to be displayed in Printer in the Update Media Types Select Printer dialog box and then click the Next button 2 Communication with the printer starts and the following dialog ...

Page 719: ...date Media Types Confirm Update Confirm the information received from the printer To update click the Execute button Important When setting a data to the printer that differs from the data to be updated the selected media informa tion file is updated When you would like to remain the data that is set to the printer click the Cancel button 4 Communication with the printer starts and the following d...

Page 720: ... and then click the Update button Select the printer that you want to update in Step 1 and update the media information by following the Update Media Types wizard Using Paper Other Than Genuine Paper Feed Confirmed Paper When the Add Custom Paper button is clicked in the Media Configuration Tool main window the Add Custom Paper dialog box is displayed Adding custom paper to the printer control pan...

Page 721: ...on genuine paper and feed confirmed paper cannot be changed from this dialog box Refer to Editing Media Type Information P 686 Changing the display order of media types displayed in the printer control panel and printer driver is per formed from the Edit Media Types dialog box regardless of whether it is Canon genuine paper or custom paper Refer to Editing Media Type Information P 686 Compatible P...

Page 722: ...es of customer paper paper that is not Canon genuine paper or Canon feed confirmed paper Add Custom Paper In order to add new custom paper to the printer control panel and printer driver first select the media type to use as the basis from among the Canon genuine paper and feed confirmed paper Add this as custom paper after making various changes to the standard paper as necessary Important Do not...

Page 723: ...ck the Next button 3 The Step 1 Select the standard paper dialog box is displayed In Paper Category select the category of media type to use as the basis of the custom paper you are adding Important Select the category that you think is the closest to the custom paper you are adding Mac OS X Software Media Configuration Tool iPF8300S Add Custom Paper 4 703 ...

Page 724: ...y Alternatively select the media type called General from among the displayed Media Type Name Depending on the selected category there might not be a media type called General Depending on the selected category the Assist button may be disabled 5 The Step 2 Set the custom paper name dialog box is displayed Enter an arbitrary name to display in the printer control panel and printer driver and then ...

Page 725: ...lete click the Next button Important Check that there is no paper left on the ejection guide If Paper Feed Adjustment is not executed horizontal stripes with different color tones may appear in the printed material Paper feed adjustment does not need to be executed more than once Execute paper feed adjustment only once each time you add a custom paper 9 The Roll Paper Settings dialog box is displa...

Page 726: ...such as to wait for the ink to dry User Cut Cutting is not performed by the cutter unit Cut the roll paper using scissors after each sheet Select this for paper that cannot be cut by the cutter unit Drying Time Specify the time that the printer waits for ink to dry as needed Off Ejects immediately after printing finishes 30 sec 1 min 3 min 5 min 10 min 30 min 60 min Ejects after the specified time...

Page 727: ...cut well by the cutter set the Automatic Cutting Settings to User Cut and cut the roll paper using scissors etc Paper where borderless printing can be performed is limited by the media type and roll paper width Refer to Compatible Paper P 701 For custom paper where there is a need to set the Automatic Cutting Settings to User Cut set the Borderless Printing to Deny 10 The Step 5 Configure the amou...

Page 728: ...ity Set the level to test print using Maximum ink usage and the image to use using Image used in test print and then click the Start Print button 12 Determine and set the ink level that is thought to give the best visual test print results with no bleeding or scraping of ink Mac OS X Software Media Configuration Tool Add Custom Paper iPF8300S 4 708 ...

Page 729: ...u are using and select that ICC color profile in your soft ware Depending on the maximum ink usage setting some of the print qualities in the printer driver may become unselectable 13 Configure Head Height and Vacuum Strength as required and click the Next button Usually these do not need to be set Important If you set the Head Height lower than the automatically set height in parentheses check th...

Page 730: ...n click the Next button 15 The Confirm Update dialog box is displayed Confirm the updates and then click the Execute button Note If the authentication screen is displayed input the administrator name and passowrd and click the OK button Mac OS X Software Media Configuration Tool Add Custom Paper iPF8300S 4 710 ...

Page 731: ...he name of the added custom paper is displayed in the Edit Media Types dialog box that is opened by Add Genuine Paper in the Media Configuration Tool window Delete Custom Paper You can delete custom paper that you have already added from printer control panel and from the printer driver of the PC you are using 1 Open the Add Custom Paper dialog box 2 Select the paper you want to delete from the Ad...

Page 732: ...and then click the Execute button Note If the authentication screen is displayed input the administrator name and passowrd and click the OK button The custom paper is deleted from the control panel of the printer and from the printer driver of the PC you are using Mac OS X Software Media Configuration Tool Delete Custom Paper iPF8300S 4 712 ...

Page 733: ...s as required Note Refer to Steps 5 to 15 of the Add Custom Paper P 702 for details on how to configure each setting Export Custom Media Information You can export to file and save media information about custom paper that you have added The saved Custom Media Information File can be used by importing it into another printer or PC Refer to Import Custom Media Information P 715 for details on impor...

Page 734: ...om the Added Custom Paper list and then click the Export button 3 Specify the location to save the Custom Media Information File A Custom Media Information File am1 file is saved Mac OS X Software Media Configuration Tool Export Custom Media Information iPF8300S 4 714 ...

Page 735: ...folder and add the file to the printer control panel and to the printer driver of the PC you are using 1 Open the Add Custom Paper dialog box 2 Click the Import button 3 Select the printer to add the custom paper to Mac OS X Software Media Configuration Tool iPF8300S Import Custom Media Information 4 715 ...

Page 736: ... the Custom Media Information File am1 file to import 5 The Confirm Update dialog box opens Click the Execute button Note If the authentication screen is displayed input the administrator name and passowrd and click the OK button Mac OS X Software Media Configuration Tool Import Custom Media Information iPF8300S 4 716 ...

Page 737: ...the printhead is rub bing against the paper configure the Vacuum Strength in the Step 5 Configure the amount of ink used dialog box as follows For paper based media such as Heavyweight Coated Paper Set to Strong or Strongest For film based media such as CAD Tracing Paper Set to Standard Strong or Strongest For thin paper of thickness 0 1mm or less Set to Weakest Note If the printhead still rubs ev...

Page 738: ... Fine Feed refer to Banding in different colors occurs in Troubleshooting See Banding in different colors occurs P 1075 If you cannot obtain sufficiently high print quality change the maximum ink usage or change the media type used as the basis for the custom paper in the Step 1 Select the standard paper dialog box If there is no luster in printed material set the paper used as the basis for the c...

Page 739: ...Print Job Operations Basic Print Job Operations 720 Advanced Print Job Operations 747 Print Job Operations iPF8300S 5 719 ...

Page 740: ...ntity later without the need to use a computer again Simplify reprinting if any errors occur If errors occur in the middle of printing as when paper runs out you can resume printing after clearing the error with out resending the print job from a computer Streamline printing work Without using a computer you can select print jobs and print in the desired quantity You can also select multiple print...

Page 741: ...nnot be set for the shared mailbox Up to 100 print jobs can be saved here but they will be deleted one after another starting with the oldest job in the following situations If there are more than 100 jobs queued and saved in the shared mailbox combined If no more temporary storage space is available when jobs for which you have selected Print in Output Method in Windows or Send job to in Mac OS X...

Page 742: ...onal P 307 Free Layout P 261 Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy P 292 Preview P 248 Mac OS Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional P 609 Free Layout P 550 Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy P 584 Preview P 519 The document title will be imagePROGRAF when you print from imagePROGRAF Preview Configuring the Printer Driver in Windows 1 Access the Page Setup sheet Print Job Operations B...

Page 743: ...lete This option is available in combination with Print Print jobs are saved on the printer s hard disk before print ing Note Click Acquire Mail Box Name to display personal box names in the Mail box list as acquired from the printer 4 In Name of data to be saved specify how to name saved print jobs To use the file name choose Use file name Otherwise choose Enter name and enter a name in Name 5 Cl...

Page 744: ...the printer s hard disk after printing Save in mail box Save print jobs on the printer s hard disk The Destination dialog box is displayed if you select Save in mail box Here specify the name and personal box number for saved print jobs Print Job Operations Basic Print Job Operations Saving Print Jobs on the Printer Hard Disk iPF8300S 5 724 ...

Page 745: ...You can delete or preempt jobs in the job queue as needed These operations are available from the Control Panel or in RemoteUI imagePROGRAF Status Monitor and imagePROG RAF Printmonitor Delete Note that only jobs that are not currently being deleted can be deleted from the job queue Preempting other jobs You can preempt other jobs by printing jobs that are currently being received or prepared for ...

Page 746: ...lect the print job to delete and then press the OK button 3 Press or to select Delete and then press the OK button Preempting other jobs 1 Press or to select Print Job and then press the OK button 2 Press or to select the job to print first and then press the OK button 3 Press or to select Preempt Jobs and then press the OK button Using RemoteUI Manage jobs as needed on the Print Job page For deta...

Page 747: ...the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help file Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor Mac OS Manage jobs as needed on the Driver sheet For details refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help file Print Job Operations Basic Print Job Operations iPF8300S Managing the Job Queue Deleting or Preempting Other Jobs 5 727 ...

Page 748: ...ld jobs replace the loaded paper with the paper specified in the print job See Loading Rolls in the Printer P 786 See Loading Sheets in the Printer P 813 Using the Control Panel 1 On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel press or to select the Job tab There are held jobs is displayed if jobs are being held Note If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed press the Menu button 2 Press the ...

Page 749: ... page For details refer to the RemoteUI help file Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor Manage jobs as needed on the Job sheet For details see Job Management Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor P 427 Print Job Operations Basic Print Job Operations iPF8300S Managing Pending Jobs Printing or Deleting Jobs on Hold 5 729 ...

Page 750: ...d print jobs stored on the printer s hard disk as follows These operations are available from the Control Panel or in RemoteUI imagePROGRAF Status Monitor and imagePROG RAF Printmonitor Using the Control Panel 1 On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel press or to select the Job tab Print Job Operations Basic Print Job Operations Printing Saved Jobs iPF8300S 5 730 ...

Page 751: ... the OK button Note Enter a password if one has been set and then press the OK button 5 Press or to select Job List and then press the OK button 6 Press or to select the saved job and then press the OK button 7 Press or to select Print and then press the OK button 8 Specify the number of copies and press the OK button Using RemoteUI 1 On the Stored Job page choose the box Print Job Operations Basi...

Page 752: ...Select the print job and click Resume 3 On the Print Saved Document page enter the quantity to print in Copies and click OK For details refer to the RemoteUI help Print Job Operations Basic Print Job Operations Printing Saved Jobs iPF8300S 5 732 ...

Page 753: ... imagePROGRAF Status Monitor 1 On the Hard Disk sheet select a box and click Open Note Enter a password if one has been set Print Job Operations Basic Print Job Operations iPF8300S Printing Saved Jobs 5 733 ...

Page 754: ...es how long it took to finish printing one copy during the previous print job If you change the value in Copies the printing time indicates the time it took to print one copy during the previous print job multiplied by the number of copies For details refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help file Print Job Operations Basic Print Job Operations Printing Saved Jobs iPF8300S 5 734 ...

Page 755: ...Printmonitor 1 On the Hard Disk pane click by Inbox No Name Note Enter a password if one has been set The password is a four digit number Print Job Operations Basic Print Job Operations iPF8300S Printing Saved Jobs 5 735 ...

Page 756: ...esume Printing 3 In the Resume Printing dialog box enter the quantity to print and click OK For details refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help file Print Job Operations Basic Print Job Operations Printing Saved Jobs iPF8300S 5 736 ...

Page 757: ...tton 2 Press the OK button The Job Menu is displayed 3 Press or to select Stored Job and then press the OK button 4 Press or to select the box number in the range 00 29 and then press the OK button Note Enter a password if one has been set and then press the OK button 5 Press or to select Job List and then press the OK button 6 Press or to select the saved job and then press the OK button 7 Press ...

Page 758: ...b page choose the mail box Note Enter a password if one has been set 2 Select the print job and click Delete For details refer to the RemoteUI help file Print Job Operations Basic Print Job Operations Deleting Saved Jobs iPF8300S 5 738 ...

Page 759: ... imagePROGRAF Status Monitor 1 On the Hard Disk sheet select a box and click Open Note Enter a password if one has been set Print Job Operations Basic Print Job Operations iPF8300S Deleting Saved Jobs 5 739 ...

Page 760: ...ob and click Delete For details refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help file Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor 1 In the Hard Disk pane click next to Inbox No Name Print Job Operations Basic Print Job Operations Deleting Saved Jobs iPF8300S 5 740 ...

Page 761: ...e Moving Saved Jobs Print jobs stored on the printer s hard disk saved jobs can be moved from the current box to another box as follows However jobs saved in personal boxes cannot be moved to the shared mailbox This operation is available in RemoteUI imagePROGRAF Status Monitor and imagePROGRAF Printmonitor Print Job Operations Basic Print Job Operations iPF8300S Moving Saved Jobs 5 741 ...

Page 762: ... deleted move them from the shared mailbox to personal boxes See Using the Printer Hard Disk P 720 Using RemoteUI 1 On the Stored Job page choose the box Note Enter a password if one has been set 2 Select the print job and click Move Document Print Job Operations Basic Print Job Operations Moving Saved Jobs iPF8300S 5 742 ...

Page 763: ...rsonal box in the Destination mail box list and click OK For details refer to the RemoteUI help file Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor Windows 1 On the Hard Disk sheet select a box and click Open Print Job Operations Basic Print Job Operations iPF8300S Moving Saved Jobs 5 743 ...

Page 764: ...as been set 2 In the Documents dialog box select the print job and click Move 3 In the Move dialog box select the destination personal box and click OK Print Job Operations Basic Print Job Operations Moving Saved Jobs iPF8300S 5 744 ...

Page 765: ... file Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor Macintosh 1 In the Hard Disk pane click next to Inbox No Name Note Enter a password if one has been set The password is a four digit number Print Job Operations Basic Print Job Operations iPF8300S Moving Saved Jobs 5 745 ...

Page 766: ...ck Move 3 In the Move Document dialog box select the destination personal box and click OK For details refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help file Print Job Operations Basic Print Job Operations Moving Saved Jobs iPF8300S 5 746 ...

Page 767: ...ntrol Panel menu Note Contact the software or system developer for information about support for this printer function Specifying Output Method In Output Method specify how to manage jobs regarding printing and saving them Print Save print jobs automatically at the same time they are printed This is the default format Print Auto Del Save print jobs temporarily at the same time they are printed and...

Page 768: ...v Printing will start when Print After Recv is set to On even if you have selected Save Box 01 in Output Method 1 On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel press or to select the Settings Adj tab Note If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed press the Menu button 2 Press the OK button The Set Adj Menu is displayed 3 Press or to select System Setup and then press the OK button 4 Press or...

Page 769: ...d then press the OK button 4 Press or to select Common Box Set and then press the OK button Note If a password has been set on the printer the Logon screen is displayed To change the setting select Administrator and press the OK button Enter the password when Ad min Pswd is displayed and press the OK button before going to the next procedure If you select User and press the OK button you can check...

Page 770: ...UI Using RemoteUI 1 On the Stored Job page choose the personal box 2 Click Edit 3 In the Set Register User s Inbox dialog box specify the password and click OK Set Password Select the check box Password Enter the password This field is limited to four digits in the range 0001 9999 Confirmation Number Re enter the password to confirm it For details refer to the RemoteUI help Print Job Operations Ad...

Page 771: ...ings 3 In the Settings dialog box specify the password and click OK Set password Select the check box Password Enter the password This field is limited to four digits in the range 0001 9999 Re enter to confirm Re enter the password to confirm it Print Job Operations Advanced Print Job Operations iPF8300S Setting Passwords for Personal Boxes 5 751 ...

Page 772: ...ved job in the list and click Set 2 In the Settings dialog box specify the password and click OK Set password Select the check box Password Enter the password This field is limited to four digits in the range 0001 9999 Verify Re enter the password to confirm it Print Job Operations Advanced Print Job Operations Setting Passwords for Personal Boxes iPF8300S 5 752 ...

Page 773: ...tification you can assign names to personal boxes This operation is available in RemoteUI imagePROGRAF Status Monitor and imagePROGRAF Printmonitor Using RemoteUI 1 On the Stored Job page choose the personal box Print Job Operations Advanced Print Job Operations iPF8300S Naming Personal Boxes 5 753 ...

Page 774: ...he personal box 2 Click Edit 3 In the Set Register User s Inbox dialog box enter the name in Inbox Name and click OK For details refer to the RemoteUI help file Print Job Operations Advanced Print Job Operations Naming Personal Boxes iPF8300S 5 754 ...

Page 775: ...onitor Windows 1 On the Hard Disk sheet select the personal box and click Open Note Enter a password if one has been set for the personal box Print Job Operations Advanced Print Job Operations iPF8300S Naming Personal Boxes 5 755 ...

Page 776: ... box click Settings 3 In the Settings dialog box enter the name and click OK For details refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help file Print Job Operations Advanced Print Job Operations Naming Personal Boxes iPF8300S 5 756 ...

Page 777: ...Hard Disk pane click next to Inbox No Name Select a saved job in the list and click Set Note Enter a password if one has been set The password is a four digit number Print Job Operations Advanced Print Job Operations iPF8300S Naming Personal Boxes 5 757 ...

Page 778: ...the Control Panel or in RemoteUI imagePROGRAF Status Monitor and imagePROG RAF Printmonitor Using the Control Panel 1 On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel press or to select the Job tab Note If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed press the Menu button 2 Press the OK button The Job Menu is displayed 3 Press or to select Stored Job and then press the OK button Print Job Operations ...

Page 779: ...en set and then press the OK button 5 Press or to select Job List and then press the OK button Using RemoteUI On the Stored Job page choose the box Note Enter a password if one has been set Jobs saved in the box are listed Print Job Operations Advanced Print Job Operations iPF8300S Displaying a List of Saved Jobs 5 759 ...

Page 780: ...elp Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor Windows On the Hard Disk sheet select a box and click Open Note Enter a password if one has been set Print Job Operations Advanced Print Job Operations Displaying a List of Saved Jobs iPF8300S 5 760 ...

Page 781: ...ialog box For details refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help file Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor Macintosh On the Hard Disk pane click by Inbox No Name Print Job Operations Advanced Print Job Operations iPF8300S Displaying a List of Saved Jobs 5 761 ...

Page 782: ...ess or to select the Job tab Note If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed press the Menu button 2 Press the OK button The Job Menu is displayed 3 Press or to select Stored Job and then press the OK button 4 Press or to select the box number in the range 00 29 and then press the OK button Note Enter a password if one has been set and then press the OK button 5 Press or to select Print Job List...

Page 783: ...is operation is available in RemoteUI imagePROGRAF Status Monitor and imagePROGRAF Printmonitor Using RemoteUI 1 On the Stored Job page choose the box Note Enter a password if one has been set 2 Select the print job and click Details Print Job Operations Advanced Print Job Operations iPF8300S Displaying Details of Saved Jobs 5 763 ...

Page 784: ...splayed For details refer to the RemoteUI help file Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor Windows 1 On the Hard Disk sheet select a box and click Open Print Job Operations Advanced Print Job Operations Displaying Details of Saved Jobs iPF8300S 5 764 ...

Page 785: ...ents dialog box select the print job and click Properties The Properties dialog box is displayed For details refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help file Print Job Operations Advanced Print Job Operations iPF8300S Displaying Details of Saved Jobs 5 765 ...

Page 786: ... click next to Inbox No Name Note Enter a password if one has been set The password is a four digit number For details refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help file Print Job Operations Advanced Print Job Operations Displaying Details of Saved Jobs iPF8300S 5 766 ...

Page 787: ...ation is available in RemoteUI imagePROGRAF Status Monitor and imagePROGRAF Printmonitor Using RemoteUI 1 On the Stored Job page choose the box Note Enter a password if one has been set 2 Select the print job and click Details Print Job Operations Advanced Print Job Operations iPF8300S Renaming Saved Jobs 5 767 ...

Page 788: ...cument page click Change Document 4 In the Rename Saved Document dialog box enter the name and click OK For details refer to the RemoteUI help file Print Job Operations Advanced Print Job Operations Renaming Saved Jobs iPF8300S 5 768 ...

Page 789: ...ePROGRAF Status Monitor Windows 1 On the Hard Disk sheet select a box and click Open Note Enter a password if one has been set Print Job Operations Advanced Print Job Operations iPF8300S Renaming Saved Jobs 5 769 ...

Page 790: ...print job and click Properties 3 In the Properties dialog box enter the new name and click OK For details refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help file Print Job Operations Advanced Print Job Operations Renaming Saved Jobs iPF8300S 5 770 ...

Page 791: ...tor Macintosh 1 In the Hard Disk pane click next to Inbox No Name Note Enter a password if one has been set The password is a four digit number Print Job Operations Advanced Print Job Operations iPF8300S Renaming Saved Jobs 5 771 ...

Page 792: ...b and click Set 3 In the Settings dialog box enter the new name and click OK For details refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help file Print Job Operations Advanced Print Job Operations Renaming Saved Jobs iPF8300S 5 772 ...

Page 793: ...Handling Paper Paper 774 Handling rolls 782 Handling sheets 813 Output Stacker 822 Media take up unit 831 Handling Paper iPF8300S 6 773 ...

Page 794: ...Reference Guide from imagePROGRAF Support Information See Displaying the Pa per Reference Guide P 777 Method of Updating Supported Paper Paper supported by the printer may be newly released on the imagePROGRAF website To use newly released paper register the latest paper information on the printer with the Media Configuration Tool See Updating paper information P 779 Important To install the Paper...

Page 795: ... in JIS B2 B3 Roll 515 0mm Yes 431 8 mm 17 00 in 17 in Roll 431 8mm Yes 420 0 mm 16 54 in ISO A2 A3 Roll 420 0mm No 406 4 mm 16 00 in 16 in Roll 406 4mm No 355 6 mm 14 00 in 14 in Roll 355 6mm Yes 297 0 mm 11 69 in ISO A3 A4 Roll 297 0mm No 254 0 mm 10 00 in 10 in Roll 254 0mm Yes Custom Paper Size 254 0 mm 10 00 in to 1 118 0 mm 44 02 in 1 For information on types of paper compatible with borderl...

Page 796: ...50 11 00 in Legal 8 5 x14 215 9 355 6 mm 8 50 14 00 in 36 x48 ARCH E 914 4 1219 2 mm 36 00 48 00 in 30 x42 ARCH E1 762 0 1066 8 mm 30 00 42 00 in 26 x38 ARCH E2 660 4 965 2 mm 26 00 38 00 in 27 x39 ARCH E3 685 8 990 6 mm 27 00 39 00 in 24 x36 ARCH D 609 6 914 4 mm 24 00 36 00 in 18 x24 ARCH C 457 2 609 6 mm 18 00 24 00 in 12 x18 ARCH B 304 8 457 2 mm 12 00 18 00 in 9 x12 ARCH A 228 6 304 8 mm 9 00...

Page 797: ... 44 02 62 99 in Note For details on non standard paper sizes see Printing on Non Standard Paper Sizes P 131 Borderless printing is not supported on sheets Displaying the Paper Reference Guide The Paper Reference Guide can be accessed from imagePROGRAF Support Information Follow these instructions as appropriate for your operating system Windows 1 Double click the iPFxxxx Support desktop icon iPFxx...

Page 798: ...displayed Mac OS X 1 Click the iPF Support icon in the Dock The imagePROGRAF Support Information window is displayed 2 Click the Paper Reference Guide button Handling Paper Paper Displaying the Paper Reference Guide iPF8300S 6 778 ...

Page 799: ...ls on Media Information File Media Information File refer as follows Media Configuration Tool P 448 Windows Media Configuration Tool P 677 Macintosh Important When your version of Media Configuration Tool is older than the version released on the imagePROG RAF website download and install the latest version of Media Configuration Tool before installing Me dia Information File If you do not install...

Page 800: ... webpage The default browser on your computer is started and the imagePROGRAF webpage is displayed Adding Custom Paper Using Media Configuration Tool you can add custom paper paper not listed in the Paper Reference Guide to the printer driver and control panel of the printer For details on Media Configuration Tool refer as follows Media Configuration Tool P 448 Windows Media Configuration Tool P 6...

Page 801: ...nction occurs in the printer resulting from the use of custom paper paper not listed in the Paper Reference Guide it is not guaranteed even within the warranty period Handling Paper Paper iPF8300S Adding Custom Paper 6 781 ...

Page 802: ...older to Rolls When printing on rolls attach the Roll Holder to the roll Rolls have a two or three inch paper core Use the correct attachment for the paper core The printer comes equipped with the 2 Inch Paper Core Attachment installed Using Rolls with a 2 inch Paper Core Using Rolls with a 3 inch Paper Core Roll Holder Side Holder Stopper Side Roll Holder Side Holder Stopper Side No Attach ment N...

Page 803: ... des printed on the roll Align the edges of the paper on both ends of the roll Misalignment may cause feeding problems Note For details on supported sizes and types of rolls see Paper Sizes or the Paper Reference Guide See Paper Sizes P 775 See Types of Paper P 774 To view instructions as you attach the Roll Holder press the Navigate button See How to View Instruc tions With Navigate P 919 1 Lift ...

Page 804: ...b of the Holder Stopper and insert it firmly No attachment is needed Using rolls with a 3 inch paper core Holder Stopper Side Roll Holder Side Align the tips a of 3 Inch Paper Core Attachment 2 with the holes b of the Holder Stopper and insert it firmly Align the tips a of 3 Inch Paper Core Attachment 1 with the holes b of the Roll Holder and insert it firmly Handling Paper Handling rolls Attachin...

Page 805: ... the Roll Holder leaving no gap 4 Insert the Holder Stopper from the left in the Roll Holder as shown Holding it at the position shown b push it firmly in until the flange a of the Holder Stopper touches the roll Lock the Holder Stopper lever c by pushing it down toward the shaft side Handling Paper Handling rolls iPF8300S Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls 6 785 ...

Page 806: ...ection Guide is soiled If soiled we recommend cleaning in advance See Cleaning Inside the Top Cover P 1040 1 Press the Load button 2 Press or to select Load Roll Paper and then press the OK button Note If any paper has been advanced that will not be used a message is shown requesting you to remove it Press or to select Yes and then press the OK button Remove the paper and go to the next step 3 Ope...

Page 807: ...shaft a into the grooves b on both ends of the Roll Holder Slot fully into the slot Caution Be careful not to drop the roll and hurt yourself when loading it Be careful not to pinch your fingers between the Roll Holder shaft a and the guide grooves b when loading rolls Handling Paper Handling rolls iPF8300S Loading Rolls in the Printer 6 787 ...

Page 808: ...eful not to soil the printing surface Otherwise it may affect printing quality We recommend wearing clean cloth gloves when handling rolls to protect the printing sur face If the paper is wrinkled or warped straighten it out before loading it For paper that tends to curl lift the Release Lever and manually pull the roll paper over the Platen Load paper straight so it is not fed askew Handling Pape...

Page 809: ...6 Lower the Ejection Guide 7 Holding the edge of the roll paper lift the Release Lever Handling Paper Handling rolls iPF8300S Loading Rolls in the Printer 6 789 ...

Page 810: ... it may jam or rub against the Printhead Do not force the roll paper into alignment with the paper alignment line b This may prevent the paper from being advanced straight Note You can adjust the strength of suction holding paper against the Platen when the Release Lever is released If it is difficult to load paper press the or button on the Control Panel to adjust the strength Set suction stronge...

Page 811: ... See Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls P 802 Note For details on types of paper to select see the Paper Reference Guide See Types of Paper P 774 Adjusting the printhead alignment with the type of paper to be used in printing may enhance printing quality See Automatic Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors Head Posi Adj P 850 When paper leading edge detection is set to Off for Manual print...

Page 812: ...ter the type of paper See Specifying the Paper Length P 793 1 On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel press or to select the Paper tab Note If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed press the Menu button 2 Press the OK button The Paper Menu is displayed 3 Press or to select Chg Paper Type and then press the OK button 4 Press or to select the type of paper loaded Roll Paper or Cut Sheet...

Page 813: ...ou send a print job before loading a sheet the media type setting is updated to match the type of paper specified by the print job When you have selected ManageRemainRoll On on the Control Panel and a barcode is printed on the roll the media type setting is updated to match the type of paper specified by the barcode To change the media type setting see Changing the Type of Paper P 792 Specifying t...

Page 814: ...put 2 Press the or button to enter the value 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to finish entering the value and then press the OK button Removing the Roll from the Printer Remove rolls from the printer as follows Note If you need to cut the roll see Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls P 802 1 On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel press or to select the Paper tab Note If the Tab Selection scree...

Page 815: ... of the roll Do not remove the roll before the barcode is printed You will be unable to keep track of the amount of roll paper left See Keeping Track of the Amount of Roll Paper Left P 799 5 Open the Top Cover and lift the Ejection Guide 6 Using both hands rotate the Roll Holder in the direction of the arrow to rewind the roll Handling Paper Handling rolls iPF8300S Removing the Roll from the Print...

Page 816: ...oving the Roll Holder from Rolls P 797 8 Lower the Ejection Guide and close the Top Cover Note To load new paper in the printer at this point see Loading Rolls in the Printer P 786 Clean inside the top cover before loading paper See Cleaning Inside the Top Cover P 1040 Handling Paper Handling rolls Removing the Roll from the Printer iPF8300S 6 796 ...

Page 817: ...older Stopper at the position indica ted b remove it from the Roll Holder 2 Remove the Roll Holder from the roll 3 When removing attachments push the tips a in as you remove the attachment 3 Inch Paper Core Attachment 1 Roll Holder side Handling Paper Handling rolls iPF8300S Removing the Roll Holder from Rolls 6 797 ...

Page 818: ...ce may become scratched which may affect the printing quality when you use it again Feeding Roll Paper Manually After a roll has been advanced you can press the Feed button to feed or retract the roll with the and buttons 1 Press the Feed button 2 Press the or button to advance or retract the roll Press to retract the roll manually Press to advance the roll manually Handling Paper Handling rolls F...

Page 819: ...rolls with printed barcodes the type of paper and amount left are automatically detected after rolls are loaded The barcode will be cut off after it has been read Important If the barcode on the roll is not detected enter the type and length of paper on the Control Panel Follow these steps to set ManageRemainRoll to On as follows 1 On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel press or to selec...

Page 820: ...d or soiled or the paper surface may rub against the output stacker when the paper falls and the surface may be come soiled To wait for the ink to dry without allowing printed documents to fall after printing set Cutting Mode on the menu of the printer to Eject See Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls P 802 Windows 1 Display the printer driver dialog box See Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog ...

Page 821: ...n Pages and CBetween Scans in ADrying Time and then click OK See Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box Windows P 220 Mac OS X 1 Choose Print in the application menu 2 Select the Main pane and click CSettings in AMedia Type Handling Paper Handling rolls iPF8300S Specifying the Ink Drying Time for Rolls 6 801 ...

Page 822: ...ect this to move the cutter by key operation and cut paper Although there are cases with Automatic in which the paper falls and the pa per surface is scratched when the paper rubs the Output Stacker you can avoid damaging the pa per with this method since you can cut by hold ing the paper with your hand so that the paper does not fall when cutting Also since you can cut while visually confirming t...

Page 823: ...Cut Yes in the printer driver With Eject printing does not resume after a series of jobs have been printed continuously until the roll is cut Eject is the preset selection in Cutting Mode for some types of paper For this paper we recommend keep ing the preset cutting mode If documents printed using Automatic Eject or manual cutting are short rolls are advanced a specific amount before cutting to p...

Page 824: ...e OK button 4 Press or to select the type of paper and then press the OK button 5 Press or to select Cutting Mode and then press the OK button 6 Press or to select Eject and then press the OK button 7 Print the job When printing is finished the printer will stop without cutting 8 Holding the printed document to prevent it from dropping press the Cut button to cut the roll Handling Paper Handling r...

Page 825: ...to select Paper Details and then press the OK button 4 Press or to select the type of paper and then press the OK button 5 Press or to select Cutting Mode and then press the OK button 6 Press or to select Manual and then press the OK button 7 When Perform the detection of paper leading edge is displayed select Perform recommend 8 Print the job The printer stops advancing the paper after printing H...

Page 826: ...d cut position and then automatically stopped 10 Cut the roll paper manually with scissors or the like 11 Press the OK button After the roll is rewound it stops automatically Handling Paper Handling rolls Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls iPF8300S 6 806 ...

Page 827: ...K button 6 Press or to select Manual and then press the OK button 7 When Perform the detection of paper leading edge is displayed select Do not perform Note If you set the detection of paper leading edge to Do not perform a margin of about 10 cm is created at the paper leading edge when printing starts When the detection of paper leading edge is set to Do not perform printing will start at the pos...

Page 828: ... can continue to receive print jobs from computers If a print job is received and printed here it can be printed without the margin of about 10 cm being created at the paper leading edge 11 Press the Feed button Roll paper is fed to the specified cut position and then automatically stopped Handling Paper Handling rolls Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls iPF8300S 6 808 ...

Page 829: ...e dotted line the paper leading edge may rub against the printhead and may deviate from the paper retainer 13 Press the OK button After the roll is rewound it stops automatically Paper cutting to have the roll cut at your specified position 1 Press the Feed button Handling Paper Handling rolls iPF8300S Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls 6 809 ...

Page 830: ...e printer cut the leading edge to make the edge straight after you load a roll Trim Edge First offers the following options Automatic If the left and right side of the leading edge of the roll a and b are uneven by 40 mm 1 6 in or more when you load the roll the edge is cut an amount relative to the slant to ensure a straight edge and scraps are removed The edge is not cut if the unevenness is les...

Page 831: ...n the type of paper For more information see the Paper Reference Guide See Types of Paper P 774 Follow these steps to change the Trim Edge First setting 1 On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel press or to select the Paper tab Note If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed press the Menu button 2 Press the OK button The Paper Menu is displayed 3 Press or to select Paper Details and th...

Page 832: ...tting and cause paper jams Borderless printing is not available when CutDustReduct is set to On To use borderless printing select CutDustReduct Off Set CutDustReduct to On as follows 1 On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel press or to select the Paper tab Note If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed press the Menu button 2 Press the OK button The Paper Menu is displayed 3 Press or ...

Page 833: ... prevent the roll from unwinding if you leave it loaded wrap a sheet of paper around the roll and tape it Before loading sheets make sure the printer is clean inside the Top Cover and around the Ejection Guide If these areas are dirty we recommend cleaning them in advance See Cleaning Inside the Top Cover P 1040 Store unused paper in the original package away from high temperature humidity and dir...

Page 834: ...Note If any paper has been advanced that will not be used a message is shown requesting you to remove it Press or to select Yes and then press the OK button Remove the paper and go to the next step 2 Lift the Release Lever and open the Top Cover Handling Paper Handling sheets Loading Sheets in the Printer iPF8300S 6 814 ...

Page 835: ... and printing side up insert it between the Platen a and the Paper Retainer b Align the edges of the sheet as follows 1 Align the sheet with the Paper Alignment Line c at right 2 Align the inserted edge of the sheet with the leading edge of the Paper Alignment Line d as shown Handling Paper Handling sheets iPF8300S Loading Sheets in the Printer 6 815 ...

Page 836: ... settings are available However even if you increase the suction it may not be sufficient to hold some types of paper against the Platen well In this case use your hand to load the paper Sheets are held in place by suction through holes on the Platen Although the suction may produce a noise when paper is loaded in some positions it does not indicate a problem If the noise is distract ing try movin...

Page 837: ...ypes of paper to select see the Paper Reference Guide See Types of Paper P 774 When using the Output Stacker if you will print on large stiff sheets we recommend adjusting the Output Stacker into the lowest position to prevent printed sheets from being bent See Using the Output Stacker P 823 Printing From a Desired Starting Point Print on sheets from a desired starting point as follows Set Width D...

Page 838: ...If you did not send a print job in advance a menu for selection of the type of paper is displayed Press or to select the type of paper and then press the OK button Note If a print job was received before paper was advanced the media type and size specified by the job are shown on the Display Screen Thus this screen is not displayed Go to step 2 2 Width Detection OFF OK to continue is now shown on ...

Page 839: ...the right edge of the paper aligned with the extended line of the paper alignment line a on the right side of the printer and the position from which to start printing aligned with the groove b at the far end of the platen load the paper Handling Paper Handling sheets iPF8300S Printing From a Desired Starting Point 6 819 ...

Page 840: ... select the Paper tab Note If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed press the Menu button 2 Press the OK button The Paper Menu is displayed 3 Press or to select Eject Paper and then press the OK button 4 Press or to select Yes and then press the OK button The paper is ejected from the front of the printer Handling Paper Handling sheets Removing Sheets iPF8300S 6 820 ...

Page 841: ...5 Open the Top Cover lift the Release Lever and remove the sheet 6 Lower the Release Lever and close the Top Cover Handling Paper Handling sheets iPF8300S Removing Sheets 6 821 ...

Page 842: ... 823 Storing the Output Stacker 829 Output Stacker a Output Stacker A cloth tray that catches ejected documents b White tag A point of reference for attaching the Output Stacker in the right direction Handling Paper Output Stacker Output Stacker iPF8300S 6 822 ...

Page 843: ...e cloth Output Stacker securely in specific positions e Basket Rod Keeps Basket Arm R and Basket Arm L at the same angle f Rod Holder Holds the middle of the Basket Rod cord side See Using the Output Stacker P 823 Using the Output Stacker The Output Stacker can be held at four positions as shown When storing printed documents on the Output Stacker Use position 1 Handling Paper Output Stacker iPF83...

Page 844: ... use it in position 1 If you do not printed documents may not be dropped into the Output Stacker and the printed surface may become soiled The Output Stacker can hold one sheet When printing multiple pages remove each sheet after it is printed Before using the Output Stacker remove the Rewind Spool If you do not it may prevent printed documents from being held correctly and they may be scratched T...

Page 845: ...reful when using delicate paper or paper that curls easily Depending on the type of paper the edge may curl or bend during ejection In this case straighten out the paper If the paper is curled or bent it may damage printed documents Some types of paper may get caught between the Ejection Guide and Output Stacker during ejection In this case free the paper from where it is caught If the paper is ca...

Page 846: ...tacker from the printer Remove the front Basket Rod from the left and right basket arms and remove the back Basket Rod and black cord from the Rod Holder Handling Paper Output Stacker Using the Output Stacker iPF8300S 6 826 ...

Page 847: ...ext with the Rod Holder still attached remove the Rod Holder Adapter and put it in front of the printer 4 Pull out the left and right Basket Hooks from the Ejection Guide Handling Paper Output Stacker iPF8300S Using the Output Stacker 6 827 ...

Page 848: ...oks so that the white tag of the Basket Cloth is on the left 6 Form the Basket Cloth into a sloping shape to make it taut and attach the middle Basket Rod to the Rod Holder Handling Paper Output Stacker Using the Output Stacker iPF8300S 6 828 ...

Page 849: ... in the position used when storing printed documents a lift the front Basket Rod gently to release the lock lower the stacker toward the front b and push it all the way back 2 Remove the front Basket Rod from the left and right basket arms Roll up the Basket Cloth and put it at the back of the Bottom Stand Stay Handling Paper Output Stacker iPF8300S Storing the Output Stacker 6 829 ...

Page 850: ...th and Basket Rod so they do not inter fere with the Media Take up Sensor wave portion This may impair operation 3 Push in the left and right basket arms toward the back all the way until they stop Handling Paper Output Stacker Storing the Output Stacker iPF8300S 6 830 ...

Page 851: ...ously Note For instructions on installing the Media Take up Unit refer to the Media Take up Unit Setup Guide For information on the types of paper compatible with the Media Take up Unit refer to the Paper Reference Guide See Types of Paper P 774 For Media Take up Unit instructions see Using the Media Take up Unit Optional P 831 Using the Media Take up Unit Optional 1 Turn the printer on See Turnin...

Page 852: ...ing time before the final check of colors and do not remove printed documents from the Media Take up Unit too soon In humid environments documents printed using plenty of ink on relatively insubstantial media such as light weight Coated Paper may not be retracted evenly by the unit In this case take steps to control humidity in the operating environment or adjust the Roll DryingTime setting so tha...

Page 853: ...t the Release Lever and cut the roll with scissors instead of pressing the Cut button 3 On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel press or to select the Settings Adj tab Note If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed press the Menu button 4 Press the OK button The Set Adj Menu is displayed 5 Press or to select Take up Reel and then press the OK button 6 Press or to select Use Take up Ree...

Page 854: ...r before this procedure See Storing the Output Stack er P 829 Important Position the Basket Cloth and Basket Rod so they do not interfere with the Media Take up Sensor wave portion This may impair operation Handling Paper Media take up unit Loading the Rewind Spool on the Media Take up Unit iPF8300S 6 834 ...

Page 855: ...y lifting the lever a from the shaft side Remove the flange 3 When rewinding rolls with 3 inch paper cores insert the 3 inch Adapter on the flanges at both ends Handling Paper Media take up unit iPF8300S Loading the Rewind Spool on the Media Take up Unit 6 835 ...

Page 856: ...nges in firmly until the paper core is secured in place and push down the lever a toward the shaft Important After the flange is pressed strongly confirm that the paper core does not move If you can hold and move the paper core leftward and rightward and there is clearance between the flange and paper core repeat procedures 2 to 4 If there is clearance a rewinding problem may result Handling Paper...

Page 857: ...on 7 On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel press or to select the Settings Adj tab Note If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed press the Menu button 8 Press the OK button The Set Adj Menu is displayed 9 Press or to select Take up Reel and then press the OK button 10 Press or to select Auto Feed and then press the OK button The roll is now advanced to the Media Take up Unit Handlin...

Page 858: ...r evenly taut tape the middle to the paper core to fasten it 12 Making sure the roll paper is not slack tape the left and right side of the leading edge to the paper core Note When rewinding heavyweight paper use strong adhesive tape to fasten it Otherwise a rewinding problem may result Handling Paper Media take up unit Loading the Rewind Spool on the Media Take up Unit iPF8300S 6 838 ...

Page 859: ...mportant Rewind the paper so that the paper core makes at least two revolutions If the paper is not rewound two full revolutions repeat steps 13 and 14 Do not manually force the Rewind Spool or paper core to rotate them This may damage them To rewind or unwind rolls press or on the Media Take up Unit Handling Paper Media take up unit iPF8300S Loading the Rewind Spool on the Media Take up Unit 6 83...

Page 860: ...lange you can use A Color Label is applied to each Weight Roll Weight Roll Roll Width Weight Roll to Use B2 Width 515 0 mm 20 3 in D B1 Width 728 0 mm 28 7 in A E B0 Width 1 030 0 mm 40 6 in A G A1 Width 594 0 mm 23 4 in E A0 Width 841 0 mm 33 1 in B E 431 8 mm 17 in C 609 6 mm 24 in E 762 0 mm 30 in B D 914 4 mm 36 in G 1 066 8 mm 42 in C E 1 117 6 mm 44 in D E Handling Paper Media take up unit L...

Page 861: ...aper See Automatic Banding Adjustment Adj Quality P 857 Important Do not use combinations other than those identified here Insert the Weight Flange and Weight Joint firmly on the Weight Roll Use identical Weight Flange on the left and right ends Insert matching Weight Flanges 1 or 2 on both ends of the Weight Roll Note Keep unused weight rolls weight joints and weight flanges handy by putting them...

Page 862: ...uments from the Media Take up Unit Optional 1 Press the Feed button 2 Hold down the button to advance the roll a little To protect the paper that has been rewound advance it an amount longer than the outer circumference Handling Paper Media take up unit Removing Printed Documents from the Media Take up Unit Optional iPF8300S 6 842 ...

Page 863: ...cument press the OK button The roll is now cut Important Always hold the trailing edge of printed documents when cutting rolls If you do not hold the docu ments they may fall on the floor and the printed surface may become soiled Handling Paper Media take up unit iPF8300S Removing Printed Documents from the Media Take up Unit Optional 6 843 ...

Page 864: ...ocument Apply adhesive tape to the rewound paper to hold it in place if necessary Important Be careful not to scratch the printed surface 7 Turn off the Media Take up Unit by pushing in the Rewind Mode Switch Handling Paper Media take up unit Removing Printed Documents from the Media Take up Unit Optional iPF8300S 6 844 ...

Page 865: ...first Remove the Rewind Spool pulling off both ends from the Media Take up Unit at once If you do not pull off both ends at once the Media Take up Unit may become damaged 9 Unlock the flange on the left side of the Rewind Spool by lifting the lever a from the shaft side Remove the flange Handling Paper Media take up unit iPF8300S Removing Printed Documents from the Media Take up Unit Optional 6 84...

Page 866: ...ted documents from the Rewind Spool Note You can leave the Rewind Spool on the Media Take up Unit even when it is not used for rewinding rolls Handling Paper Media take up unit Removing Printed Documents from the Media Take up Unit Optional iPF8300S 6 846 ...

Page 867: ...stments for Better Print Quality Adjustment for high precision printing 848 Adjusting the Printhead 850 Adjusting the feed amount 856 Color adjustment 865 Adjustments for Better Print Quality iPF8300S 7 847 ...

Page 868: ...ther case roll paper only Thickness weight 300 μm or less or 300 g m or less Width 25 4 cm 10 in or more Standard Adjustment Perform standard adjustment with the Printhead height set to Automatic 1 Load paper in the printer Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls P 782 Loading Rolls in the Printer P 786 2 On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel press or to select the Settings Adj tab Note Auto...

Page 869: ...n the Printhead which may cause paper jams or soiling on printed documents 1 Set Head Height to Super Low See Troubleshooting Paper Abrasion and Blurry Images Head Height P 854 Note If Super Low is not available select Lowest 2 In Head Posi Adj select Auto Expansion Note If paper rubs against the Printhead or becomes jammed during Printhead height adjustment try select ing a higher level in Head H...

Page 870: ...ad Posi Adj P 850 See Manual Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors Head Posi Adj P 852 Paper rubs against the printhead or image edges are blurred Executing Head Height to adjust the printhead height may improve printing results See Troubleshooting Paper Abrasion and Blurry Images Head Height P 854 Automatic Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors Head Posi Adj If vertical lines in printed d...

Page 871: ... 848 Items to Prepare When Using Rolls An unused roll at least 10 inches wide When Using Sheets Auto Standard Three sheets of unused paper A4 Letter size or one sheet when using A2 Auto Advanced 11 sheets of unused paper A4 Letter size or three sheets when using A2 Auto Expansion Seven sheets of unused paper A4 Letter size or two sheets when using A2 Perform adjustment as follows 1 Load paper Atta...

Page 872: ...ion See Automatic Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors Head Posi Adj P 850 However when printing on special paper or if printing is not improved after Auto Advanced try Manual Manual adjustment requires you to examine the printed test pattern and enter an adjustment value Note We recommend using the type of paper you use most often for adjustment Items to Prepare When Using Rolls An unused ro...

Page 873: ...stment Note Manual may be unavailable in some cases even if it is displayed in the menu If so execute Auto Advanced once 7 Press or to select D and then press the OK button 8 Press or to select D 1 and then press the OK button 9 Examine adjustment test pattern D 1 and determine the number with straight lines Note If two patterns seem equally good and you cannot decide which one is better choose an...

Page 874: ...nd specifying a high Printhead height will prevent paper from rubbing against the Printhead but may reduce the printing quality Important Paper rubbing against or becoming caught on the Printhead may jam or result in printed documents that are soiled Note Raise or lower the printhead depending on the nature of the problem See Paper rubs against the printhead P 1072 See The edges of the paper are d...

Page 875: ...d Height and then press the OK button 6 Press or to select the desired setting value and then press the OK button Note Using Automatic will ensure that the printer adjusts the Printhead height to the optimal level before printing accounting for the ambient temperature and humidity When a setting other than Automatic is used that value will always be applied Depending on the type of paper some sett...

Page 876: ...lity P 859 See Adjusting Line Length Adjust Length P 861 3 After executing Adj Quality execute Adj Fine Feed for further adjustment as needed See Fine Tuning the Paper Feed Amount Adj Fine Feed P 861 Selecting a Feed Amount Adjustment Method Feed Priority Methods of adjusting the amount paper is fed are set in Adj Priority Adjust Adj Priority to suit your particular printing application Print Qual...

Page 877: ...on 3 Press the OK button The Set Adj Menu is displayed 4 Press or to select Adjust Printer and then press the OK button 5 Press or to select Feed Priority and then press the OK button 6 Press or to select Adj Priority and then press the OK button 7 Press or to select Automatic Print Quality or Print Length and then press the OK button Automatic Banding Adjustment Adj Quality If printed images are ...

Page 878: ...s are printed at exactly the right length See Adjusting Line Length Adjust Length P 861 This may take some time depending on the type of paper Items to Prepare When Using Rolls An unused roll at least 10 inches wide When Using Sheets Auto GenuinePpr One sheet of unused paper A4 Letter size Auto OtherPaper Two sheets of unused paper A4 Letter size or one sheet when using A2 Perform adjustment as fo...

Page 879: ...justment Adj Quality P 857 Manual adjustment requires you to enter an adjustment value after a test pattern is printed Note Use paper of the same type and size for adjustment as you will use for printing Always check the Adj Priority values before using Manual adjustment See Selecting a Feed Amount Adjustment Method Feed Priority P 856 If additional fine tuning is necessary after Manual adjustment...

Page 880: ...sheet 8 Examine test pattern A for adjustment Determine the pattern in which banding is least noticeable Note If banding seems least noticeable in two patterns but you cannot decide which one is better choose an intermediate value For example choose 11 if you cannot decide whether pattern 10 or 12 is better 9 Press or to select the pattern number you have decided and then press the OK button Test ...

Page 881: ... the Control Panel press or to select the Settings Adj tab Note If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed press the Menu button 2 Press the OK button The Set Adj Menu is displayed 3 Press or to select Adj Fine Feed and then press the OK button 4 Press or to select a setting value in the range 5 to 5 and then press the OK button The setting is now applied Adjusting Line Length Adjust Length To e...

Page 882: ... precision ruler When Using Sheets One sheet of unused paper of at least A4 Letter size High precision ruler Perform adjustment as follows 1 Load the paper Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls P 782 Loading Rolls in the Printer P 786 Loading Sheets in the Printer P 813 Important Always make sure the loaded paper matches the type of paper specified Adjustment cannot be com pleted correctly unless the...

Page 883: ... is shorter than the actual size use a positive setting value If it is longer use a negative value The feed amount can be adjusted in 0 02 increments Adjusting the Vacuum Strength VacuumStrngth When printing on heavyweight paper or paper that curls or wrinkles easily if the Printhead rubs against paper adjusting the level of suction against paper on the Platen may improve results Important Paper r...

Page 884: ...tic once you select the type of paper currently supplied However the value is cleared when the printer is turned off or the paper is replaced 5 Press or to select VacuumStrngth and then press the OK button 6 Press or to select the desired setting value and then press the OK button Adjustments for Better Print Quality Adjusting the feed amount Adjusting the Vacuum Strength VacuumStrngth iPF8300S 7 ...

Page 885: ...s of temperature and humidi ty each time If you execute color calibration under various conditions of temperature and humidity correct adjustment may not be possible If you execute color calibration with paper classified for common calibration continue to use the same type of paper for better color consistency If you execute color calibration with multiple paper types correct adjustment may not be...

Page 886: ...dvance according to the paper type for which calibration is to be executed To confirm the adjustment type in which calibration is to be classified refer to Paper that can be used in Color Calibration P 869 Common calibration If you execute color calibration with paper classified for common calibration the color calibration adjustment value is set for all print qualities of all paper types includin...

Page 887: ...der to Rolls P 782 Loading Rolls in the Printer P 786 Loading Sheets in the Printer P 813 3 On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel press or to select Settings Adj tab Note If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed press the Menu button 4 Press the OK button Set Adj Menu is displayed 5 Press or to select Adjust Printer and then press the OK button 6 Press or to select Calibration and t...

Page 888: ...figure Calibration Value See Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box Windows P 220 Configure on the printer driver menu Mac OS X Configure Calibration Value See Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box Mac OS X P 500 Configure on the menu of the Control Panel From Set Adj Menu select Adjust Printer Calibration Use Adj Value See Menu Settings P 938 After executing color calibration you can also adjust colors ...

Page 889: ...0 Available Available Available Common calibration Prem SemiGl2 280 Available Available Available Common calibration Poster Semi Gl Available Available Available Common calibration SatinPhoto 190 Available Available Available Common calibration Proofing Paper Available Not available Available Common calibration Proofing Paper3 Available Not available Available Unique calibration FineArt Photo Avai...

Page 890: ...aper information must be registered on the printer and the printer driver Download the new version of Media Information File from the Canon website and install it See Types of Paper P 774 To Confirm the Paper Information Registered on the Printer When confirming the paper information registered on the printer select Paper Details on the Control Panel menu and print the detailed information of the ...

Page 891: ...to adjust the color tone for the ambient light as follows By selecting color tones on Chart before printing On the printed Chart note the number of the set of colors with the desired color tone and enter this number in the printer driver before printing Important This function is only supported in Windows and Mac OS X 10 4 or later The colors in this function may differ slightly depending on the s...

Page 892: ...from the User Software CD ROM 1 Choose Print in the application menu 2 Select the printer in the dialog box and then display the printer driver dialog box See Accessing the Printer Driv er Dialog Box from Applications Windows P 211 3 Make sure the Main sheet is displayed 4 In the AMedia Type list select the type of paper that is loaded for example Glossy Photo Paper HG 170 Important You can execut...

Page 893: ...an execute Ambient Light Adjust only when FPrint Quality is set to High 7 Click Color in the GColor Mode list 8 Click HColor Settings to display the Color Settings dialog box Adjustments for Better Print Quality Color adjustment iPF8300S Selecting Color Tones on Charts Before Printing Windows 7 873 ...

Page 894: ... file was opened in CColor Space and the monitor color tempera ture in DMonitor White Point 11 Select EUse ambient light adjustment 12 Click FAmbient Light Adjust to display the Ambient Light Adjust dialog box 13 Confirm that By selecting a chart number is selected in ASetting Method If it is not selected already select it Adjustments for Better Print Quality Color adjustment Selecting Color Tones...

Page 895: ... Light Source Check Tool now starts up 15 Check the settings and click DPrint The Chart is printed Adjustments for Better Print Quality Color adjustment iPF8300S Selecting Color Tones on Charts Before Printing Windows 7 875 ...

Page 896: ...heet enter the DColor Temperature and EIlluminance as measured during monitor calibration 19 Click OK 20 Confirm the print settings and print as desired Selecting Color Tones on Charts Before Printing Mac OS X Print Chart note the number of the chart with your desired color tone and enter this number in the printer driver before printing 1 Choose Print in the application menu 2 Select the printer ...

Page 897: ...ed for example Glossy Photo Paper HG 170 Important You can execute Ambient Light Adjust only when FPrint Quality is set to High 5 Click DAdvanced Settings to switch the print mode Adjustments for Better Print Quality Color adjustment iPF8300S Selecting Color Tones on Charts Before Printing Mac OS X 7 877 ...

Page 898: ...g panel 10 Make sure Driver Matching Mode is selected in AMatching Mode Note To specify monitor matching select Monitor Matching in BMatching Method In this case select the same color space as when the file was opened in CColor Space and the monitor color tempera ture in DMonitor White Point 11 Select EUse ambient light adjustment Adjustments for Better Print Quality Color adjustment Selecting Col...

Page 899: ... that By selecting a chart number is selected in ASetting Method If it is not selected already select it 14 Click BPrint Chart Light Source Check Tool now starts up Adjustments for Better Print Quality Color adjustment iPF8300S Selecting Color Tones on Charts Before Printing Mac OS X 7 879 ...

Page 900: ...people the blue of the sky and the red of the strawberries look the most natural overall 17 In the Ambient Light Adjust dialog box select the number of your preferred chart in CChart Number 18 If Matching Method is set to Monitor Matching on the Matching panel enter the DColor Temperature and EIlluminance as measured during monitor calibration Adjustments for Better Print Quality Color adjustment ...

Page 901: ...provided with the Light Source Measure Tool 1 Using the i1 spectrophotometer and the Light Source Measure Tool determine the Lighting Source Type Color Temperature and Illuminance in the viewing environment Note For detailed instructions on the i1 and Light Source Measure Tool refer to the provided instructions 2 Choose Print in the application menu 3 Select the printer in the dialog box and then ...

Page 902: ...k DAdvanced Settings to switch the print mode 7 In FPrint Quality click High Important You can execute Ambient Light Adjust only when FPrint Quality is set to High 8 Click Color in the GColor Mode list 9 Click HColor Settings to display the Color Settings dialog box Adjustments for Better Print Quality Color adjustment Printing in Colors Matching the Measured Ambient Light Windows iPF8300S 7 882 ...

Page 903: ...me color space as when the file was opened in CColor Space and the monitor color tempera ture in DMonitor White Point 12 Select EUse ambient light adjustment 13 Click FAmbient Light Adjust to display the Ambient Light Adjust dialog box 14 Select By entering values directly in ASetting Method Adjustments for Better Print Quality Color adjustment iPF8300S Printing in Colors Matching the Measured Amb...

Page 904: ...rinting Important This function requires the i1 spectrophotometer The Light Source Measure Tool must also be installed You can install the Light Source Measure Tool from the User Software CD ROM For a list of supported i1 devices refer to the manual provided with the Light Source Measure Tool 1 Using the i1 spectrophotometer and the Light Source Measure Tool determine the Lighting Source Type Colo...

Page 905: ...or example Glossy Photo Paper HG 170 Important You can execute Ambient Light Adjust only when FPrint Quality is set to High 6 Click DAdvanced Settings to switch the print mode Adjustments for Better Print Quality Color adjustment iPF8300S Printing in Colors Matching the Measured Ambient Light Mac OS X 7 885 ...

Page 906: ...anel 11 Make sure Driver Matching Mode is selected in AMatching Mode Note To specify monitor matching select Monitor Matching in BMatching Method In this case select the same color space as when the file was opened in CColor Space and the monitor color tempera ture in DMonitor White Point 12 Select EUse ambient light adjustment Adjustments for Better Print Quality Color adjustment Printing in Colo...

Page 907: ...ng Source Type and DColor Temperature determined in step 1 If you have selected Monitor Matching in Matching Method on the Matching panel also select EIlluminance 16 Click OK 17 Confirm the print settings and print as desired Adjustments for Better Print Quality Color adjustment iPF8300S Printing in Colors Matching the Measured Ambient Light Mac OS X 7 887 ...

Page 908: ... or these settings may not be configurable or adjustable depending on your monitor and the source application Note Printing in exactly the same colors as displayed on the monitor may not be possible due to differences in the monitor and printer color gamuts Calibrating your monitor requires a measuring device Because colors appear different under sunlight at different times of day we recommend fol...

Page 909: ...he file in the source application If you own an i1 Pro using Light Source Measure Tool enables more precision measurement of the ambient light Note If you will print repeatedly using the settings values you set this one time we recommend completing the settings by accessing the printer driver dialog box from the operating system menu See Ac cessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating ...

Page 910: ...loaded for example Glossy Photo Paper HG 170 Important You can execute Ambient Light Adjust only when FPrint Quality is set to High 5 Click DAdvanced Settings to switch the print mode Adjustments for Better Print Quality Color adjustment Printing Images to Match Monitor Colors Windows iPF8300S 7 890 ...

Page 911: ...thod select Monitor Matching 12 In CColor Space select the color space used when displaying the file in the source application 13 In DMonitor White Point select the white point set on the monitor Note For greater precision in monitor matching we recommend configuring the settings for ambient light matching See Printing in Ideal Colors for Light in the Viewing Environment P 871 14 Click OK 15 Confi...

Page 912: ...ages to Match Monitor Colors P 888 1 Choose Print in the application menu 2 Select the printer in the dialog box and then display the printer driver dialog box See Accessing the Printer Driv er Dialog Box from Applications Mac OS X P 494 3 Make sure the Main panel is displayed 4 In the AMedia Type list select the type of paper that is loaded for example Glossy Photo Paper HG 170 Important You can ...

Page 913: ...ant You can execute Ambient Light Adjust only when FPrint Quality is set to High 7 Click Color in the HColor Mode list 8 Click ISet to display the Color Settings dialog box Adjustments for Better Print Quality Color adjustment iPF8300S Printing Images to Match Monitor Colors Mac OS X 7 893 ...

Page 914: ...rce application 13 In DMonitor White Point select the white point set on the monitor Note For greater precision in monitor matching we recommend configuring the settings for ambient light matching See Printing in Ideal Colors for Light in the Viewing Environment P 871 14 Click OK 15 Confirm the print settings and print as desired Adjustments for Better Print Quality Color adjustment Printing Image...

Page 915: ...Printer Parts Printer parts 896 Hard Disk 906 Optional accessories 911 Printer Parts iPF8300S 8 895 ...

Page 916: ...d load paper and remove any jammed paper from inside the printer as needed See Top Cover Inside P 899 b Cutter Groove Paper is cut using the cutter or manually with scissors over this groove c Ejection Guide Guides printed documents as they are ejected Raise the guide when loading a roll d Roll Holder Slot Slide the Roll Holder into this slot Printer Parts Printer parts Front iPF8300S 8 896 ...

Page 917: ... k Control Panel Use this panel to operate the printer and check the printer status See Control Panel P 914 l Release Lever Releases the Paper Retainer Lift this lever toward the front of the printer when loading paper m Maintenance Cartridge Absorbs ink used for maintenance purposes such as head cleaning Replace the cartridge when it is full n Carrying Handles When carrying the printer have four ...

Page 918: ...dles under both sides b Media Take up Unit Power Inlet Connect the power cord of the optional Media Take up Unit here c Ethernet Port Connect an Ethernet cable to this port d USB Port Connect a USB cable to this port It supports Hi Speed USB Printer Parts Printer parts Back iPF8300S 8 898 ...

Page 919: ...ter manuals in this pocket f Power Supply Connector Connect the power cord to this connector Top Cover Inside a Top Cover Roller Prevents paper from rising when ejected Printer Parts Printer parts iPF8300S Top Cover Inside 8 899 ...

Page 920: ...ing inside the printer under the Top Cover use this brush to sweep away paper dust on the Platen Also use the brush to move the blue Switch on the Platen i Fixed Blade The Cutter Unit passes over this rail to cut paper j Linear Scale The linear scale serves a key role in detecting the Carriage position Be careful not to touch this part when cleaning inside the Top Cover or clearing paper jams k Sw...

Page 921: ...om becoming dirty h Cutter Unit Detachment Lever Used when replacing the Cutter Unit Ink Tank Cover Inside Left Side Right Side Note The figure shows the printer as loaded with 700 ml 23 7 fl oz Ink Tank a Ink tanks Cartridges of ink in various colors b Ink Tank Lock Lever A lever that locks the Ink Tank in place and protects it Lift and lower the lever when replacing an Ink Tank To open it lift t...

Page 922: ...e of the Ink Tank as follows when the Ink Tank Cover is opened On The Ink Tank is installed correctly Off No Ink Tank is installed or the ink level detection function is disabled Flashing Slowly Not much ink is left Flashing Rapidly Ink tank is empty Printer Parts Printer parts Ink Tank Cover Inside iPF8300S 8 902 ...

Page 923: ... Media Take up Unit to this part d Bottom Stand Stay Supports Stand L and Stand R e Leg Covers Covers for Stand L and Stand R f Stopper Locks the Stand casters Always release the Stopper before moving the printer Moving the printer while the Stopper is locked may scratch the casters or the floor Printer Parts Printer parts iPF8300S Stand 8 903 ...

Page 924: ... up Unit Power button and buttons to advance or rewind paper and a power cord c Rewind Spool Winds documents printed on rolls d 3 inch Adapter When rewinding rolls with 3 inch paper cores attach the adapter to the Rewind Spool e Media Take up Sensor A sensor for automatically rewinding rolls Weight Printer Parts Printer parts Media Take up Unit Optional iPF8300S 8 904 ...

Page 925: ...ll width b Weight Joint Fastens two weight rolls c Weight Flange 2 sets Attached to the ends of Weight Roll to adjust the weight Use Weight Flange 1 or Weight Flange 2 depending on the type of paper See Loading the Rewind Spool on the Media Take up Unit P 834 Printer Parts Printer parts iPF8300S Media Take up Unit Optional 8 905 ...

Page 926: ... No No No Print without saving jobs in the shared mailbox No No No Yes Save print jobs sent from sources other than the printer driver No No No Yes Operations with saved jobs Print saved jobs No Yes Yes Yes Delete saved jobs No Yes Yes Yes Job queue management Display job queue No Yes Yes Yes Delete No Yes Yes Yes Priority No Yes Yes Yes Mail box management Move saved jobs No Yes Yes No Modify sav...

Page 927: ...r to select the Job tab Note If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed press the Menu button 2 Press the OK button The Job Menu is displayed 3 Press or to select HDD Information and then press the OK button Using RemoteUI To view the box list select Stored Job in Job Management On the Stored Job page the free hard disk space is shown in the upper right corner when boxes are listed For details r...

Page 928: ...eet shows the free hard disk space For details refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help file Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor The Hard Disk pane shows the free hard disk space Printer Parts Hard Disk Checking the Free Hard Disk Space iPF8300S 8 908 ...

Page 929: ...ure Overwrites the entire hard disk with 00 FF and random data one time each Verification is performed to check if the data was correctly written Choose this method to erase especially confidential data It is virtually impossible to recover the overwritten data Conforms to the DoD5220 22 M standard of the U S Department of Defense Important For a more secure method of preventing data recovery we r...

Page 930: ...n this case enter the password and press the OK button to go to the next step As for the time required for deletion confirm it on the Control Panel However when High Speed is selected this finishes in several seconds 6 Press the OK button to start erasure After the printer hard disk is erased the printer automatically restarts Printer Parts Hard Disk Erasing Data on the Printer s Hard Disk iPF8300...

Page 931: ...t attachment for the particular paper core See Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls P 782 Roll Holder Set RH2 44 Roll Holder for 2 and 3 inch paper cores Attachments Using the 2 Inch Paper Core Attachment Using the 3 Inch Paper Core Attachment 2 Inch Paper Core Attachment 3 Inch Paper Core Attachment 1 3 Inch Paper Core Attachment 2 Media Take up Unit Automatically winds documents printed on rolls P...

Page 932: ...e Media Take up Unit Setup Guide For information on the types of paper compatible with the Media Take up Unit refer to the Paper Reference Guide For Media Take up Unit instructions see Using the Media Take up Unit Optional P 831 Printer Parts Optional accessories Media Take up Unit iPF8300S 8 912 ...

Page 933: ...Control Panel Operations and Display Screen 914 Printer Menu 924 Control Panel iPF8300S 9 913 ...

Page 934: ...r processing print jobs Otherwise this lamp flashes when the print job is paused or the printer is updating the firmware Off There are no active print jobs when the Data lamp is off c Message Lamp orange On A warning message is displayed Flashing An error message is displayed Off The printer is off or is operating normally d Menu button Displays the Tab Selection screen See Menu Settings P 938 e A...

Page 935: ...e Printer On and Off P 3 The Power button is lit when the printer is on or in Sleep mode i Navigate button Enables you to check instructions for loading and removing paper or replacing ink tanks or printheads as well as other operations See How to View Instructions With Navigate P 919 j Back button Displays the screen before the current screen k Cut button Pressing this button when rolls are loade...

Page 936: ...hted Middle line displayed Indicates the printer status and shows menu names Bottom line displayed Here the remaining ink level is indicated See Checking Ink Tank Levels P 1008 Job tab A tab indicating status and showing menus related to print jobs Pressing the OK button when this tab is highlighted will display the Job Menu menu Top line displayed The job icon is highlighted Middle line displayed...

Page 937: ...nter is in power saving mode The printer automatically enters Sleep mode to con serve power when idle for a specific period by default five minutes that is if no print jobs are received or buttons are pressed while all covers are closed You can specify the period before the printer enters Sleep mode in the Sleep Timer menu See Menu Settings P 938 After entering Sleep mode from Standby mode the pri...

Page 938: ... period by default five minutes that is if no print jobs are received or buttons are pressed while all covers are closed However it does not enter Sleep mode while error messages are displayed or when a roll can be manually advanced by pressing the Feed button Control Panel Operations and Display Screen Control Panel Display iPF8300S 9 918 ...

Page 939: ...hose errors If multiple errors occur that are related to the Job tab and Settings Adj tab each error message is displayed for 4 seconds on each tab before another message is shown How to View Instructions With Navigate You can refer to instructions for loading paper replacing ink tanks and performing other operations on the printer control panel 1 Press the Navigate button 2 Press or to select the...

Page 940: ... Example Loading sheets Control Panel Operations and Display Screen How to View Instructions With Navigate iPF8300S 9 920 ...

Page 941: ...ctions Once you complete an action described in the instructions the printer detects the action and switches to the next instruction screen In the case of actions the printer cannot detect instruction screens are switched every four seconds and the sequence of operations is shown repeatedly Control Panel Operations and Display Screen iPF8300S Checking Instructions During Printer Operations 9 921 ...

Page 942: ...in the sequence are finished the instruction screen for the next step is displayed Example Ink tank replacement Control Panel Operations and Display Screen Checking Instructions During Printer Operations iPF8300S 9 922 ...

Page 943: ...n Press the or button to display the previous or next screens If you do not press the or button within 30 seconds continuous display is resumed Press the OK button to display the instruction screen for the next step Control Panel Operations and Display Screen iPF8300S Checking Instructions During Printer Operations 9 923 ...

Page 944: ...ng operations are available from the menu Paper Menu Paper menu settings Ink Menu Ink menu operations Job Menu Menu operations to manage print jobs Set Adj Menu Menu operations for printer adjustment and maintenance For a description of specific menu items available see Menu Settings P 938 For instructions on selecting menu items see Menu Operations P 925 Note By default menu settings apply to all...

Page 945: ...ized on tabs select a tab on the Tab Selection screen and press the OK button For details see Menu Settings P 938 Menus when the Ink tab is selected and the OK button is pressed Note If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed press the Menu button Simply press buttons on the Control Panel to access menus on various tabs from the Tab Selection screen and set or exe cute Menu items The following s...

Page 946: ...all menu items are displayed hold down or to scroll through higher and lower menu items Items you select are highlighted The scroll bar at right indicates the current position in the overall menu Lower menus are available if is displayed at left next to the second and subsequent rows To access the lower me nus select the menu and press the OK button Control Panel Printer Menu Menu Operations iPF83...

Page 947: ...umerical values Follow these steps to enter numbers In this example network settings items are entered 1 Press the or button to move to the next field for input 2 Press the or button to enter the value Note Hold down or to increase or decrease the value continuously 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to complete the settings and then press the OK button Note If a confirmation message is displayed regarding th...

Page 948: ...ings P 938 Paper Menu First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level Load Paper Roll Paper Cut Sheet Eject Paper Chg Paper Type 1 P 930 Roll Paper The paper type is displayed here 1 P 930 Cut Sheet The paper type is displayed here 1 P 930 Chg Paper Size Sheet Size The size of paper is displayed here 2 P 930 CustomPaperSize Set the length and width Roll Length 3 P 930 Set the length ...

Page 949: ...edge detection is dis played Cut Speed Fast Standard Slow Trim Edge First Automatic Off On CutDustReduct Off On VacuumStrngth Automatic Strongest Strong Standard Weak Weakest Scan Wait Time Dry time Off 1 sec 3 sec 5 sec 7 sec 9 sec Area 5 P 930 Entire area Leading edge Roll DryingTime Off 30 sec 1 min 3 min 5 min 10 min 30 min 60 min NearEnd RollMrgn 5mm 20mm Control Panel Printer Menu iPF8300S M...

Page 950: ...779 2 For information on the sizes of paper the printer supports see Paper Sizes P 775 3 Available only if ManageRemainRoll is On 4 Available only if Width Detection is Off 5 Leading edge is not available as a setting option in the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box of the printer driv er 6 see Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls P 802 Ink Menu First Level Rep Ink Tank Head Cleaning A Job Menu...

Page 951: ...s Head Height Temp Humidity Adjustment req Print Job Log Pause Print Off On HDD Information Total capacity Box free space 1 If a pending job is selected Print Anyway is displayed Set Adj Menu First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Lev el Fifth Level Sixth Level Seventh Level Test Print Nozzle Check Status Print Interface Print Paper Details Print Job Log Menu Map Adjust Printer Head Posi Adj ...

Page 952: ...on Auto Adjust Calibration Log Date Paper Type Adjustment Type Use Adj Value Disabled Enabled Set Exec Guide Off On Return Defaults Mainte nance Head Cleaning Head Cleaning A Head Cleaning B Nozzle Check Replace P head Printhead L Printhead R L R Printheads Repl maint cart Head Info Printhead L ProductName s n Days elapsed Count Mdot Printhead R ProductName s n Days elapsed Count Mdot Repl S Clean...

Page 953: ...gs 9 P 938 IP Address xxx xxx xxx xxx Subnet Mask xxx xxx xxx xxx Default G W xxx xxx xxx xxx DNS Set tings 9 P 938 DNS Dync update On Off Pri DNS SrvAddr Sec DNS SrvAddr DNS Host Name DNS Domain Name IPv6 IPv6 Sup port On Off IPv6 Stles sAddrs 10 P 938 On Off DHCPv6 10 P 938 On Off DNS Set tings 9 P 938 10 P 938 DNS Dync update Statefull Addr On Off Stateless Addr On Off Pri DNS SrvAddr Sec DNS S...

Page 954: ...hernet SNAP Print Serv ice 5 P 938 BinderyPServer RPrinter NDSPServer NPrinter AppleTalk 8 P 938 On Off Ethernet Driver 8 P 938 Auto Detect On Off Comm Mod e 6 P 938 Half Duplex Full Duplex Ethernet Type 6 P 938 10 Base T 100 Base TX 1000 Base T Spanning Tree Not Use Use MAC Ad dress xxxxxxxxxxxx Interface Print 8 P 938 Return Defaults 8 P 938 System Set up Sleep Timer 11 P 938 5 min 10 min 15 min...

Page 955: ...j 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 Date Time 8 P 938 Date yyyy mm dd 7 P 938 Time hh mm Date For mat 8 P 938 yyyy mm dd dd mm yyyy mm dd yyyy Language Time Zone 8 P 938 0 London GMT 1 Paris Rome 2 Athens Cairo 3 Moscow 4 Eerevan Baku 5 Islamabad 6 Dacca 7 Bangkok 8 Hong Kong 9 Tokyo Seoul 10 Canberra 11NewCaledonia 12 Wellington Control Panel Printer Menu iPF8300S Menu Structure 9 935 ...

Page 956: ...Length Unit meter feet inch Detect Mis match Pause Warning None Hold Job Paper Size Basis Sht Selec tion 1 ISO A3 13 x19 Super B Sht Selec tion 2 ISO B1 28 x40 ANSI F Keep Paper Size Off On Rep P head Print Off On Nozzle Check Frequency Standard 1 page Warning Off On CarriageS canWdth Automatic Fixed Use Remo teUI 8 P 938 On Off Reset PaprSetngs 8 P 938 Erase HDD Data High Speed 8 P 938 Secure Hig...

Page 957: ...ake up Reel 12 P 938 Use Take up Reel Disable Enable Auto Feed 13 P 938 Skip Take Up Err 14 P 938 Off On Prep Move Printer Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Admin Menu 8 P 938 Change Password 9 P 938 The screen for setting the password is displayed Init Admin Pswd 9 P 938 Printer Info Paper Info Ink Info Head Info ProductName s n Days elapsed Count Mdot Printhead L ProductName s n Days elapsed Count Mdot Pr...

Page 958: ...it is attached 13 Available if a Use Take up Reel is Enable b roll paper is loaded and c you have not executed Auto Feed for the loaded roll 14 Available when Use Take up Reel is Enable Menu Settings Menu items are as follows For instructions on selecting menu items see Menu Operations P 925 For details on menu levels and values see Menu Structure P 928 Paper Menu Setting Item Description Instruct...

Page 959: ...icking to the cutter and keeps the cutter sharp Trim Edge First If a roll is loaded the end of the paper will be cut CutDustRe duct If you choose On a line will be printed at the cut position when paper cutting is selected This option reduces the amount of debris given off after cutting It also helps prevent adhesive from sticking to the cutter and keeps the cutter sharp if you use adhesive paper ...

Page 960: ...ault values Paper Details Print the paper settings as specified in Paper Details Keep Paper Type Select On when printing on a particular type of paper regular ly See Changing the Type of Paper P 791 1 For information on the types of paper the printer supports refer to the Paper Reference Guide See Paper Ref erence Guide Types of paper in the printer driver and related software as well as on the Co...

Page 961: ... was consumed per job 1 P 941 Print settings A counter for maintenance purposes Indicates job print settings Head Height A counter for maintenance purposes Indicates the head height when jobs wereprinted Temp Humidity A counter for maintenance purposes Indicates the temper ature and humiditywhen jobs were printed Adjustment req A counter for maintenance purposes Indicates adjustment conditions app...

Page 962: ...c adjustment of Printhead alignment relative to the printing direction and spacing between nozzles and colors Adjustment is performed at a higher level of precision than Auto Advanced See Automatic Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors Head Posi Adj P 850 Manual Print a test pattern for adjustment of Printhead align ment relative to the printing direction Enter the ad justment value manually b...

Page 963: ... that tends to stretch increase the feed amount by choosing a higher adjustment value For paper that tends to shrink decrease the feed amount by choosing a lower adjustment value B Standard Draft Cali bration Auto Adjust Choose Yes for automatic adjustment of the adjust ment value after a test pattern for color calibration is printed Calibration Log The Date Paper Type and Adjustment Type for whic...

Page 964: ...cing the Maintenance Cartridge P 1028 Head Info Printhead L Indicates information about the printhead Printhead R Repl S Cleaner Replace the Shaft Cleaner Follow the instructions displayed to complete the required procedure See Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge P 1028 Change Cutter Replace the Cutter Unit Follow the instructions dis played to complete the required procedure See Re placing the Cu...

Page 965: ...e DNS domain name Net Ware NetWare Specify the NetWare protocol To apply your changes choose Register Setting Frame Type Specify the frame type to use Print Service Choose the print service AppleTalk Specify whether to use the AppleTalk protocol To ap ply your changes choose Register Setting Ether net Driver Auto Detect Specify the communication method To apply your changes choose Register Setting...

Page 966: ...r cumstances Choose Warning to continue printing af ter notification Choose None to continue printing without notification Choose Hold Job to store jobs with mismatched types and sizes of paper on the print er hard disk in a print queue awaiting processing See Using the Printer Hard Disk P 720 Paper Size Basis Sht Selection 1 If sheet size detection is activated choose whether ISO A3 or 13 x19 Sup...

Page 967: ...th Media Configuration Tool to the default values Erase HDD Data High Speed Erases file management data for print job data stored on the printer s hard disk See Erasing Data on the Printer s Hard Disk P 909 Secure High Spd Overwrites the entire hard disk with random data See Erasing Data on the Printer s Hard Disk P 909 Secure Overwrites the entire hard disk with 00 FF and ran dom data one time ea...

Page 968: ...ng if a take up error occurs Prep MovePrinter When transferring the printer to another location choose the level of transfer and follow the instructions on the screen See Preparing to Transfer the Print er P 1044 Not displayed during a warning message that the re maining Maintenance Cartridge capacity is low Admin Menu Change Password By setting a password you can restrict menu display and configu...

Page 969: ...s see Menu Operations P 925 For details on menu levels and values see Menu Structure P 928 Ink Menu Setting Item Description Instructions Rep Ink Tank Replace the Ink Tank at this point Follow the instructions displayed to complete the required procedure See Replacing Ink Tanks P 997 Head Cleaning A Clean the Printhead See Cleaning the Printhead P 1012 Execute Head Cleaning A if printing is faint ...

Page 970: ...rough estimate of how much ink was consumed per job 1 P 950 Print Job Log Print a record of print jobs in cluding the paper type and size amount of ink consumed and so on Ink consumption indicates a rough estimate of the amount of ink consumed per print job 1 P 950 Pause Print If you set this option to On printing is stopped at that point and the printer enters a state in which printing is paused ...

Page 971: ...of the printer Status Print You can print a Status Print report indicating the current status of the printer With Status Print information is printed regarding the printer firmware version various settings and the status of consum ables Printing Status Print reports 1 Load paper When using sheets load paper of A4 Letter size You will need at least four sheets The required sheet quantity varies dep...

Page 972: ...ManageRemainRoll Keep Paper Type Job Menu Job related information Job Log A counter for maintenance purposes Various information about previous jobs HDD Information Indicates the total hard disk capacity and the mail box free space Total capacity Box free space Set Adj Menu Settings and adjustment information System Setup Printer system settings as well as settings re garding warnings and errors S...

Page 973: ...tes the date when calibration was per formed and the type of paper used Paper Type Use Adj Value A setting value indicating whether color cali bration adjustment values are to be applied to printing Set Exec Guide A setting value indicating whether to display a message recommending the execution of color calibration Take up Reel Settings regarding the Media Take up Unit Use Take up Reel Skip Take ...

Page 974: ...justment settings Calibration Color calibration settings Calibration Log Unique Calibra tion A record of when unique calibration was per formed No Log number Paper Type Indicates the date when calibration was per formed and the type of paper used Date Printing Interface Setting Reports You can print an Interface Print report indicating the current interface settings values of the printer Interface...

Page 975: ...the Interface Print report Canon imagePROGRAF iPFxxxx Interface Print Printer model Firm Firmware Version Boot Boot ROM Version MIT DBF MIT Database Format Version MIT DB MIT Database Version S N Printer serial number Date The date when the interface setup print report was printed EOP Timer Specify the timeout period before cancellation of print jobs that cannot be received by the printer TCP IPv4...

Page 976: ...ss Prefix Length Primary DNS Server Address Secondary DNS Server Address Use a stateless address Stateless Address 1 Prefix Length 1 Stateless Address 2 Prefix Length 2 Stateless Address 3 Prefix Length 3 Stateless Address 4 Prefix Length 4 Stateless Address 5 Prefix Length 5 Stateless Address 6 Prefix Length 6 Use a link local Address Link Local Address Prefix Length Use a manual address IP Addre...

Page 977: ...ication Bindery PServer File Server Name Print Server Name Print Server Password Polling Interval RPrinter Print Server Name Printer Number NDS PServer Tree Name Context Name Print Server Name Print Server Password Polling Interval NPrinter Print Server Name Printer Number AppleTalk Phase Type AppleTalk settings values Name Network Number Zone Network Interface Physical Interface Network interface...

Page 978: ...Network Setting Network Environment 959 Using RemoteUI 962 Initial Settings 965 NetWare Settings 974 Mac OS X Settings 984 Other Settings 991 Network Setting iPF8300S 10 958 ...

Page 979: ...9 Unix Red Hat 9 Compatible computer A computer that runs one of the above operating systems Printing over a TCP IP network when using IPv6 Compatible operating systems Windows Vista Home Basic Business Ultimate Windows Server 2008 Standard Edition or Enterprise Edition Windows 7 Windows Vista x64 Windows Server 2008 x64 Windows 7 x64 Mac OS X 10 3 9 or later Note When using IPv6 you must specify ...

Page 980: ...etWare network Compatible servers Novell NetWare 4 2 5 1 6 0 Compatible clients Windows XP Professional Compatible computer A computer that runs one of the above operating systems Note In NetWare 6 0 iPrint is not supported Network Environment After confirming what type of network environment you will connect the printer to set up the printer and computers as needed Example of a Windows network In...

Page 981: ...PROGRAF printer driver is not compatible with AppleTalk Example of a NetWare network Note Even if there is a NetWare server in your network environment you can use it in conjunction with TCP IP or AppleTalk In this case complete the settings for each protocol you will use Network Setting Network Environment iPF8300S Network Environment 10 961 ...

Page 982: ...r the Remo teUI screen is displayed and you can use RemoteUI Important To use RemoteUI an IP address must be set on the printer in advance For the method of setting an IP ad dress see Configuring the IP Address on the Printer P 965 What You Can Do With RemoteUI With RemoteUI you can access the printer via a network configure network settings and display the current status of the printer various ty...

Page 983: ... printer settings for networks refer to the following topics Configuring the Printer s TCP IP Network Settings With RemoteUI P 970 Configuring the Printer s AppleTalk Network Settings P 989 Configuring the Printer s NetWare Network Settings With RemoteUI P 981 Specifying Printer Related Information P 991 Network Setting Using RemoteUI iPF8300S Using RemoteUI 10 963 ...

Page 984: ...make sure the DNS settings are cor rectly configured Depending on the network environment you may not be able to start RemoteUI Confirm whether System Setup Use RemoteUI is set to On on the Control Panel of the printer Note RemoteUI also offers many other features You can display the ink levels check error messages and other status information and cancel print jobs By factory default the English s...

Page 985: ...onfiguring the IP Address Using the Printer Control Panel P 966 Configuring the IP Address Using ARP and PING Commands P 967 Important If you use a DHCP server for automatic assignment of the printer s IP address printing may no longer be possible after the printer is turned off and on This is because an IP address different from before has been assigned Thus when using DHCP server functions consu...

Page 986: ...K button 7 Press or to select IP Address and then press the OK button 8 After you press or to select the input field numerical input is possible 9 Press the or button to enter the value Note Hold down to increase the value continuously However 0 follows 2 for digits of 100 and 0 fol lows 9 for digits of 10 and 1 Hold down to decrease the value continuously However 2 follows 0 for digits of 100 and...

Page 987: ...u will need to know the printer s MAC address You can confirm the MAC ad dress on the Control Panel 1 Check the printer s MAC address You can confirm the MAC address on the Control Panel as follows 1 On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel press or to select the Settings Adj tab 2 Press the OK button The Set Adj Menu is displayed 3 Press or to select Interface Setup and then press the OK ...

Page 988: ...Terminal enter the ping command in the format ping s 479 xxx xxx xxx xxx For details refer to the help file for the command line Note The subnet mask and default gateway are set to 0 0 0 0 Use RemoteUI to change the subnet mask and de fault gateway to match your network settings For details on RemoteUI see Using RemoteUI P 962 Configuring TCP IPv6 Network Settings When printing in a TCP IPv6 netwo...

Page 989: ...otocol using the standard TCP IP port in Windows Standard TCP IP Port Important If you will use the printer in a TCP IP network make sure the printer s IP address is configured correctly Configuring the IP Address on the Printer P 965 1 Open the Printers and Faxes or Printers Devices and Printers window 2 Right click the icon of this printer and choose Properties For Windows 7 and Windows Vista Pr...

Page 990: ...ttings When using an IPv4 IP address 1 Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location or Address box to display the RemoteUI page http printer IP address or name Example http xxx xxx xxx xxx 2 Select Administrator Mode and click Logon 3 If a password has been set on the printer enter the password 4 Click Network in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Network page 5 Cl...

Page 991: ... ters Use single byte letters numbers and hyphens Do not use numbers or for the first character or for the last character NB 18GBipxxxxxx DNS Domain Name Specify the printer domain name up to 63 characters Use single byte letters numbers hyphens and periods Do not use numbers or for the first character or or for the last charac ter blank Multicast DNS Serv ice Name Specify the printer s Multicast ...

Page 992: ...Default Router Ad dress Enter the default router address Prefix Length Enter the prefix length of the default router address 0 Primary DNS Server Address Specify the IP address of the primary DNS server Secondary DNS Server Address Specify the IP address of the secondary DNS server Use the same host name and do main name as IPv4 Activate when using the same DNS host and domain names as for IPv4 Of...

Page 993: ...k OK to display the Network page Note If you are using a DNS server select Enable DNS Dynamic Update and enter the IP Address for DNS serv ers and DNS domain name in Primary DNS Server Address Secondary DNS Server Address and DNS Domain Name respectively Network Setting Initial Settings iPF8300S Configuring the Printer s TCP IP Network Settings With RemoteUI 10 973 ...

Page 994: ...nfigure the settings on each computer for printing in a NetWare network 4 Connect to the NetWare network Install the NetWare client software on all computers that are to perform printing and log in to the NetWare server or tree For details on connecting refer to the documentation for NetWare or your operating system 5 Install the printer driver According to the instructions of your network adminis...

Page 995: ...ter is on and connected to the network Note You can specify the frame type by using RemoteUI if the printer s IP address is configured For instructions on installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility see Installing imagePROGRAF De vice Setup Utility P 443 Specifying the frame type using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility 1 Start imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility 2 In the list of printers select the...

Page 996: ...4 Click the NetWare tab and select the frame type in the NetWare Frame Type list Network Setting NetWare Settings Specifying the Printer s Frame Type iPF8300S 10 976 ...

Page 997: ...fault gateway in Gateway Address Important You must specify the IP address here to be able to configure NetWare protocol settings using Remo teUI 6 Click Set 7 Click OK after the Confirmation message is displayed 8 Exit imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility Network Setting NetWare Settings iPF8300S Specifying the Printer s Frame Type 10 977 ...

Page 998: ... Press or to select On and then press the OK button The display reverts to the NetWare menu 7 Press or to select Frame Type and then press the OK button 8 Press or to select the frame type to use and then press the OK button The display reverts to the NetWare menu 9 Press or to select Print Service and then press the OK button 10 Press or to select the desired print service and then press the OK b...

Page 999: ...y included with NetWare For details on configuring NDPS refer to the NetWare documentation NDS Novell Directory Service and bindery NDS and bindery are both supported Use the mode that is compatible with your network environment Queue server mode and remote printer mode Queue server mode and remote printer mode are both supported Queue server mode When using queue server mode all print server func...

Page 1000: ...Quick Setup the printer is assigned printer number 0 When using the printer in queue server mode do not change the printer number from 0 3 Set a password 1 Right click the print server created in step 2 and choose Details 2 Click Change Password to open the password input dialog box Enter the password 3 Click OK to close the password input dialog box 4 Click OK or Cancel to close the details dialo...

Page 1001: ...sc key several times to display the dialog box for confirming that PCONSOLE is finished 7 Click Yes to exit PCONSOLE Configuring the Printer s NetWare Network Settings With RemoteUI Follow the steps below to configure NetWare protocol settings other than the frame type by using RemoteUI Note For details on RemoteUI see Using RemoteUI P 962 1 Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the...

Page 1002: ...ers Print Server Password Set a password for the print server 0 20 characters Polling Interval Specify the interval to confirm jobs 1 15 seconds 5 RPrinter Print Server Name Specify the name of a NetWare print server 0 47 characters Printer Number Specify the number of the printer connected to the NetWare print server 0 15 0 NDS PServer Tree Name Specify the name of an NDS tree that has a NetWare ...

Page 1003: ...s P 979 If you have selected NDS PServer Queue Server Mode Using an NDS Print Server 1 In Tree Name and Context Name enter the tree and context name of the print server 2 In Print Server Name enter the name of the print server created in Specifying NetWare Print Serv ices P 979 3 In Print Server Password enter the password of the print server created in Specifying NetWare Print Services P 979 4 In...

Page 1004: ...igure the destination when using the printer in a TCP IP network Important If you use the printer in a TCP IP network make sure the printer s IP address is configured correctly See Configuring the IP Address Using the Printer Control Panel P 966 Configuring the Destination Mac OS X 1 Navigate to Applications Canon Utilities imagePROGRAF PrinterSetup and double click imagePROGRAF PrinterSetup app 2...

Page 1005: ...he model and type and then enter the IP address before clicking the Next button 5 Complete Printer Name and Location as desired and click Register Network Setting Mac OS X Settings iPF8300S Configuring the Destination in TCP IP Networks 10 985 ...

Page 1006: ...mputer and printer are on the same network For information about net work settings ask your network administrator By default Bonjour is activated on the printer You can activate or deactivate the Bonjour function or change the printer name by using RemoteUI For instructions on changing it see Using RemoteUI P 962 1 Navigate to Applications Canon Utilities imagePROGRAF PrinterSetup and double click...

Page 1007: ...printer to register and click Next 4 Complete Printer Name and Location as desired and click Register 5 Click Finish Network Setting Mac OS X Settings iPF8300S Configuring the Destination for Bonjour Network 10 987 ...

Page 1008: ...nu is displayed 3 Press or to select Interface Setup and then press the OK button 4 Press or to select AppleTalk and then press the OK button 5 Press or to select On and then press the OK button 6 Press the Menu button If you have changed any settings a confirmation message is displayed In this case press the OK button Important Be sure to complete step 6 This will activate the values you have ent...

Page 1009: ...hoose Built in Ethernet Next click AppleTalk select Make AppleTalk Active and click Apply now 3 Close the Network window and save the settings Configuring the Printer s AppleTalk Network Settings Follow the steps below to configure the AppleTalk network settings 1 Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location or Address box to display the RemoteUI page http printer IP address o...

Page 1010: ...haracters However do not use the following single byte characters Also avoid using which represents the default zone in the middle of a string 1 The object name you have specified in Name is displayed in Printer Setup Utility or Print Center in Mac OS X 10 2 8 10 4 If you use multiple printers in the same zone assign a unique name to each printer By de fault the network interface name is Canon NB ...

Page 1011: ...nding on what information you want to specify To change the administrator password click the Change Password button in the Security group 6 Refer to the table of settings for device information and security as you complete these settings Security setting items are displayed when you click the Change Password button in the Security group Device Information Settings Item Details Default Setting Devi...

Page 1012: ...ton 4 Press or to select Ethernet Driver and then press the OK button 5 Press or to select Auto Detect and then press the OK button 6 Press or to select Off and then press the OK button The display reverts to the Ethernet Driver menu 7 Press or to select Comm Mode and then press the OK button 8 Press or to select the communication mode and then press the OK button The display reverts to the Ethern...

Page 1013: ...Monitor Windows function to set up email recipients and message timing Besides being informed of finished print jobs or errors you can also complete settings for email notification when service is needed or it s time to replace consumables For detailed instructions see Specifying Printer Related Information P 991 Note For details on email notification using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor in Windows r...

Page 1014: ...e RemoteUI page http printer IP address or name Example http xxx xxx xxx xxx 2 Select Administrator Mode and click Logon 3 If a password has been set on the printer enter the password 4 Click Network in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Network page 5 Click Reset to Default settings in the lower right corner of the Network Interface group 6 After confirming the message click OK to res...

Page 1015: ...enance and Consumables Ink Tanks 996 Printheads 1011 Cutter Unit 1024 Maintenance Cartridge 1028 Cleaning the Printer 1039 Other Maintenance 1044 Consumables 1053 Maintenance and Consumables iPF8300S 11 995 ...

Page 1016: ...fl oz MBK Ink Tank PFI 304MBK BK Ink Tank PFI 304BK C Ink Tank PFI 304C M Ink Tank PFI 304M Y Ink Tank PFI 304Y PC Ink Tank PFI 304PC PM Ink Tank PFI 304PM GY Ink Tank PFI 304GY 700 ml 23 7 fl oz MBK Ink Tank PFI 704MBK BK Ink Tank PFI 704BK C Ink Tank PFI 704C M Ink Tank PFI 704M Y Ink Tank PFI 704Y PC Ink Tank PFI 704PC PM Ink Tank PFI 704PM GY Ink Tank PFI 704GY Maintenance and Consumables Ink ...

Page 1017: ...f printer This will prevent correct ink level detection which may damage the printer or cause other problems We recommend using up an Ink Tank in the course of printing within six months after breaking the seal Printing quality may be affected if you use older ink tanks Do not leave the printer without ink tanks installed for extended periods a month or more Residual ink may become clogged inside ...

Page 1018: ...g Ink may leak out Note Ink Tank replacement is possible even during printing when print jobs are being canceled or when paper is being advanced Access the menu for Ink Tank replacement 1 On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel press or to select the Ink tab Note If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed press the Menu button 2 Press the OK button The Ink Menu is displayed 3 Press or t...

Page 1019: ...ly when replacing tanks Jolting the printer during printing may deteriorate print quality 2 Lift the stopper a of the Ink Tank Lock Lever for the color to replace Lift the Ink Tank Lock Lever until it stops and then push it down to the front Note Push the Ink Tank Lock Lever down until it locks Make sure the Ink Tank Lock Lever does not return to the original position Maintenance and Consumables I...

Page 1020: ...e ink may leak and cause stains Put the removed Ink Tank in a plastic bag and seal it Note Dispose of used ink tanks according to local regulations Remove the Ink Tank 700 ml 1 Open the Ink Tank Cover of the tank for replacement and check the Ink Lamp The Ink Lamp flashes quickly if there is no ink left Maintenance and Consumables Ink Tanks Replacing Ink Tanks iPF8300S 11 1000 ...

Page 1021: ...the Ink Tank Lock Lever for the color to replace Lift the Ink Tank Lock Lever until it stops and then push it down to the front Note Push the Ink Tank Lock Lever down until it locks Make sure the Ink Tank Lock Lever does not return to the original position 3 Hold the Ink Tank by the handle a and remove it Press the OK button Maintenance and Consumables Ink Tanks iPF8300S Replacing Ink Tanks 11 100...

Page 1022: ...egulations Load the Ink Tank 330 ml 1 Before opening the pouch tilt the Ink Tank to the left and right gently seven or eight times Important Do not remove and agitate ink tanks that have already been installed in the printer Ink may leak out If you do not agitate the Ink Tank the ink may settle which may affect printing quality Maintenance and Consumables Ink Tanks Replacing Ink Tanks iPF8300S 11 ...

Page 1023: ...lder facing as shown with the ink holes down Important Ink tanks cannot be loaded in the holder if the color or orientation is incorrect If the Ink Tank does not fit in the holder do not force it into the holder Make sure the color of the Ink Tank Lock Lever matches the color of the Ink Tank and check the orientation of the Ink Tank before reloading it Maintenance and Consumables Ink Tanks iPF8300...

Page 1024: ...until it stops and then push it down until it clicks into place 5 Make sure the Ink Lamp is lit in red Note If the Ink Lamp is not lit in red reload the tank Maintenance and Consumables Ink Tanks Replacing Ink Tanks iPF8300S 11 1004 ...

Page 1025: ...nds and tilt it to the left and right as shown shaking gently it seven or eight times Caution 700 ml ink tanks are heavy so use your whole arm to agitate it instead of just your wrist If you agi tate it using just your wrist you may injure your wrist Important Do not remove and agitate ink tanks that have already been installed in the printer Ink may leak out If you do not agitate the Ink Tank the...

Page 1026: ...lder facing as shown with the ink holes down Important Ink tanks cannot be loaded in the holder if the color or orientation is incorrect If the Ink Tank does not fit in the holder do not force it into the holder Make sure the color of the Ink Tank Lock Lever matches the color of the Ink Tank and check the orientation of the Ink Tank before reloading it Maintenance and Consumables Ink Tanks Replaci...

Page 1027: ...until it stops and then push it down until it clicks into place 5 Make sure the Ink Lamp is lit in red Note If the Ink Lamp is not lit in red reload the tank Maintenance and Consumables Ink Tanks iPF8300S Replacing Ink Tanks 11 1007 ...

Page 1028: ...over when no Ink Tank is installed as when moving the printer push the release lever a as shown while returning the Ink Tank Lock Lever to the original position Checking Ink Tank Levels On the Display Screen you can check how much ink is left in the ink tanks To check remaining Ink Tank levels access the Tab Selection screen on the Control Panel and press or to select the Ink tab Maintenance and C...

Page 1029: ...ted as shown below If the Display Screen indicates to replace the Ink Tank replace the Ink Tank If a message is displayed indicating to check the remaining ink levels or after tasks that consume a lot of ink such as large format printing or head cleaning check the remaining levels and replace Ink Tank as needed See Replacing Ink Tanks P 997 When to Replace Ink Tanks Replace or prepare to replace i...

Page 1030: ... this case replace or prepare to replace the Ink Tank before maintenance If a message for ink replacement is shown on the Display Screen When ink runs out the Message Lamp flashes a message regarding Ink Tank replacement is shown on the Display Screen and printing is disabled Replace the Ink Tank at this point Maintenance and Consumables Ink Tanks When to Replace Ink Tanks iPF8300S 11 1010 ...

Page 1031: ...zles are clear by printing a test pattern to check the nozzles Note Nozzles are periodically checked to ensure they are clear Configure the settings on the Control Panel menu in Nozzle Check See Menu Settings P 938 Paper to Prepare When Using Rolls An unused roll at least 10 inches wide When Using Sheets One sheet of unused paper of at least A4 Letter size 1 Load paper Attaching the Roll Holder to...

Page 1032: ...ns of the horizontal lines are faint or incomplete the nozzles for those colors are clogged If horizontal lines are faint or incomplete follow the steps below and check again for nozzle clogging 1 Clean the Printhead See Cleaning the Printhead P 1012 2 Print a test pattern to check the nozzles Important If you repeat these steps several times but the horizontal lines are still faint or incomplete ...

Page 1033: ...ically checked to ensure they are clear Configure the settings on the Control Panel menu in Nozzle Check See Menu Settings P 938 Perform cleaning as follows 1 On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel press or to select the Settings Adj tab Note If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed press the Menu button 2 Press the OK button The Set Adj Menu is displayed 3 Press or to select Mainten...

Page 1034: ...rinting The Printhead becomes extremely hot and there is a risk of burns Important There may be ink around the nozzles of the Printhead you remove Handle the Printhead carefully during replacement The ink may stain clothing Do not open the Printhead pouch until immediately before installation After removing the Printhead from the pouch install it right away If the Printhead is left after the pouch...

Page 1035: ... select Maintenance and then press the OK button 6 Press or to select Replace P head and then press the OK button 7 Press or to select the Printhead for replacement Select Printhead L when replacing the left printhead Printhead R when replacing the right printhead and L R Printheads when replacing both Make sure your selection is correct 8 Press the OK button Ink is now filled After about three mi...

Page 1036: ...n the Display Screen regarding head replacement 2 If the Carriage Cover is dirty use a damp cloth that you have wrung out completely to wipe it clean Maintenance and Consumables Printheads Replacing the Printhead iPF8300S 11 1016 ...

Page 1037: ...tal contacts of the Carriage This may damage the printer 3 If the ventilation duct a is dirty use a damp cloth that you have wrung out completely to wipe it clean If the Carriage is obscuring the ventilation duct move the Carriage manually before cleaning the duct Maintenance and Consumables Printheads iPF8300S Replacing the Printhead 11 1017 ...

Page 1038: ...Pull up the Carriage Cover to open it completely 5 Pull the Printhead Fixer Lever forward all the way to open it completely Maintenance and Consumables Printheads Replacing the Printhead iPF8300S 11 1018 ...

Page 1039: ...er Cover to open it completely 7 Remove the Printhead and press the OK button Note Dispose of the used Printhead in accordance with local regulations Maintenance and Consumables Printheads iPF8300S Replacing the Printhead 11 1019 ...

Page 1040: ... hand to remove the orange Protective Part a Squeeze the grips c of Protective Part b and pull it down to remove it Important The inside surface of the Protective Part a and Protective Part b is coated with ink to protect the nozzles Be careful not to touch these surfaces when removing the caps The Printhead contains ink to protect the nozzles We recommend removing Protective Part b as you hold it...

Page 1041: ...ert it into the Carriage Carefully push the printhead firmly into the Carriage ensuring that the nozzles and metal contacts do not touch the carriage 11 Pull the Printhead Fixer Cover down toward the front to lock the Printhead in place Maintenance and Consumables Printheads iPF8300S Replacing the Printhead 11 1021 ...

Page 1042: ...ush the Printhead Fixer Lever toward the back of the printer until it clicks 13 Push the Carriage Cover down toward the front Maintenance and Consumables Printheads Replacing the Printhead iPF8300S 11 1022 ...

Page 1043: ...atic Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors Head Posi Adj P 850 15 Follow the instructions on the Display Screen and supply paper that you will use for printing After the paper is advanced Head Posi Adj will be executed automatically See Automatic Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors Head Posi Adj P 850 Note When printing fine lines or text at high precision on glossy or semi glossy photo ...

Page 1044: ...r to select the Settings Adj tab Note If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed press the Menu button 2 Press the OK button The Set Adj Menu is displayed 3 Press or to select Maintenance and then press the OK button 4 Press or to select Change Cutter and then press the OK button The Carriage moves to the center and a message on the Display Screen requests you to open the Top Cover Note If you d...

Page 1045: ... a damp cloth that you have wrung out completely to wipe it clean Important Do not touch the Linear Scale a Carriage Shaft b or Fixed Blade c This may stain your hands and damage the printer Maintenance and Consumables Cutter Unit iPF8300S Replacing the Cutter Unit 11 1025 ...

Page 1046: ...sassemble the Cutter Unit Touching the blade may cause injury Note Dispose of the used Cutter Unit in accordance with local regulations 9 Holding the new Cutter Unit by the Lock Lever a and grip b insert it on the Carriage until it clicks into place c Important After installing the Cutter Unit hold it only by the grip b and pull the Cutter Unit forward to make sure it does not come off It may dama...

Page 1047: ... Cutter Unit lock Press or to select Yes and then press the OK button 13 The Carriage is moved and a confirmation message is displayed about resetting the cut count To reset the cut counter press or to select Yes and then press the OK button Maintenance and Consumables Cutter Unit iPF8300S Replacing the Cutter Unit 11 1027 ...

Page 1048: ...ce Cartridge P 1028 Precautions when handling the Maintenance Cartridge Take the following precautions when handling the Maintenance Cartridge Caution For safety keep the Maintenance Cartridge out of the reach of children If ink is accidentally ingested contact a physician immediately Important Do not remove the Maintenance Cartridge except to replace it Ink may leak out To prevent ink from leakin...

Page 1049: ...during initialization immediately after turning on the printer dur ing Printhead cleaning or when ink is being absorbed Ink may leak out Access the menu for Maintenance Cartridge replacement 1 On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel press or to select the Settings Adj tab Note If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed press the Menu button 2 Press the OK button The Set Adj Menu is disp...

Page 1050: ...ut Important Used maintenance cartridges are heavy Always grasp the cartridge firmly and keep the cartridge lev el during removal and storage If you drop a used Maintenance Cartridge or store it at an angle ink may leak and cause stains The remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity is recorded on each printer Do not install a used Maintenance Cartridge in another printer Maintenance and Consumables...

Page 1051: ...l contacts a This may damage the Maintenance Cartridge 4 Attach the packaging material to the used Maintenance Cartridge and put it in the box Keep it level as you put it in the plastic bag Expel excess air from the plastic bag and seal the zipper Maintenance and Consumables Maintenance Cartridge iPF8300S Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge 11 1031 ...

Page 1052: ...with active and ongoing environmental programs Canon supports recycling of used maintenance cartridges Follow the instructions provided with the new Maintenance Cartridge that describe how to process the used Maintenance Cartridge 6 Wipe away any soiling on the Maintenance Cartridge Cover Important Support the Maintenance Cartridge Cover from underneath as you wipe it Maintenance and Consumables M...

Page 1053: ...er now initializes the Maintenance Cartridge Next replace the Shaft Cleaner Replacing the Shaft Cleaner Replace the Shaft Cleaner when you replace the Maintenance Cartridge New Shaft Cleaner is included with replacement Maintenance Cartridge Maintenance and Consumables Maintenance Cartridge iPF8300S Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge 11 1033 ...

Page 1054: ...the Tab Selection screen is not displayed press the Menu button 2 Press the OK button The Set Adj Menu is displayed 3 Press or to select Maintenance and then press the OK button 4 Press or to select Repl S Cleaner and then press the OK button After the Carriage is moved the Display Screen indicates Open Upper Cover 5 Open the Top Cover Note If you do not respond within two minutes shaft cleaner re...

Page 1055: ...ps a and pull it to the right to remove it Important Do not touch the Linear Scale a Carriage Shaft b or Fixed Blade c This may stain your hands and damage the printer Maintenance and Consumables Maintenance Cartridge iPF8300S Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge 11 1035 ...

Page 1056: ...put the used Shaft Cleaner in the small box before putting it in the larger box with the used Maintenance Cartridge for disposal 8 Close the Top Cover The Carriage moves back into position Maintenance and Consumables Maintenance Cartridge Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge iPF8300S 11 1036 ...

Page 1057: ...aintenance Cartridge capacity and prepare a new Maintenance Cartridge as needed See Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge P 1028 When to Replace the Maintenance Cartridge Replace or prepare to replace the Maintenance Cartridge in the following situations If a message for checking the Maintenance Cartridge is shown on the Display Screen When the Maintenance Cartridge is almost full the Message Lamp i...

Page 1058: ...placement is shown on the Display Screen When the Maintenance Cartridge is almost empty the Message Lamp lights a message to replace the Maintenance Car tridge is displayed on the Display Screen and you cannot print Replace the Maintenance Cartridge with a new one Maintenance and Consumables Maintenance Cartridge When to Replace the Maintenance Cartridge iPF8300S 11 1038 ...

Page 1059: ... the printer 3 Using a damp cloth that you have wrung out completely wipe away any dirt or paper dust from the Paper Feed Slot a power cord plug and so on Dry these parts with a dry cloth Warning Never use flammable solvents such as alcohol benzene or thinner If these substances come into con tact with electrical components inside the printer there is a risk of fire or electrical shock Important I...

Page 1060: ...replaced the roll After printing on paper that generates a lot of paper dust If the message Blue platen switch is dirty is displayed Important If the Platen inside the Top Cover becomes dirty it may soil the underside of paper We recommend cleaning the Platen after borderless printing or printing on small paper If the Ejection Guide is dirty it may soil the edge of the paper when the paper is cut ...

Page 1061: ... Borderless Printing Ink Grooves b or on the cutter guide c use the Cleaning Brush d provided with the printer to wipe it away Note If the Cleaning Brush is dirty rinse it in water Maintenance and Consumables Cleaning the Printer iPF8300S Cleaning Inside the Top Cover 11 1041 ...

Page 1062: ...s d the Ejection Guide e the cutter guide f around the ink suction holes at left g around the Borderless Printing Ink Grooves at right h on the blue Switch i and so on Warning Never use flammable solvents such as alcohol benzene or thinner If these substances come into con tact with electrical components inside the printer there is a risk of fire or electrical shock Maintenance and Consumables Cle...

Page 1063: ...a dry cloth to wipe inside the Top Cover This may create a static charge which may at tract dust and affect the printing quality Do not touch the clear sheet on the side of the Top Cover Roller This may damage the roller 4 Close the Top Cover Maintenance and Consumables Cleaning the Printer iPF8300S Cleaning Inside the Top Cover 11 1043 ...

Page 1064: ...capacity Replace the Maintenance Cartridge before transfer prepara tions See Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge P 1028 Note Depending on the state of the printer part replacement may be necessary when preparing to transfer the printer that is when you execute the printer menu item to prepare for transfer Ink must be drained before Level 2 or Level 3 printer transfer as described in the following ...

Page 1065: ... button 2 Press the OK button The Set Adj Menu is displayed 3 Press or to select Prep MovePrinter and then press the OK button 4 Press or to select the level of transfer and then press the OK button 5 Press or to select Execute and then press the OK button to display the confirmation screen 6 Press or to select Yes and then press the OK button The printer is now prepared for transfer Level 1 Once ...

Page 1066: ...ossible If this message is displayed press the OK button and contact your Canon dealer for assistance Removing Ink Tanks 1 Open the left and right ink tank covers 2 Lift the stopper a of the Ink Tank Lock Lever a Lift the Ink Tank Lock Lever until it stops and then push it down to the front Maintenance and Consumables Other Maintenance Preparing to Transfer the Printer iPF8300S 11 1046 ...

Page 1067: ...nt Store the Ink Tank you removed in the box with the ink holes a facing up Otherwise ink may leak and cause stains 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to remove all ink tanks Maintenance and Consumables Other Maintenance iPF8300S Preparing to Transfer the Printer 11 1047 ...

Page 1068: ...t this point ink is drawn out from inside the tubes Important Do not remove the Maintenance Cartridge during this process Ink may leak out When the process is finished Preparations for moving the printer finished Turn the power off is displayed Maintenance and Consumables Other Maintenance Preparing to Transfer the Printer iPF8300S 11 1048 ...

Page 1069: ...tate If you accidentally unplug the printer plug it in again reinstall the ink tanks and follow this procedure again 2 Disconnect the power cord interface cable and Media Take up Unit Power Inlet 3 Open the Top Cover and lift the Ejection Guide 4 Remove the four ejection supports and lower the Ejection Guide Maintenance and Consumables Other Maintenance iPF8300S Preparing to Transfer the Printer 1...

Page 1070: ...he Belt insert it between the Belt Stopper and affix the Belt Stopper with a hex screw at the position indica ted Maintenance and Consumables Other Maintenance Preparing to Transfer the Printer iPF8300S 11 1050 ...

Page 1071: ...r hands and damage the printer 6 Close the Top Cover 7 Tape down printer covers to secure them in the reverse order of tape removal during installation 8 If the Output Stacker is installed reverse the installation procedure to remove the Output Stacker 9 Remove the Stand by reversing the installation procedure when it was attached to the printer Maintenance and Consumables Other Maintenance iPF830...

Page 1072: ... Adj tab Note If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed press the Menu button 2 Press the OK button The Set Adj Menu is displayed 3 Press or to select Printer Info and then press the OK button 4 Press or to select System Info and then press the OK button The firmware version is displayed Updating the Firmware To obtain the latest firmware visit the Canon website If the firmware available online...

Page 1073: ...Consumables Ink Tanks 996 Printhead 1011 Cutter Unit 1024 Maintenance Cartridge 1028 Maintenance and Consumables Consumables iPF8300S 11 1053 ...

Page 1074: ...oblems Regarding Paper 1057 Printing does not start 1068 The printer stops during a print job 1070 Problems with the printing quality 1071 Cannot print over a network 1083 Installation problems 1085 Other problems 1087 Troubleshooting iPF8300S 12 1054 ...

Page 1075: ...n print jobs are being canceled or when paper is being advanced When to Replace Ink Tanks P 1009 Does this printer sup port sub ink tank sys tem This printer supports sub ink tank system Even if an ink tank becomes empty during printing since a certain amount of ink always is stored in a sub ink tank you can replace the ink tank while printing Replacing Ink Tanks P 997 I want to know how to config...

Page 1076: ...eviously To print with colors aligned from multiple printers When the execution guide is displayed Using Color Calibration for Color Adjustment P 865 How do I print with out wasting paper To conserve paper you can specify in the printer driver to rotate originals 90 degrees or to print without top and bottom margins Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees P 172 Conserving Roll Paper...

Page 1077: ...7 Clearing Jammed Roll Paper If roll paper jams follow the steps below to remove jams 1 Turn the printer off See Turning the Printer On and Off P 3 2 Open the Top Cover Note If the leading edge of the roll jams in the carriage such as when the paper curls strongly you may be able to avoid paper jamming by setting the roll cutting method to Manual and setting the detection of paper leading edge to ...

Page 1078: ...n to cut the paper Be careful not to pinch your fingers between the Carriage and Platen if you have push ed the Carriage to the left edge or if a paper jam occurs during cutting Important Do not touch the Linear Scale a Carriage Shaft b or Fixed Blade c This may stain your hands and damage the printer Troubleshooting Problems Regarding Paper Clearing Jammed Roll Paper iPF8300S 12 1058 ...

Page 1079: ...mmed portion out toward the front Use scissors or a cutting tool to cut away the printed or wrinkled portion Caution When cutting paper be careful to avoid injury or damage to the printer Troubleshooting Problems Regarding Paper iPF8300S Clearing Jammed Roll Paper 12 1059 ...

Page 1080: ...r in the middle as you gently pull it evenly to the position of the Ejection Guide a Align the right side of the roll paper with the Paper Alignment Line b keeping this side parallel to the line and then lower the Release Lever Important Do not force the roll paper into alignment with the Paper Alignment Line b This may prevent the paper from being advanced straight Troubleshooting Problems Regard...

Page 1081: ...teps to cut it 1 Press the Feed button 2 Hold down the button to advance the paper 3 Press the Cut button and then select Yes to cut the edge See Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls P 802 Clearing a Jammed Sheet If a sheet jams follow the steps below to remove it 1 Turn the printer off See Turning the Printer On and Off P 3 2 Open the Top Cover Troubleshooting Problems Regarding Paper iPF8300S...

Page 1082: ...ion to cut the paper Be careful not to pinch your fingers between the Carriage and Platen if you have push ed the Carriage to the left edge or if a paper jam occurs during cutting Important Do not touch the Linear Scale a Carriage Shaft b or Fixed Blade c This may stain your hands and damage the printer Troubleshooting Problems Regarding Paper Clearing a Jammed Sheet iPF8300S 12 1062 ...

Page 1083: ...sible hold the paper and pull it out toward the front 6 If the paper is not visible lift the Ejection Guide remove the Roll Holder and clear the paper jam from below Troubleshooting Problems Regarding Paper iPF8300S Clearing a Jammed Sheet 12 1063 ...

Page 1084: ...riage to the right until it stops Important Always move the Carriage to the right side If the Carriage is on the left a Carriage error may occur when you turn on the printer 8 Lower the Release Lever and close the Top Cover 9 Turn the printer on See Turning the Printer On and Off P 3 Troubleshooting Problems Regarding Paper Clearing a Jammed Sheet iPF8300S 12 1064 ...

Page 1085: ...ting Method for Rolls P 802 The Cutter Unit is not installed correctly Reinstall the Cutter Unit correctly See Replacing the Cutter Unit P 1024 The Cutter Unit blade is worn out Replace the Cutter Unit See Replacing the Cutter Unit P 1024 Cut Speed is not configured correctly in the Control Panel menu Change the Cut Speed setting in the Control Panel menu See Menu Structure P 928 During cutting pr...

Page 1086: ...ake up Unit Optional P 842 The media take up unit continues rotating Cause Corrective Action There is a foreign object in the path of the Media Take up Sensor indicated by a dotted line Remove the foreign object from the Media Take up Sensor path Arrange the Basket Cloth and Basket Rod so they do not in terfere with the Media Take up Sensor Troubleshooting Problems Regarding Paper The media take u...

Page 1087: ... P 831 If the Media Take up Unit con tinues rotating contact your Canon dealer for assistance The size of clear film cannot be detected Cause Corrective Action The Platen is soiled with ink or other substances Open the Top Cover and clean the entire Platen See Cleaning Inside the Top Cover P 1040 Margins are wide Cause Corrective Action Rolls are advanced a specific amount before cutting to preven...

Page 1088: ...axes or Printers window 2 Clear Pause Printing in the File menu to restart the print job In Mac OS X restart the print job as follows 1 Click Print Fax This is identified as Printer Setup Utility or Print Center in other versions of Mac OS X 2 Select the printer and then Resume Printer or Start Jobs in the Printers menu to restart the print job The printer does not respond even if print jobs are s...

Page 1089: ...is in pro gress Please wait until ink agitation is finished The time for agitation varies depending on how long the printer was off Between about a minute and a half to twenty minutes Troubleshooting Printing does not start iPF8300S The display screen indicates Agitating 12 1069 ...

Page 1090: ...Rolls P 5 The printer ejects blank unprinted paper Status Corrective Action The leading edge of the roll paper was cut to straighten it The leading edge of rolls may be cut to straighten it if you have selected Trim Edge First On or Automatic in the Control Panel menu See Cutting the Leading Edge of Roll Paper Automatically P 810 The Printhead nozzles are clogged Print a test pattern to check the ...

Page 1091: ...eck the nozzles and see if they are clogged See Checking for Nozzle Clogging P 1011 Because the printer was left with out ink tanks installed for some time ink has become clogged in the ink supply system After the ink tanks have been installed for 24 hours run Head Cleaning B from the Control Panel See Cleaning the Printhead P 1012 Paper is jammed inside the Top Cover Follow the steps below to rem...

Page 1092: ... or paper that curls or wrin kles easily after absorbing ink When printing on Heavyweight Coated Paper or other paper based media choose a VacuumStrngth setting of Strong or Strongest in the Control Panel menu If rubbing still occurs in the Control Panel menu use a higher Head Height setting See Adjusting the Vacuum Strength VacuumStrngth P 863 See Troubleshooting Paper Abrasion and Blurry Images ...

Page 1093: ... that has been printed on previously See Loading Rolls in the Printer P 786 See Loading Sheets in the Printer P 813 A cut line is printed because Cut DustReduct is On in the Control Panel menu to reduce cutting dust If this function is not needed set CutDustReduct to Off in the Control Panel menu See Menu Settings P 938 The Printhead is set too low in the Control Panel menu In the Control Panel me...

Page 1094: ... Panel menu and then open the Top Cover and clean the Platen See Cleaning Inside the Top Cover P 1040 Open the Top Cover and clean the Platen After this manually advance the roll onto the Platen before printing See Cleaning Inside the Top Cover P 1040 See Feeding Roll Paper Manually P 798 The Platen suction is too strong In the Control Panel menu reduce the level of VacuumStrngth See Adjusting the...

Page 1095: ...lightly even on the same model of printer if you use a different version of the firmware or printer driver or when you print under different settings or in a different printing environment Follow these steps to prepare the printing environ ment 1 Use the same version of firmware or printer driver 2 Specify the same value for all settings items 3 Execute color calibration When reinstalling the prin...

Page 1096: ...e Action Line Drawing Text is selected when printing images in many solid colors In Print Priority in the Advanced Settings of the printer driver choose Image You are printing on paper that curls easily Printed colors may appear uneven on the leading edge of paper that is suscepti ble to curling Select a stronger level in VacuumStrngth in the Control Panel menu to increase suction against the pape...

Page 1097: ... mm from the leading edge The position varies depending on the Print Quality setting In this case select Scan Wait Time Area Entire area However note that printing will now take longer See Menu Settings P 938 Image edges are blurred or white banding occurs Cause Corrective Action The Platen suction is too strong In the Control Panel menu reduce the level of VacuumStrngth See Adjusting the Vacuum S...

Page 1098: ... set the blue Switch on the Platen to the side for borderless printing Printing quality may be affec ted if the Switch is incorrectly set 1 Remove any loaded paper that will not be used Rolls See Removing the Roll from the Printer P 794 Sheets See Removing Sheets P 820 2 Open the Top Cover 3 Remove the Cleaning Brush a Troubleshooting Problems with the printing quality Setting the Blue Switch on t...

Page 1099: ...nds to the size of paper for printing Number Dimensions 2 254 mm 10 in 3 355 mm 14 in 4 432 mm 17 in 5 515 mm JIS B2 or B3 6 594 mm ISO A1 or A2 or 610 mm 24 in 7 841 mm ISO A0 or A1 8 914 mm 36 in 9 1 030 mm JIS B0 or B1 10 1 067 mm 42 in 11 1 117 mm 44 in Troubleshooting Problems with the printing quality iPF8300S Setting the Blue Switch on the Platen 12 1079 ...

Page 1100: ...r 1 Press the Stop button and stop printing 2 Change the type of paper in the printer driver and try printing again The length of printed images is inaccurate in the feeding direction Cause Corrective Action In the Control Panel menu Adj Priority is set to Print Quality Set Adj Priority to Print Length in the Control Panel menu and then ex ecute Adjust Length See Adjusting the Feed Amount P 856 Th...

Page 1101: ... Open Preview When Print Job Starts on the Main sheet 2 Clear the option Page Layout on the Layout sheet 3 Click the Special Settings button on the Layout sheet to display the Special Settings dialog box and then clear the option Fast Graphic Process The blue Switch on the platen is set incorrectly Move the Switch numbered corresponding to the size of pa per for printing opposite to the position S...

Page 1102: ...inting Quality P 848 In the Control Panel menu use a lower Head Height setting See Troubleshooting Paper Abrasion and Blurry Images Head Height P 854 The type of paper specified in the printer driver does not match the type loaded in the printer Load paper of the same type as you have specified in the printer driver See Loading Rolls in the Printer P 786 See Loading Sheets in the Printer P 813 Mak...

Page 1103: ...e Ethernet cable Check the communication mode with the hub Although the printer normally detects the hub communication mode and transmission rate automatically in auto negotiation mode sometimes the hub settings cannot be detected In this case configure the connection method manually specifying the communication mode in use See Configuring the Communication Mode Manually P 992 Cannot print over a ...

Page 1104: ...is available 4 If data transmission to a printer on another subnet fails deactivate NCP burst mode in that printer s network protocol settings 5 If the printer is used in queue server mode specify Other Unknown as the printer type Cannot print over AppleTalk or Bonjour networks Cause Corrective Action The AppleTalk protocol is not enabled on the printer Activate AppleTalk on the printer See Config...

Page 1105: ... Removing printer drivers and imagePROGRAF Printmonitor Macintosh Remove the printer driver or imagePROGRAF Printmonitor as follows 1 Insert the User Software CD ROM provided with the printer in the CD ROM drive 2 Start the printer driver installer included in the User Software CD ROM Open the OS X folder and double click iPF Driver Installer X 3 In the upper left menu choose Uninstall and then cl...

Page 1106: ... removing printer drivers varies depending on the version of Windows 1 From the Windows start menu select Programs imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility Uninstaller image PROGRAF Device Setup Utility to start the wizard 2 In the wizard window click Delete and then click Next 3 Follow the instructions on the screen to remove imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility Troubleshooting Installation problems Removi...

Page 1107: ...e voltage of the outlet and breaker See Specifications P 1123 The printer takes time to start up Cause Corrective Action The printer may have shut down incorrectly last time This may happen after power outages or if the printer is unplugged before it is turned off In this case the next time power is restored the printer s hard disk is checked and startup may take some time Please wait a while beca...

Page 1108: ...e cartridge are not cleared Cause Corrective Action The printer has not detected the new Maintenance Cartridge that was used to replace the old one Remove the new Maintenance Cartridge you have just installed and insert it again firmly Restart the printer The printer consumes a lot of ink Cause Corrective Action Many full page color images are printed In print jobs such as photos images are filled...

Page 1109: ...lling ink Important After ink level detection has been released this function cannot be reactivated for currently loaded Ink Tank To use ink level detection again replace the Ink Tank with new ones specified for use with the printer Repeatedly removing and inserting an Ink Tank may damage the connection between the Ink Tank and the printer which may cause ink leakage from the Ink Tank and damage t...

Page 1110: ...ss or to select Yes and then press the OK button 6 Check the message and press the button 7 Check the message and press the button 8 Press or to select Yes and then press the OK button Troubleshooting Other problems Ink Level Detection iPF8300S 12 1090 ...

Page 1111: ...information is shown on the Display Screen After checking the mes sage press the button 10 Press or to select Yes and then press the OK button Ink level detection is now released Troubleshooting Other problems iPF8300S Ink Level Detection 12 1091 ...

Page 1112: ...per 1095 Messages regarding ink 1107 Messages regarding printing or adjustment 1110 Messages regarding printheads 1113 Messages regarding the maintenance cartridge 1115 Messages regarding the hard disk 1117 Other Messages 1119 Error Message iPF8300S 13 1092 ...

Page 1113: ...dware error xxxxxxxx xxxx x represents a letter or number 1119 Ink insufficient 1107 Ink tank is empty 1108 Insufficient paper for job 1100 Mail box full Delete unwanted data 1118 Mail box full Now printing without saving data 1117 Mail box nearly full 1118 Maint cart The level is low 1115 Maintenance cartridge full 1115 Maintenance cartridge problem 1116 Maximum jobs stored 1118 Media take up uni...

Page 1114: ... printing is selected but sheets are loaded 1101 Roll printing is selected 1101 Sheet printing is selected 1102 The mail box is full 1117 The paper is too small 1096 The paper is too small 1097 The roll is empty 1101 This paper cannot be used as size is not supported 1100 Top cover is open 1120 Turn on the media take up unit 1105 Unknown file 1120 Wrong ink tank 1109 Wrong maintenance cartridge 11...

Page 1115: ...media take up unit 1105 Borderless printng not possible 1105 Paper position not suitable for borderless printing 1106 Paper mismatch Cause Corrective Action You tried to print a test pattern for printer adjustment on several sheets but sheets of different types or sizes of paper were used When printing a test pattern for adjustment use sheets of the same size and type of paper in the required quan...

Page 1116: ...ets of the same type of paper in the required quantity Replace the paper as follows and per form adjustment again 1 Lift the Release Lever and stop printing 2 Replace the paper See Loading and Printing on Sheets P 9 3 Execute adjustment again from the control panel menu When Detect Mismatch in the Control Panel menu is set to Warning the type of paper loaded does not match the type specified in th...

Page 1117: ...ing and Printing on Sheets P 9 The printer will resume printing Press or to select Stop Printing and then press the OK button Replace roll with 10 in wide or larger roll Cause Corrective Action The loaded paper is too small When you have attempted to print a test print sheet or other printer status informa tion Replace the roll with a roll 10 inches in width or larger as follows 1 Press or to sele...

Page 1118: ...e Corrective Action Paper has been loaded askew or warped paper has been loaded Follow these steps to reload the roll 1 Lift the Release Lever 2 Adjust the right edge of the roll to make it parallel to the right Paper Alignment Line 3 If Not finished printing Finish printing remaining jobs is shown on the Display Screen press the OK button Printing will resume starting from the page on which the e...

Page 1119: ...ich the error occurred See Loading Sheets in the Printer P 813 Because the Platen is soiled with ink or other substances the size of the clear film cannot be detected Open the Top Cover and clean the entire Platen See Cleaning Inside the Top Cover P 1040 Error Message Messages regarding paper iPF8300S Paper size not detected 13 1099 ...

Page 1120: ...a Take up Unit replace the roll with a roll that has enough paper for the print job and then try printing again See Removing the Roll from the Printer P 794 See Loading Rolls in the Printer P 786 See Removing Printed Documents from the Media Take up Unit Option al P 842 Press or to select Stop Printing or press the Stop button to stop printing This paper cannot be used as size is not supported Cau...

Page 1121: ...move the roll See Removing the Roll from the Printer P 794 See Removing the Roll Holder from Rolls P 797 2 Load the new roll See Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls P 782 See Loading Rolls in the Printer P 786 3 If no barcode was printed on the roll specify the type of paper See Changing the Type of Paper P 791 4 When you have selected ManageRemainRoll On in the control panel menu and a barcode is ...

Page 1122: ...s loaded Cause Corrective Action A print job for printing on sheets was sent when a roll is loaded 1 Press or to select Remove Roll Paper and then press the OK button to stop printing 2 After removing the roll load and print on a sheet of the type and size of paper you have specified in the printer driver See Removing the Roll from the Printer P 794 See Loading and Printing on Sheets P 9 Press or ...

Page 1123: ...Paper Re tainer 4 Lower the Release Lever See Loading Sheets in the Printer P 813 Important To disable this message if it is displayed repeatedly despite reloading paper for example choose Off or Loose in the Skew Check Lv setting of the printer menu However this may cause jams and printing prob lems because paper may be askew when printed Also the Platen may become soiled which may soil the back ...

Page 1124: ...commended for various types of paper For details on the recommended environmental conditions see the Paper Refer ence Guide See Paper Reference Guide You are using paper that is not compatible with auto matic cutting 1 Specify Manual as the cutting method and use scissors or a cutting tool to cut the roll See Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls P 802 For information about paper that is compati...

Page 1125: ...Disable but a print job was received before the roll was re moved Press or to select Stop Printing and then press the OK button to stop printing The mode switches from take up mode to regular mode after you change the Take up Reel setting in the Set Adj Menu from En able to Disable and lift the Release Lever to remove a roll or af ter you execute Paper Cutting Press or to select Print and then pre...

Page 1126: ...nting The document will be printed with a border Paper position not suitable for borderless printing Cause Corrective Action Because paper expands or contracts depending on the environment of use it may become narrower or wider than the supported width for border less printing Press or to select Stop Printing and then press the OK button Use each type of paper only where the recommended environmen...

Page 1127: ...lace the Ink Tank that is low with a new Ink Tank See Replacing Ink Tanks P 997 No ink left Cause Corrective Action There is no ink left Open the Ink Tank Cover and replace the Ink Tank for which the Ink Lamp is flashing See Replacing Ink Tanks P 997 Remaining level of the ink cannot be correctly detected Cause Corrective Action Ink level detection cannot work cor rectly if you use refill ink tank...

Page 1128: ... Ink Tank Cover Ink tank is empty Cause Corrective Action There is no ink left in an ink tank Open the Ink Tank Cover and replace the Ink Tank for which the Ink Lamp is flashing See Replacing Ink Tanks P 997 Error Message Messages regarding ink Close Ink Tank Cover iPF8300S 13 1108 ...

Page 1129: ... Action There is no Ink Tank of the indicated color in the printer Load the Ink Tank See Replacing Ink Tanks P 997 There is a problem with the Ink Tank Replace it with a new Ink Tank See Replacing Ink Tanks P 997 Wrong ink tank Cause Corrective Action The Ink Tank in the printer is incompatible Load an Ink Tank specified for use with the printer See Replacing Ink Tanks P 997 Error Message Messages...

Page 1130: ... Guide See Paper Reference Guide Always make sure the loaded paper matches the type of paper in the printer paper settings Ad justment cannot be completed correctly unless the loaded paper matches the settings Cannot calibrate Cause Corrective Action The paper for printing a test pattern is soiled Otherwise you have loaded colored paper Press the OK button to clear the error Load unused paper comp...

Page 1131: ...olor Calibration for Color Adjustment P 865 Set Set Exec Guide to Off on the Con trol Panel menu See Menu Structure P 928 Please calibrate using above paper Cause Corrective Action It has become the time for prompting the execution of color calibration This is displayed when paper is loaded in the printer and Set Exec Guide is set to On on the Control Panel menu Execute color calibration See Using...

Page 1132: ...ide See Setting the Blue Switch on the Platen P 1078 Cannot adjust paper feed Cause Corrective Action The Printhead nozzles are clogged Execute Adj Quality again as follows 1 Press the OK button to clear the error 2 Print a test pattern to check the nozzles See Checking for Nozzle Clogging P 1011 3 Clean the Printhead if the nozzles are clogged See Cleaning the Printhead P 1012 4 Execute Adj Quali...

Page 1133: ...rent film is loaded Press the OK button to clear the error We recommend using a type of paper that you often use other than film for Printhead adjust ment See Automatic Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors Head Posi Adj P 850 PHeads wrong pos Cause Corrective Action The printheads are installed in the wrong positions Open the Top Cover and switch the Printhead used once in the right side to t...

Page 1134: ... Printhead L if Printhead L is displayed and the Printhead R if Printhead R is dis played If neither left or right is indicated install both Printhead L and Printhead R See Replacing the Printhead P 1013 Execute printhead cleaning Cause Corrective Action The Printhead noz zles are clogged Follow these steps to clean the Printhead 1 Stop printing by pressing or to select Stop Printing 2 Clean the P...

Page 1135: ... cart The level is low Cause Corrective Action The Maintenance Cartridge is almost full You can continue to print but prepare a new Maintenance Cartridge to use when the message for replacement is displayed No Maintenance Cartridge capacity Cause Corrective Action The Maintenance Cartridge cannot absorb enough ink for Printhead cleaning or other operation After confirming that the printer has stop...

Page 1136: ... used Maintenance Cartridge has been installed Install an unused Maintenance Cartridge specified for use with the printer See Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge P 1028 Error Message Messages regarding the maintenance cartridge Maintenance cartridge problem iPF8300S 13 1116 ...

Page 1137: ... printer Only the corrupted files will be deleted and the printer will restart The mail box is full Cause Corrective Action There is no more space on the printer s hard disk Press the Stop button and stop printing Delete print jobs from the queue See Managing the Job Queue Deleting or Preempting Other Jobs P 725 Delete unneeded jobs stored in personal boxes See Deleting Saved Jobs P 737 Mail box f...

Page 1138: ...ed in the personal box Delete unneeded jobs stored in personal boxes See Deleting Saved Jobs P 737 Mail box full Delete unwanted data Cause Corrective Action 100 jobs are stored in the Personal Box Press the Stop button and stop printing Delete print jobs from the queue See Managing the Job Queue Deleting or Preempting Other Jobs P 725 Delete unneeded jobs stored in personal boxes See Deleting Sav...

Page 1139: ...the desired printing results ERROR Exxx xxxx x represents a letter or number Cause Corrective Action An error requiring service may have occurred Write down the error code and message turn off the printer and con tact your Canon dealer for assistance Hardware error xxxxxxxx xxxx x represents a letter or number Cause Corrective Action The last portion of roll paper was used during a print job The p...

Page 1140: ... required If Parts replacement time has passed is displayed you can continue to use the printer for some time Contact your Canon dealer for assistance Parts replacement time has passed Cause Corrective Action It is past the recommended time to replace consumables for which service is required Contact your Canon dealer for assistance Unknown file Cause Corrective Action Data sent to keep the printe...

Page 1141: ...g lighting may be shin ing on the printer and causing the sensor to malfunction Take steps to ensure the printer is not used when exposed to direct sunlight or strong lighting The performance of a sensor inside the printer may be impaired Turn off the printer and wait at least three seconds before restoring the power If the message is displayed again contact your Canon dealer for as sistance Error...

Page 1142: ...Specifications Printer Specifications 1123 Specifications iPF8300S 14 1122 ...

Page 1143: ... ink tanks Approx 143 kg 315 3 lb Space for installation W D H Printer only 2 293 1 675 1 500 mm 90 3 65 9 59 1 in Applicable standards International Energy Star Law on Promoting Green Purchasing Japan Eco Mark GPN EU RoHS The Eco Declaration Europe WEEE U S presidential directives ErP Lot6 Europe 1 The printer uses a trace amount of power even when turned off To stop all power consumption turn of...

Page 1144: ... PFI 704C 700 ml or 23 7 fl oz M Ink Tank Magenta Ink Pigment ink PFI 304M 330 ml or 11 2 fl oz or PFI 704M 700 ml or 23 7 fl oz Y Ink Tank Yellow Ink Pigment ink PFI 304Y 330 ml or 11 2 fl oz or PFI 704Y 700 ml or 23 7 fl oz PC Ink Tank Photo Cyan Ink Pigment ink PFI 304PC 330 ml or 11 2 fl oz or PFI 704PC 700 ml or 23 7 fl oz PM Ink Tank Photo Ma genta Ink Pigment ink PFI 304PM 330 ml or 11 2 fl...

Page 1145: ...17 Ledger Legal 8 5 x14 Letter 8 5 x11 36 x48 ARCH E 30 x42 ARCH E1 26 x38 ARCH E2 27 x39 ARCH E3 24 x36 ARCH D 18 x24 ARCH C 12 x18 ARCH B 9 x12 ARCH A DIN C0 DIN C1 DIN C2 DIN C3 DIN C4 20 x24 18 x22 14 x17 12 x16 10 x12 10 x15 8 x10 US Photo 16 x20 Poster 20 x30 Poster 30 x40 Poster 42 x60 Poster 44 x62 13 x22 and Poster 300x900mm Print area Normal size Printable area Rolls 5 mm 0 2 in from eac...

Page 1146: ...nt so that your original matches the print area exactly use an oversized paper size that includes the required margin See Printing on Oversized Paper P 93 Margins of Printable Area Margins of Recommended Print Area Top Edge Bottom Edge Sides Top Edge Bottom Edge Sides Sheets 5 mm 0 20 in 23 mm 0 91 in 5 mm 0 20 in 20 mm 0 79 in 23 mm 0 91 in 5 mm 0 20 in Rolls 0 5 mm 0 0 20 in 0 5 mm 0 0 20 in 0 5...

Page 1147: ... is 0 mm For information on paper compatible with borderless printing see the Paper Reference Guide See Types of Paper P 774 Recommended Print Area A margin of 20 mm 0 79 in on top 5 mm 0 20 in on bottom and 5 mm 0 20 in on left and right sides is required Specifications Printer Specifications iPF8300S Print Area 14 1127 ...

Page 1148: ...Appendix How to use this manual 1129 Disposal of the product 1139 Appendix iPF8300S 15 1128 ...

Page 1149: ...rol panel and user interface elements in software such as menus and buttons are indicated as follows in this user manual Control panel buttons Example Press the OK button Control panel messages Example Head Cleaning is displayed Software interface items menus and buttons Example Click OK Keyboard keys Example Press the Tab key Cross reference Other pages or manuals that provide related information...

Page 1150: ... reproduction of this user manual in whole or part is prohibited May we request Thank you for understanding the following points The information in this user manual is subject to change without notice We strive to ensure accuracy of information in this user manual but if you notice errors or omissions please con tact us Searching Topics You can find information in topics of this User Manual by sea...

Page 1151: ...read The terms you searched for will be highlighted in the topic To review multiple topics at once select the check box of desired topics and click the Apply button Appendix How to use this manual iPF8300S Searching Topics 15 1131 ...

Page 1152: ... as an example Printing a group of topics in the manual When you access printable HTML versions of the content from section titles in the table of contents you can specify a group of topics to print 1 Click a section title in the table of contents Here Basic Printing Workflow is used as an example 2 Click Access to the HTML for printing in the title area Appendix How to use this manual HTML Versio...

Page 1153: ...ting Workflow are displayed together in HTML format ready for printing 3 Clear the sections you will not print and click the Apply button Appendix How to use this manual iPF8300S HTML Version of the Manual for Printing 15 1133 ...

Page 1154: ... the table of contents you can specify a group of topics to print 1 Click a section title in the table of contents Here Basic Printing Workflow is used as an example 2 Under Basic Printing Workflow click Printing Procedure Appendix How to use this manual HTML Version of the Manual for Printing iPF8300S 15 1134 ...

Page 1155: ... the HTML for printing in the title area The topics in Printing Procedure are displayed together in HTML format ready for printing Appendix How to use this manual iPF8300S HTML Version of the Manual for Printing 15 1135 ...

Page 1156: ...ss the printing dialog box as follows depending on your computer s operating system Windows In Windows right click anywhere in the explanation area except on a figure or a link In the shortcut menu click Print to display the Print dialog box Appendix How to use this manual HTML Version of the Manual for Printing iPF8300S 15 1136 ...

Page 1157: ...igure or a link while holding the Ctrl key In the shortcut menu click Print Frame to display the Print dialog box 2 Specify conditions as needed and then click Print Windows or Print Macintosh Windows Appendix How to use this manual iPF8300S HTML Version of the Manual for Printing 15 1137 ...

Page 1158: ... Macintosh Note To print only individual topics that are displayed use this method Appendix How to use this manual HTML Version of the Manual for Printing iPF8300S 15 1138 ...

Page 1159: ...Disposal of the product WEEE Directive 1140 Appendix Disposal of the product iPF8300S 15 1139 ...

Page 1160: ...WEEE Directive Appendix Disposal of the product WEEE Directive iPF8300S 15 1140 ...

Page 1161: ...Appendix Disposal of the product iPF8300S WEEE Directive 15 1141 ...

Page 1162: ...Appendix Disposal of the product WEEE Directive iPF8300S 15 1142 ...

Page 1163: ...Appendix Disposal of the product iPF8300S WEEE Directive 15 1143 ...

Page 1164: ...Appendix Disposal of the product WEEE Directive iPF8300S 15 1144 ...

Page 1165: ...Appendix Disposal of the product iPF8300S WEEE Directive 15 1145 ...

Page 1166: ...Appendix Disposal of the product WEEE Directive iPF8300S 15 1146 ...

Page 1167: ...Appendix Disposal of the product iPF8300S WEEE Directive 15 1147 ...

Page 1168: ...Appendix Disposal of the product WEEE Directive iPF8300S 15 1148 ...

Page 1169: ...Main Sheet 215 Maintenance Cartridge 1037 1115 Media Take up Unit 831 842 898 904 N Navigate 984 986 NetWare print service 974 Nozzle 244 516 850 1011 O Open Preview 184 208 216 241 249 Orientation 190 192 397 412 Output Method 236 P Page Setup Pane 514 Page Setup Sheet 233 Photo Paper 23 25 30 34 872 877 882 885 890 892 PosterArtist 44 Power 898 Print Job Log 429 439 Print area 93 Printer Driver ...

Page 1170: ...V Vacuum Strength 863 W When to replace 1013 ...

Page 1171: ......

Page 1172: ... CANON INC 2011 ...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for imagePROGRAF iPF8300S

Brand: GCC Technologies Pages: 59

SureColor S50675

Brand: Epson Pages: 255

SureColor P8000

Brand: Epson Pages: 228

iPF5000 - imagePROGRAF Color Inkjet Printer

Brand: Canon Pages: 4

MICROPLOTTER Proto

Brand: SONOPLOT Pages: 67

Brands by name

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Popular brands

Load more brands